[DIVISION 1 ‑ GENERAL REQUIREMENTS]{.underline}

01010 Summary of Work

01090 Sources for Reference Publications

01311 Contractor-Prepared Network Analysis System

01330 Submittal Procedures

01380 Project Photographs and Video

01400 Contractor Quality Control

01500 Construction Facilities

01560 Environmental Protection

01700 As-Built Records

01740 Health, Safety, and Emergency Response

[DIVISION 2 ‑ SITEWORK]{.underline}

02003 Survey Control for Excavation and Backfilling

02099 Small Access Bridge

02110 Clearing and Grubbing

02112 Erosion and Sediment Control

02225 Excavation, Backfilling, and Compacting

02420 Manhole Structures

02713 Site Piping Systems

02730 Rotary-Drilled Ground Water Monitoring Wells and Directional
Drilled System Piping

02831 Fence, Chain Link

02935 Turf

[DIVISION 3 ‑ CONCRETE]{.underline}

03410 Precast Structural Concrete

[DIVISION 4 ‑ MASONRY]{.underline}

[DIVISION 5 ‑ METALS]{.underline}

[DIVISION 6 ‑ WOODS AND PLASTIC]{.underline}

[DIVISION 7 ‑ THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION]{.underline}

07920 Sealants

[DIVISION 8 ‑ DOORS AND WINDOWS]{.underline}

[DIVISION 9 ‑ FINISHES]{.underline}

[DIVISION 10 -- SPECIALISTS]{.underline}

[DIVISION 11 -- EQUIPMENT]{.underline}

[DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS]{.underline}

[DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION]{.underline}

13999 Operation and Maintenance Requirements

[DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS]{.underline}

[DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL]{.underline}

15011 Mechanical General Requirements

15060 Valves and Piping Appurtenances

[DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL]{.underline}

16010 General Requirements for Electrical Work

16011 Electrical General Requirements

16050 Basic Materials and Methods - Electrical

16301 Underground Electrical Work

16400 Service and Distribution

16901 Process Instrumentation and Controls

**SECTION 01010**

**SUMMARY OF WORK**

**PART 1 GENERAL**

1.1 INTRODUCTION

> The project SITE encompasses sections of the Federal Aviation
> Administration (FAA) William J. Hughes Technical Center (facility) at
> the Atlantic City International Airport in New Jersey. The SITE is
> known as the Recharge Bed area. The SITE is part of the ongoing CERCLA
> Superfund remediation at the FAA facility. The remediation is known as
> the Area B and Area 41 Remedial Action
>
> A Recharge Bed will be constructed to receive water from a new water
> treatment plant located at Area D at the FAA facility. The treatment
> plant will receive recovered ground water from Areas 41, B, D, and
> possibly E (future).
>
> Construction at the site will consist of the excavation and
> construction of the Recharge Bed, conveyance piping, and controls;
> installation of monitoring wells; and the expansion of the existing
> Area B sprinkler system. The Recharge Bed will consist of a
> distribution piping system within a coarse sand layer constructed
> approximately 15 to 20 feet below grade. Once the Recharge Bed is
> constructed, the excavated areas will be completely backfilled with
> native materials and the site will be re-vegetated.

1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1.2.1 Subcontractors and Personnel

> The Contractor shall provide a list of the key personnel of the
> Contractor and subcontractors (including addresses and telephone
> numbers) for use in the event of an emergency. As changes occur and
> additional information becomes available, correct and change the
> information contained in previous lists. In addition, the Contractor
> shall be responsible for furnishing an identification badge or card to
> each employee prior to the employee's work on the site.

1.2.2 Contractor's Representative

> The Contractor's representative shall be someone authorized by the
> Contractor to make decisions and agreements on this contract for the
> Contractor.

1.2.3 Availability of Utility Services

> Sufficient electricity to power one site trailer will be provided. The
> Contractor shall pay all costs incurred in connecting, converting, and
> transferring the utilities to the work, including installing all
> transformers and wiring from the connection point to the trailer. The
> Contractor shall be responsible for making connections, and for
> disconnections and temporary component removal. The Contractor shall
> contact the FAA's electrical engineering personnel to determine the
> most appropriate temporary connection point on the adjacent FAA
> overhead electrical power lines.
>
> The only water available on site will be from an onsite injection well
> (RP-IW1) that has a capacity of up to approximately 90 gpm. If the
> Contractor desires to use water from this well, the Contractor shall
> be responsible for providing all necessary pumps and generators to
> pump water from the well. All submersible pumps, hose, and other
> components placed in the well shall be properly decontaminated (to the
> satisfaction of the FAA) prior to their installation. The water shall
> be considered non-potable.
>
> Ensure that new utility lines are complete, except for the connection,
> before interrupting existing service.
>
> The utility interruption to electric service shall be considered
> utility cutovers. Such interruption shall be further limited to four
> (4) hours. This limit includes time for deactivation and reactivation.

1.2.4 Radio Transmitter Restrictions

> Conform to restrictions and procedures for the use of radio
> transmitting equipment, as directed. Do not use transmitters without
> prior approval from the Resident Engineer (RE).

1.2.5 Security Requirements

> No employee or representative of the Contractor will be admitted to
> the work site without satisfactory proof of United States citizenship
> or specifically authorized admittance to the work site by the RE.
>
> a\. The Contractor shall be responsible for monitoring all personnel
> requiring access to the work site which shall include his personnel,
> delivery trucks, authorized visitors to the site, etc.
>
> b\. Proper identification will be required for anyone and everyone
> entering the work area. The form of this identification shall be an
> identification badge and it will be the responsibility of the
> Contractor to comply with this requirement and the requirements
> spelled out at the pre-construction meeting. The Contractor shall
> obtain all FAA required security badges and vehicle passes according
> to all current FAA security requirements.
>
> c\. Security clearance may be required for some contractor personal as
> requested by the FAA.
>
> d\. Contractor shall provide the RE with a list of Contractor's
> personnel who will require access to the premises. This list shall be
> kept current during project work.
>
> e\. Work shall be arranged so that the Contractor's personnel can be
> escorted when required by FAA, in certain areas classified as
> controlled surfaces. Contractor's personnel shall not violate any
> security regulations pertaining to the airport. Violators may be
> removed from the premises with the right to reenter revoked.
>
> f\. Current procedures at FAA facilities include the "right to
> search." If, in the judgement of the gate security guard, airport
> guard, or military guard, a cause to search a vehicle or the person or
> personnel exists, such search will be made.
>
> g\. Failure of the Contractor to fully comply with the above
> instructions and/or directions from the RE shall result in an
> immediate shutdown of the entire project until such time as the
> Contractor demonstrates his compliance.
>
> h\. Contractor vehicles requiring access to the airport must comply
> with the following procedure:
>
> \(1\) The Contractor must supply the following information to the RE.
>
> a\) Company name
>
> b\) Job supervisor's name
>
> c\) Number and description of vehicles
>
> d\) Description of work and location of work area.

\(2\) The job supervisor will sign for airport passes at the time of
issue by the FAA Technical Center Security. Issue records are available
for inspection at the Center Security Office. All vehicles must obtain a
pass prior to entering the site.

1.2.6 Weather Protection

> If a warning of inclement weather conditions is issued, take
> precautions to minimize any danger to persons, and protect the work
> and any nearby Government or off-site property. Precautions shall
> include, but are not limited to, closing or protecting openings in
> buildings or excavations; removing loose materials, tools, and
> equipment from exposed locations; and removing or securing other
> temporary work. Additional sedimentation and erosion control measure
> shall be installed by the Contractor if storm events of unusual
> strength are anticipated. Close openings in the work if storms of
> lesser intensity pose a threat to the work or any nearby Government or
> off-site property.

1.2.7 Coordination Meetings

> Once each week, on a regularly scheduled day and hour, an authorized
> representative of the Contractor shall meet with the Contracting
> Officer (CO) and/or RE, in the Technical Support Facility (TSF)
> Building (or other location chosen by the FAA), to confer on contract
> progress, future scheduling, proposed procedures, coordination with
> other projects, etc.

1.3 PRE-CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTALS

> The Contractor will be required to submit plans for review and receive
> concurrence from the RE that they meet the requirements of the
> Technical Specifications and regulations prior to commencement of any
> field activities. Plans requiring submission include, but are not
> limited to, the following:

Network Analysis System (found in Section 01311)

Submittal Register (found in Section 01330)

Photography Plan (found in Section 01380)

Environmental Protection Plan (found in Section 01560)

Site Health & Safety Plan (found in Section 01740)

Soil Erosion & Sedimentation Control Plan (found in Section 02112)

1.4 SITE PREPARATION

> This section discusses the preparation tasks only and does not
> represent a complete listing of sequential tasks. For a more complete
> listing refer to the Contract Drawings.
>
> The Contractor's SITE trailer shall be set in place and have power
> service installed as soon as possible. Cellular-type phone service
> shall be provided to the trailer by the Contractor. Temporary sanitary
> facilities for the Contractor's use shall be in place prior to
> commencing site activities. The Contractor may utilize the open field
> near the Main Area B Control Building as a lay-down area for the
> temporary storage of materials. Outdoor storage of equipment or
> materials will not be allowed unless permitted by the
> equipment/material manufacturer. In any case, all equipment and
> materials must be stored in accordance with manufacturer's
> instructions.
>
> Prior to initiating the SITE preparation activities, the Contractor
> shall perform any required pest control (i.e., wasp eradication) and
> then erect the security gates and soil erosion and sedimentation
> control measures.
>
> All trees, shrubs, stumps and roots removed during clearing and
> grubbing shall be thoroughly dried and cleaned of all soil prior to
> chipping and grinding. Wood chips shall be disposed of off-site.
>
> Water shall be used throughout the excavation area, soil stockpile
> areas and work areas to control fugitive dust. The Contractor shall
> provide a water tanker to transfer water to areas requiring dust
> control.

1.5 SITE RESTORATION

> The Contractor shall be responsible for removing and/or disposing of
> facilities installed to construct the Recharge Bed. Areas requiring
> complete removal and/or disposal off-site include the following:
>
> Site Trailer
>
> Temporary Utilities
>
> Sedimentation and Erosion Controls
>
> Lay-down Areas
>
> The Contractor shall be responsible for leaving the SITE in a clean
> and neat condition. All trash, debris, and waste material shall be
> completely removed from the SITE. Lay-down areas shall be restored to
> pre-use conditions.

1.6 PRELIMINARY SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES

> The anticipated order of construction activities is given below. The
> list of activities is not intended to be a critical path, nor be
> inclusive of all construction activities.

a.  Plan Development, Permitting and Approvals

b.  Install Erosion Sediment Controls and Fencing

c.  Clear & Grub

d.  Mobilize Office Trailer

e.  Construct Recharge Bed

f.  Install Conveyance Piping to Recharge Bed and Expanded Sprinkler
    System

Locations

g.  Construct New Control Vaults and Controls

h.  Install Monitoring Wells

i.  Integrate New Control Components into Existing System Controls

j.  System Checkout and Startup

k.  Site Restoration

END OF SECTION

**SECTION 01090**

**SOURCES FOR REFERENCE PUBLICATIONS**

**PART 1 GENERAL**

1.1 REFERENCES

> Reference publications are cited in other sections of the
> specifications along with identification of their sponsoring
> organizations. The addresses of the sponsoring organizations are
> listed below, and if the source of the publications is different from
> the address of the sponsoring organization, that information is also
> provided. If no date for a specific reference publication is provided
> assume the most recent version is being referenced.

Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI)

> 4301 North Fairfax Drive, Suite 425
>
> ATTN: Pubs Dept.
>
> Arlington, VA 22203
>
> Phone: (703) 524-8800
>
> Fax: (703) 528-3816
>
> Internet: www.ari.org

Email: ari@ari.org

Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA)

> 30 W. University Drive
>
> Arlington Heights, IL 60004-1893
>
> Phone: (847) 394-0150

Fax: (847) 253-0088

Internet: www.amca.org

American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA)

1827 Walden Office Square, Suite 104

Schaumburg, IL 60173-4268

Phone: (847) 303-5664

Fax: (847) 303-5774

Internet: www.aamanet.org

> American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
> (AASHTO)
>
> 444 N. Capitol Street, NW, Suite 249
>
> Washington, DC 20001
>
> Phone: (202) 624-5800 or (800) 231-3475
>
> Fax: (202) 624-5806 or (800) 525-5562
>
> Internet: www.transportation.org
>
> ACI International (ACI)
>
> P.O. Box 9094
>
> Farmington Hills, MI 48333-9094
>
> Phone: (248) 848-3700

Fax: (248) 848-3701

Internet: www.aci-int.org

American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH)

> 1330 Kemper Meadow Drive, Suite 600
>
> Cincinnati, OH 45240
>
> Phone: (513) 742-2020
>
> Fax: (513) 742-3355
>
> Email: pubs@acgih.org

Internet: www.acgih.org

American Forest & Paper Association (AF&PA)

American Wood Council

ATTN: Publications Dept.

1111 Nineteenth Street NW, Suite 800

Washington, DC 20036

Phone: (202) 463-2700 or (800) 294-2372

Fax: (202) 463-2471

Internet: www.afandpa.org

American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC)

One East Wacker Drive, Suite 3100

Chicago, IL 60601-2001

Phone: (312) 670-2400

Publications: (800) 644-2400

Fax: (312) 670-5403

Internet: www.aisc.org

American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI)

1101 17th St., NW Suite 1300

Washington, DC 20036

Phone (202) 452-7100

Internet: www.steel.org

American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

1819 L Street, NW, 6^th^ Floor

Washington, DC 20036

Phone: (202) 293-8020

Fax: (202) 293-9287

Internet: www.ansi.org/

American Petroleum Institute (API)

1220 \"L\" Street, NW

Washington, DC 20005-4070

Phone: (202) 682-8000

Fax: (202) 682-8223

Internet: www.api.org

American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

100 Barr Harbor Drive

West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959

Phone: (610) 832-9585

Fax: (610) 832-9555

Internet: www.astm.org

American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE)

1801 Alexander Bell Drive

Reston, VA 20191-4400

Phone: (703) 295-6300 or (800) 548-2723

Fax: (703) 295-6222

Internet: www.asce.org

Email: marketing@asce.org

> American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air Conditioning
> Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE)

1791 Tullie Circle, NE

Atlanta, GA 30329-2305

Phone: (404) 636-8400/(800) 527-4723

Fax: (404) 321-5478

Internet: www.ashrae.org

American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)

345 East 47^th^ Street

New York, NY 10017

Phone: (212) 705-7722

Fax: (212) 705-7739

Internet: www.asme.org

American Water Works Association (AWWA)

6666 West Quincy Avenue

Denver, Co 80235

Phone: (303) 794-7711 or (800) 926-7337

Fax: (303) 794-7310

Internet: www.awa.org

American Welding Society (AWS)

550 N.W. LeJeune Road

Miami, FL 33126

Phone: (305) 443-9353/(800) 443-9353

Fax: (305) 443-7559

Internet: www.amweld.org

Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA)

355 Lexington Avenue, 17^th^ Floor

New York, NY 10017-6603

Phone: (212) 297-2122

Fax: (212) 370-9047

Internet: www.buildershardware.com

Building Officials & Code Administrators International (BOCA)

4051 W. Flossmoor Road

Country Club Hills, IL 60478

Phone: (708) 799-2300

Fax: (708) 799-4981

Internet: www.bocai.org

Door and Hardware Institute (DHI)

14150 Newbrook Drive, Suite 200

Chantilly, VA 20151-2223

Phone: (703) 222-2010

Fax: (703) 222-2410

Internet: www.dhi.org

Email: techdept@dhi.org

Factory Mutual Engineering and Research (FM)

500 River Ridge Drive

Norwood, MA 02062

Phone: (781) 255-6681 or (877) 364-6726

Fax: (781) 255-0181

Internet: www.fmglobal.com

> Foundation for Cross-Connection Control and Hydraulic Research
> (FCCCHR)

University of South California

Kaprielian Hall 200

Los Angeles, CA 90089-2531

Phone: (213) 740-2032

Fax: (213) 740-8399

Internet: www.usc.edu/dept/fccchr

Federal Specifications (FS)

General Services Administration

Federal Supply Service Bureau

470 L\'Enfant Plaza, S.W.

Washington, DC 20407

Phone: 202-619-8925

Fax: 202-619-8978

Internet: http://pub.fss.gsa.gov/

Glass Association of North America (GANA)

2945 SW Wanamaker Drive, Suite A

Topeka, KS 66614-5321

Phone: 785-271-0208

Fax: 785-271-0166

Internet: www.glasswebsite.com

Hydraulic Institute (HI)

9 Sylvan Way, Suite 180

Parsippany, NJ 07054-3802

Phone: (973) 267-9700 OR (888) 786-7744

Fax: (973) 267-9055

Internet: www.pumps.org

Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA)

120 Wall Street, 17^th^ Floor

New York, NY 10005-4001

Phone: (212) 248-5000

Fax: (212) 248-5017

Internet: www.iesna.org

Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE)

445 Hoes Lane

P.O. Box 1331

Piscataway, NJ 08855-1331

Phone: (732) 981-0060/(800) 701-4333

Fax: (732) 981-9667

Internet: www.ieee.org

Email: customer.services@ieee.org

Instrument Society of America (ISA)

67 Alexander Drive

Research Triangle Park, NC 27709

Phone: (919) 549-8411

Fax: (919) 549-8288

Internet: www.isa.org

> Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings
> Industry (MSS)

127 Park Street, NE

Vienna, VA 22180-4602

Phone: (703) 281-6613

Fax: (703) 281-6671

Internet: www.mss-hq.com

Email: info@mss-hq.com

Metal Building Manufacturers Association (MBMA)

1300 Sumner Avenue

Cleveland, OH 44115-2851

Phone: (216) 241-7333

Fax: (216) 241-0105

Internet: www.mbma.com

Email: mbma@mbma.com

Military Specification (MS)

Order Military Specifications, Standards and Related Publications From:

Department of Defense Single Stock Point (DODSSP) for

Defense Automation and Production Service (DAPS)

Building 4

700 Robbins Avenue

Philadelphia, PA 19111-5094

Phone: (215) 697-2179

Fax: (215) 697-1462

Internet: www.dodssp.daps.mil

National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM)

8 Michigan Ave., Suite 1000

Chicago, IL 60603

Phone: (312) 782-4951

Fax: (312) 332-0405

Internet: www.naam.org

Email: naamm@gss.net

> National Association of Plumbing-Heating-Cooling Contractors (NAPHCC)

180 South Washington Street

P.O. Box 6808

Falls Church, VA 22046

Phone: (800) 533-7674

Fax: (703) 237-7442

Internet: www.phccweb.org

Email: naphcc@naphcc.org

National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

1300 N. 17^th^ Street, Suite 1847

Rosslyn, VA 22209

Phone: (703) 841-3200

Fax: (703) 841-3300

Internet: [www.nema.org](http://www.nema.org/)

National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

One Batterymarch Park

P.O. Box 9101

Quincy, MA 02269-9101

Phone: (617) 770-3000

Fax: (617) 770-0700

Internet: www.nfpa.org

National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH)

Mail Stop C-13

4676 Columbia Parkway

Cincinnati, OH 45226-1998

Phone: (800) 356-4674

Fax: (513) 533-8573

Internet: www.cdc.gov/niosh/homepage.html

New Jersey Department of Environmental Protection

401 E. State Street, CN413

Trenton, NJ 08625

Phone: (609) 984-2902

Internet: www.state.nj.us/dep/

New Jersey Department of Transportation (NJDOT)

1035 Parkway Avenue

Trenton, NJ 08625

Phone: (609) 530-2000

Internet: www.state.nj.us/transportation/

Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute (PCI)

209 West Jackson Boulevard

Chicago, IL 60606-6938

Phone: (312) 786-0300

Fax: (312) 786-0353

Internet: www.pci.org

Email: info@pci.org

The Plastics Pipe Institute, Inc.

1825 Connecticut Ave., NW

Suite 680

Washington, DC 20009

Phone: (202) 462-9607, (888) 314-6774

Fax: (202) 462-9779

Internet: www.plasticpipe.org

> Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors National Association
> (SMACNA)

4201 Lafayette Center Drive

Chantilly, VA 20151-1209

Phone: (703) 803-2980

Fax: (703) 803-3732

Internet: www.smacna.org

Email: info@smacna.org

Steel Deck Institute (SDI)

P.O. Box 25

Fox River Grove, IL 60021-0025

Phone: (847) 462-1930

Fax: (847) 462-1940

Internet: www.sdi.org

Email: Steve@sdi.org

Steel Door Institute (SDOI)

30200 Detroit Road

Cleveland, OH 44145-1967

Phone: (440) 899-0010

Fax: (440) 892-1404

Internet: www.steeldoor.org

The Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC)

40 24^th^ Street, 6^th^ Floor

Pittsburgh, PA 15222-4656

Phone: (412) 281-2331

Fax: (412) 281-9992

Internet: www.sspc.org

Steel Tank Institute (STI)

570 Oakwood Road

Lake Zurich, IL 60047

Phone: (847) 438-8265

Fax: (847) 438-8766

Internet: www.steeltank.com

Steel Window Institute (SWI)

1300 Sumner Avenue

Cleveland, OH 44115

Phone: (216) 241-7333

Fax: (216) 241-0105

Internet: www.steelwindows.com

Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. (UL)

333 Pfingsten Road

Northbrook, IL 60062-2096

Phone: (847) 272-8800

Fax: (847) 272-8129

Internet: www.ul.com/

Email: northbrook@us.ul.com

Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association (UBPPA)

2655 Villa Creek Drive, Suite 155

Dallas, TX 75234

Phone: (214) 243-3902

Fax: (214) 243-3907

Internet: www.uni-bell.org

Email: infor@uni-bell.org

U.S. Department of Agriculture (USDA)

Order Other Publications From:

U.S. Department of Agriculture

14th Street & Independence Ave. S.W., Room 4028-S

Washington, D.C. 20250

Phone: (202) 720-2791

Fax: (202) 720-2166

Internet: www.usda.gov

U.S. Army Corps of Engineers (USACE)

U.S. Army Engineer Waterways Experiment Station

Order CRD-D Documents From.

Attn: Technical Report Distribution Section, Services Branch, TIC

3909 Halls Ferry Road

Vicksburg, MS 39180-6199

Phone: (601) 634-2664

Fax: (601) 634-2388

Internet: www.wes.army.mrl/SL/MTC/handbook/handbook.htm

U.S. Department of Defense (DOD)

Order From:

National Technical Information Service

5285 Port Royal Road

Springfield, VA 22161

Phone: (703) 605-6000

Fax: (703) 605-6900

Internet: www.ntis.gov

U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)

400 7^th^ Street, S.W.

Washington, DC 20590

Internet: dot.gov

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)

Ariel Rios Building

1200 Pennsylvania Avenue, N.W.

Washington, DC 20460

Phone: 202-260-2090

Fax: 202-260-6257

Internet: www.epa.gov

U.S. Federal Aviation Administration (FAA)

Order From:

Superintendent of Documents

732 North Capitol Street, N.W.

Mail Stop: SDE

U. S. Government Printing Office

Washington, DC 20401

Phone: 202-512-1530

Fax: 202-512-1262

Internet: www.gpo.gov

U.S. General Services Administration (GSA)

Commercial Item Descriptions (CID)

Order From:

> General Services Administration

Federal Supply Service Bureau

470 E L\'Enfant Plaza, S.W., Suite 8100

Washington, DC 20407

Phone: (202) 619-8925

Fax: (202) 619-8978

Internet: fss.gsa.gov/pub/fed-specs.ctm

U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development (HUD)

Order From: HUD User

P.O. Box 6091

Rockville, MD 20849

Phone: (800) 245-2691

Fax: (301) 519-5767

Internet: www.huduser.gov

Email: Huduser@aspensys.com

U.S. National Archives and Records Administration (NARA)

Code of Federal Regulations (CFR)

700 Pennsylvania Avenue, N.W.

Washington, D.C. 20408

Phone: (800) 234-8861

Internet: www.nara.gov

**PART 2 PRODUCTS**

Not Used

**PART 3 EXECUTION**

Not Used

**SECTION 01311**

**CONTRACTOR-PREPARED NETWORK ANALYSIS SYSTEM**

**PART I GENERAL**

1.1 SUMMARY

> The work specified in this section consists of the preparation of a
> network analysis system for the contract work.

1.2 REFERENCES

> The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
> extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by
> basic designation only.

U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE)

> ER 1-1-11 (1995) Progress, Schedules, and Network Analysis System

1.3 SUBMITTALS

> The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01330,
> "Submittal Procedures":

SD-07, Schedules

Preliminary Network Analysis; GA

> Six copies of a preliminary network analysis defining the Contractor's
> planned operations during the first sixty (60) calendar days shall be
> submitted within ten (10) days after the notice to proceed. The
> Contractor\'s general approach for the balance of the project shall be
> indicated. Cost of activities expected to be completed or partially
> complete before submission and approval of the entire schedule shall
> be included. Each action which may cause a potential shutdown or
> interruption to existing operating systems or utilities shall be
> identified on the preliminary network schedule.

Final Network Analysis; GA

> Six copies of the complete final network analysis consisting of the
> detailed network mathematical analysis (on-site manpower loading
> schedule, equipment schedule) and network diagrams shall be submitted
> within forty (40) calendar days after receipt of the notice to
> proceed.
>
> Revised Schedules; GA
>
> See Paragraph 3.1.3
>
> SD-09; Reports
>
> Progress Reports: GA
>
> See Paragraph 3.1.4

**PART 2 PRODUCTS**

Not Applicable

**PART 3 EXECUTION**

3.1 NETWORK ANALYSIS SYSTEM

> The progress chart to be prepared by the Contractor shall consist of a
> network analysis system as described below. In preparing this system,
> the scheduling of construction is the responsibility of the
> Contractor. The requirement for the system is included to assure
> adequate planning and execution of the work and to assist the
> Contracting Officer (CO) and Resident Engineer (RE) in appraising the
> reasonableness of the proposed schedule and evaluating progress of
> work.

3.1.1 General

> The network analysis system shall be in accordance with ER 1-1-11. The
> Contractor shall have the option of using a microcomputer-based
> network analysis system. If the Contractor elects to use a
> microcomputer-based system, one of the following software programs
> shall be used: (1) PMS 80 Project Management System by Pinnell
> Engineering, Inc., 5331 S.W. Macadam Ave., Suite 270, Portland, Oregon
> 97201, telephone (503) 243-2246; (2) Primavera Project Planner by
> Primavera Systems, Inc., Suite 925, Two Bala Plaza, Bala Cynwyde, PA
> 19004, telephone (215) 667-8600; or (3) other software program
> approved by the RE. The system to be used shall be identified at the
> Pre-Construction Conference. Submittal of information by the
> Contractor shall be by hard copy and by electronic data transfer.

3.1.2 System Requirements

> The system shall consist of diagrams and accompanying mathematical
> analyses. The diagrams shall show elements of the project in detail
> and the entire project in summary.

3.1.2.1 Diagrams

> Show the order and interdependence of activities and the sequence in
> which the work is to accomplished as planned. The basic concept of a
> network analysis diagram will be followed to show how the start of a
> given activity is dependent on the completion of preceding activities
> and how its completion restricts or restrains the start of following
> activities. The diagram shall clearly show the activities of the
> critical path. In addition to construction activities, detailed
> network activities shall include the submittal and approval of
> materials, samples, delivery of O&M manuals, training to be provided,
> shop drawings, the procurement of critical materials and equipment,
> receipt of materials with estimated procurement costs of major items
> for which payment of materials will be requested in advance of
> installation, fabrication of special material and equipment, and their
> installation and testing. A summary of activity for time based
> overhead office and management costs shall be included. Show
> activities of the Government that affect progress and
> contract-required dates for completion of all or parts of the work.
> Show activities indicating Government furnished materials and
> equipment utilizing delivery dates. Show the following information on
> the diagrams for each activity:
>
> a\. Activity number
>
> b\. Description of the activity
>
> c\. Duration in work days
>
> d\. Responsibility code indicating the party responsible for
> accomplishment of the activity. As a minimum, provide a separate
> responsibility code for each subcontractor.
>
> e\. Area code indicating the area of the project in which the work
> will be performed.

3.1.2.2 Network Details

> Detailed network activities shown on a detailed or sub-network diagram
> shall include, in addition to construction activities, the submittal
> and approval of samples of materials and shop drawings, the
> procurement of critical materials and equipment, fabrication of
> special materials and equipment and their installation and testing.
> All activities of the Government that affect progress and contract
> required dates for completion of all or parts of the work shall be
> shown. The detail of information shall be such that duration times of
> activities shall range from three to 30 days with not over two percent
> of the activities exceeding these limits. The activities which
> comprise the separate project features shall be separately
> identifiable by coding or use of sub-networks, or both. The selection
> and number of activities shall be subject to approval by the RE.
> Detailed networks, when summary networks are also furnished, need not
> be time scaled but shall be drafted to show a continuous flow from
> left to right with no arrows from right to left. The following
> information shall be shown on the diagrams for each activity:
> preceding and following event numbers; description of the activity;
> cost; and activity summary.

3.1.2.3 Summary Network

> If the project is of such size that the entire network cannot be
> readily shown on a single sheet, a summary network diagram shall be
> provided. The summary network diagram shall consist of a minimum of 50
> activities and a maximum of 150 activities, and shall be based on and
> supported by detailed diagrams. Related activities shall be grouped on
> the network. The critical path shall be plotted generally along the
> center of the sheet with channels having increasing float placed
> towards the top or bottom. The summary network shall be time scaled
> using units of approximately one-half inch equals one week or other
> suitable scale approved by the RE. Weekends and holidays shall be
> indicated on the network. Where slack exists, the activities shall be
> shown at the time when they are scheduled to be accomplished.

3.1.2.4 Mathematical Analysis

> The mathematical analysis of the network diagram shall include a
> tabulation of each activity shown on the detailed network diagrams.
> The following information shall be furnished as a minimum for each
> activity:
>
> a\. Preceding and following event numbers (numbers shall be selected
> and assigned so as to permit identification of the activities with bid
> items);
>
> b\. Activity description;
>
> c\. Estimated duration of activities (the best estimate available at
> time of computation);
>
> d\. Earliest start date (by calendar date);
>
> e\. Earliest finish date (by calendar date);
>
> f\. Scheduled or actual start date (by calendar date);
>
> g\. Scheduled or actual finish date (by calendar date);
>
> h\. Latest start date (by calendar date);
>
> i Latest finish date (by calendar date);
>
> j\. Slack or float;
>
> k\. Monetary value of activity;
>
> l\. Responsibility for activity (Prime Contractor, subcontractors,
> suppliers, Government, etc.);
>
> m\. Manpower required;
>
> n\. Percentage of activities completed;
>
> o\. Contractor's earnings based on portion of activity completed; and
>
> p\. Bid item of which activity is a part.

3.1.2.5 Mathematical Program

The program or means used in making the mathematical computation shall
be capable of compiling the total value of completed and partially
completed activities and subtotals from separate or project features.

3.1.2.6 Computations

> In addition to the tabulation of activities, the computation will
> include the following data:
>
> a\. Identification of activities which are planned to be expedited by
> use of overtime or double shifts to be worked including Saturdays,
> Sundays, and holidays;
>
> b\. On-site manpower loading schedule;
>
> c\. A description of the major items of construction equipment planned
> for operation of the project. (The description shall include the type,
> number of units, and unit capacities.) A schedule showing proposed
> times that equipment will be on the work site keyed to activities on
> which equipment will be used shall be provided; and
>
> d\. Where portions of the work are to be paid by unit costs, the
> estimated number of units in an activity which was used in developing
> the total activity cost.

3.1.2.7 Order of Network Activities

The analysis shall list the activities in sorts or groups as follows:

> a\. By the preceding event number from lowest to highest and then in
> the order of the following event number:
>
> b\. By the amount of slack, then in order by preceding event number;
>
> c\. By responsibility in order of earliest allowable start dates; and
>
> d\. In order of latest allowable start dates, then in order of
> preceding event numbers, and then in order of succeeding event
> numbers.

3.1.3 Revised Schedules

> The Contractor shall participate in a review and evaluation of the
> proposed network diagrams and analysis by the RE. Any revisions
> necessary as a result of this review shall be resubmitted for approval
> by the RE within ten calendar days after the conference. The approved
> schedule shall then be the schedule to be used by the Contractor for
> planning, organizing, and directing the work and for reporting
> progress. If the Contractor thereafter desires to make changes in the
> method of operating and scheduling he shall notify the RE in writing
> stating the reasons for the change. If the RE considers these changes
> to be of a major nature, he may require the Contractor to revise and
> submit for approval, without additional cost to the Government, all or
> the affected portion of the detailed diagrams and mathematical
> analysis and the summary diagram to show the effect on the entire
> project. A change may be considered of a major nature if the time
> estimated to be required or actually used for an activity or the logic
> of sequence of activities is varied from the original plan to a degree
> that there is a reasonable doubt as to the effect on the contract
> completion data or dates. Changes which affect activities with
> adequate slack time shall be considered as minor changes, except that
> an accumulation of minor changes may be considered a major change when
> their cumulative effect might affect the contract completion date.
>
> Any project schedule changes shall be incorporated into the submittal
> register, where applicable, as part of this Contract.

3.1.4 Periodic Progress Reports

> The Contractor shall submit at monthly intervals and not later than
> the 5^th^ of each month, four copies of a report of the actual
> construction progress by updating the mathematical analyses. Revisions
> causing changes in the detailed network shall be noted on the summary
> network, or a revised issue of affected portions of the detailed
> network furnished. The summary network shall be revised as necessary
> for the sake of clarity. However, only the initial submission or
> complete revisions need be time scaled. Subsequent minor revisions
> need not be time scaled.

3.1.4.1 Completion of Activities

> Progress reports shall show the activities or portions of activities
> completed during the reporting period and their total value as basis
> for the Contractor's progress payment request. Payment will be based
> on the total value of such activities completed or partially completed
> after verification by the RE. The report shall state the percentage of
> the work actually completed and scheduled as of the report date and
> the progress along the critical path in terms of days ahead or behind
> the allowable dates. If the project is behind schedule, progress along
> other paths with negative slack shall also be reported. The Contractor
> shall also submit a narrative report with the updated analysis which
> shall include, but not be limited to, a description of the problem
> areas, current and anticipated, delaying factors and their impact, and
> an explanation of corrective actions taken or proposed.

END OF SECTION

**SECTION 01330**

**SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES**

**PART I GENERAL**

1.1 SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTIONS (SD)

Submittals required are identified by SD numbers as follows:

SD-01 Data

SD-04 Drawings

SD-06 Instructions

SD-07 Schedules

SD-08 Statements

SD-09 Reports

SD-13 Certificates

SD-14 Samples

SD-18 Records

> SD-19 Operation and Maintenance Manuals

1.2 SUBMITTALS

Submit the following in accordance with the requirements of this
section.

SD-07 Schedules

> Completed Submittal Register (ENG Form 4288); Updated Submittal
> Register (Eng Form 4288)
>
> Submit and receive concurrence from the Resident Engineer (RE) that
> the submittal register meets the requirements of the Technical
> Specification prior to the commencement of any field activities.

1.3 SUBMITTAL CLASSIFICATION

Submittals are classified as follows:

1.3.1 Government Approved (GA)

Governmental approval is required for extensions of design, critical
materials, deviations, equipment whose compatibility with the entire
system must be checked, and other items as designated by the RE. Within
the terms of the Contract they are considered to be "shop drawings."

1.4 APPROVED SUBMITTALS

> The approval of submittals by the RE shall not be construed as a
> complete check, but will indicate only that the general method of
> construction, materials, detailing, and other information are
> satisfactory. Approval will not relieve the Contractor of the
> responsibility for any error which may exist, as the Contractor under
> the Contractor Quality Control (CQC) requirements of this contract, is
> responsible for the dimensions and design of adequate connections,
> details, and satisfactory construction of all work. After submittals
> have been approved by the RE, no resubmittal for the purpose of
> substituting materials or equipment will be given consideration unless
> accompanied by an explanation as to why a substitution is necessary.

1.5 DISAPPROVED SUBMITTALS

> The Contractor shall make all corrections required by the RE and
> promptly furnish a corrected submittal in the form and number of
> copies as specified for the initial submittal. If the Contractor
> considers any correction indicated on the submittals to constitute a
> change to the contract, notice as required shall be given promptly to
> the RE and Contracting Officer (CO).

1.6 WITHHOLDING OF PAYMENT

> Payment for materials incorporated in the work will not be made if
> required approvals have not been obtained.

**PART 2 PRODUCTS**

Not Applicable

**PART 3 EXECUTION**

3.1 GENERAL

The Contractor shall submit all items listed on the Submittal Register
(ENG Form 4288) or specified in the other sections of these
specifications. The Contractor shall use the approved Government
numbering system for identification of submittals, additional
submittals, and resubmittals. The Contracting Officer's Technical
Representative (COTR) or RE may request submittals in addition to those
listed when deemed necessary to adequately describe the work covered in
the respective sections. Units of the weights and measures used on all
submittals shall be the same used in the contract drawings. Submittals
shall be made in the respective number of copies and to the respective
addresses set forth below. Each submittal shall be complete and in
sufficient detail to allow ready determination of compliance with
contract requirements. Prior to submittal, all items shall be checked
and approved by the Contractor and each respective transmittal form (ENG
Form 4025) shall be signed and dated certifying that the accompanying
submittal complies with the contract requirements. Proposed deviations
from the contract requirements shall be clearly identified. Submittals
shall include items such as: Contractor's, manufacturer's, or
fabricator's drawings; descriptive literature including (but not limited
to) catalog cuts, diagrams, operating charts or curves; test reports;
test cylinders; samples; O&M manuals including parts list;
certifications; warranties and other such required submittals.
Submittals requiring Government approval shall be scheduled and made
prior to the acquisition of the material or equipment covered thereby.

3.2 SUBMITTAL REGISTER (ENG FORM 4288)

> Attached at the end of this section is the Submittal Register (ENG
> Form 4288), listing each item of equipment and material for which
> submittals are required by the specifications. Columns "d" thru "q"
> have been completed by the Government. The Contractor shall complete
> columns "r" and "s" thru "u." The Contractor shall review, complete
> and submit, in triplicate, the completed register listing all
> submittals and dates, to the RE at the CQC coordination meeting. In
> addition to those items listed in ENG Form 4288, the Contractor shall
> furnish submittals for any deviations from the plans and
> specifications. The scheduled need date shall be recorded on the
> register for each item for control purposes. The approved submittal
> register will become the scheduling document and will be used to
> control submittals throughout the life of the contract. Scheduling
> shall be coordinated with the approved network analysis system. The
> Contractor's CQC system manager shall review the listing at least
> every 30 days and task appropriate action to maintain an effective
> system. Copies of updated or corrected listings shall be submitted to
> the RE at least every 60 days, in triplicate. Payment will not be made
> for any material or equipment which does not comply with contract
> requirements.

3.3 SCHEDULING

> a\. Coordinate scheduling, sequencing, preparing, and processing of
> submittals with performance of work so that work will not be delayed
> by submittal processing. Allow for potential requirements to resubmit.
>
> b\. Except as specified otherwise, allow review period, beginning with
> receipt by approving authority, which includes at least 30 working
> days for submittals for RE approval. Period of review for submittals
> with government approval begins when the Government receives submittal
> from CQC organization. Period of review for each resubmittal is the
> same as for initial submittal. No delays or damages will be allowed
> for time lost in late submittals.

3.4 TRANSMITTAL FORM (ENG FORM 4025)

The transmittal form (ENG Form 4025) attached to this section of the
specification shall be used for submitting submittals in accordance with
the instructions provided by the FAA. This form shall be properly
completed by filling out all the heading blank spaces and identifying
each item submitted. Special care shall be exercised to ensure proper
listing of the specification paragraphs and/or sheet number of the
contract drawings pertinent to the data submitted for each item.

3.5 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE

> Submittals referred to in the text may use the wording "submitted to
> the RE," submittals will be reviewed as indicated in column "r" of the
> Submittal Register (ENG Form 4288). Submittals shall be made to the
> addresses set forth below. Submittals shall be made as follows:

3.5.1 Submittals for FAA (Government) Approval

> The Contractor shall submit to the FAA, by the most expedient means, a
> total of seven copies of shop drawings and other submittals listed on
> the Submittals Register (ENG Form 4288) as requiring technical review
> by the FAA. All copies shall be submitted to the RE. The Contractor
> shall be responsible for all costs incurred in transmitting the
> required information for review in the submittal process.

FAA mailing address:

FAA William J. Hughes Technical Center

Attn: Mr. Greg Falzetta

Environmental and Safety Subteam, AJP-7932

Atlantic City International Airport

Atlantic City, NJ 08405

3.5.2 Submittals for Architect/Engineer Approval

> As necessary, the FAA shall submit review copies to the
> Architect/Engineer (A/E). If directed by the FAA, the Contractor shall
> submit to the Architect/Engineer (A/E), by the most expedient means,
> copies of shop drawings and other submittals listed on the Submittal
> Register (Eng Form 4288). The Contractor shall be responsible for all
> costs incurred in transmitting the required information for review in
> the submittal process.

A/E mailing address:

TRC Environmental Corporation

Attn: Mr. Carl Stopper

21 Griffin Road North

Windsor, CT 06095

3.5.3 Deviations

> For submittals which include proposed deviations requested by the
> Contractor, the column "variation" of ENG Form 4025 shall be checked.
> The Contractor shall set forth in writing the reason for any
> deviations and annotate such deviations on the submittal. The
> Government reserves the right to rescind inadvertent approval of
> submittals containing unnoted deviations.

3.5.4 Completion of Work

> Upon completing the work under this contract, the Contractor shall
> furnish one set of prints of all shop drawings as finally approved.
> These drawings shall show all changes and revisions made up to the
> time the items covered by the shop drawings are completed and
> accepted.

3.6 CONTROL OF SUBMITTALS

> The Contractor shall carefully control his procurement operations to
> ensure that each individual submittal is made on or before the
> Contractor schedule submittal date shown on the approved "Submittal
> Register."

3.7 GOVERNMENT APPROVED SUBMITTALS

Upon completion of review of submittals requiring Government approval,
the submittals will be identified as having received approval by being
so stamped and dated. Five (5) copies of the submittal will be retained
by the RE and the remaining copies of the submittal will be returned to
the Contractor.

END OF SECTION

**SECTION 01380**

**PROJECT PHOTOGRAPHS AND VIDEO**

**PART 1 GENERAL**

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

> This section describes project photography and video taping to be
> performed and submitted by the Contractor in order to document
> construction and remediation activities.

1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1.2.1 The documentation shall provide a complete record of events
including, but not limited to, progression of work, potential and actual
problems, solutions to problems, and actual conditions which may vary
from contract conditions.

1.2.2 The Contractor shall furnish a digital camera and a digital video
recorder to record important features of the site prior to the
commencement of work, during remediation, and after the work has been
completed. Photographs shall be submitted both electronically and stored
on CDs or floppy disks (for subsequent file locking by FAA) and as
actual hard copy prints.

1.2.3 Each photograph shall be in color. Photographs and videos shall be
of clear professional quality. A scale or object of known and stated
dimensions, and date of photograph, shall be included within the frame
of all subjects photographed. All photos should be labeled as to
location and purpose, description, problem, etc. in a manner which
allows quick referencing (e.g., place label or identification number
immediately adjacent to photograph.

1.2.4 Video recordings shall be DVD format, and labeled sequentially
with project name and range of dates video stamped on each individual
DVD. DVD shall be narrated by the Contractor describing what is being
viewed, date, potential and actual problems, solutions, etc.

1.2.5 All photographs and DVDs are U.S. Government property and shall
not be released by the Contractor to the public or news media.
Photographs shall be displayed at a maximum of two to a page, with pages
(minimum photograph size shall be 3" x 5") punched to fit standard
three-ring binders. The description of the photo (label) must be visible
adjacent to the photograph. Provide binders in sufficient size and
quantity to hold all photographs. Provide at least one binder per set of
prints. Do not combine sets into the same binder.

1.2.6 Prints shall be color of standard quality, sized as described
herein and of single weight photograph paper. Each print shall show
appropriate identification and other information as directed by the
Resident Engineer (RE). Identification information on each print shall
include: name and location of project, item/action being photographed,
General Contractor, orientation of view, date and time of exposure, and
name and address of photographer.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

> The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01330,
> "Submittal Procedures".

1.3.1 SD-08 Statements

> Photography Plan; GA
>
> The Contractor shall submit for approval each month his photography
> plan, which shall include the following information: items to be
> photographed and video recorded, location and views of the photographs
> and video that will be taken.

1.3.2 SD-01 Data

1.3.2.1 Construction Photograph (Electronic Files and Prints); GA.

1.  Initial, Semi-Final and Final Photographs.

The Contractor shall submit to the RE three sets of prints of each
photograph taken prior to the commencement of work, after the completion
of site work, and after completion of all work, along with the
electronic files within 14 calendar days after taking the photographs,
or as approved by the RE.

2.  Monthly Photographs

The Contractor shall submit to the RE three prints of each monthly
progress photograph, along with the electronic files, within 14 calendar
days after taking the photographs, or as approved by the RE.

1.3.2.2 Videos; GA

> The Contractor shall submit initial, monthly, semi-final, and final
> video recordings.
>
> Three copies of each unedited video recording shall be turned over to
> the RE within 14 calendar days after completing the video recording,
> or as directed by the RE.
>
> Three copies of edited video recording shall be turned over to the RE
> within 14 calendar days after completing the video footage, or as
> directed by the RE.

**PART 2 PRODUCTS**

> Not applicable

**PART 3 EXECUTION**

3.1 INITIAL PHOTOGRAPHS AND VIDEO

> The location of initial photographs will be designated by the RE. Each
> video recording of initial site conditions shall include alternative
> views of the items photographed. The locations of the video recorded
> will be designated by the RE. The running time for initial conditions
> in each edited video shall be approximately 45 minutes. The Contractor
> shall take a minimum of 50 photographs including views of the
> following:
>
> a\. Recharge Bed Area
>
> b\. Expanded Sprinkler System Area

c.  Proposed Piping Routes

3.2 MONTHLY PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS AND VIDEO

> After construction operations have been started at the site, the
> Contractor shall record the remediation with photographs and video
> recordings. A minimum of 60 photographs shall be taken each month. The
> monthly minimum edited video running time shall be 30 minutes and
> unedited video running time shall be 2 hours, 80 percent of which
> shall be of site work. The progress photographs and video shall
> include coverage of:
>
> a\. Construction of temporary facilities (including office trailer)
> and utilities
>
> b\. Construction/installation of soil erosion and sediment control
> measures
>
> c\. Unanticipated events

d\. Bed construction

e\. Construction equipment

f\. Sprinkler system piping and sprinkler head installation

g\. Conveyance piping installation

h\. Control vaults and controls

i\. Bridge Installation

j\. Direction Drilling Activities

k\. Electrical and control system installation

l\. Monitoring well installation

m\. Site stabilization

3.3 SEMI-FINAL AND FINAL PHOTOGRAPHS AND VIDEO FILM

After the completion of all work, the Contractor shall take a minimum of
100 photographs and produce approximately 30-minutes of edited video
film including views of the completed site. At the completion of all
work, the locations of the final photographs shall include:

a.  Unanticipated events

b.  Restored laydown areas

c.  Completed bed area

d.  Sprinkler system piping and sprinkler head installation

e.  Monitoring wells

f.  Control vaults and controls

g.  Electrical and control system installation

3.4 FREQUENCY

> The photography and video taping efforts shall be spaced out
> intermittently throughout the given period as appropriate over each
> activity to provide views representative of the entire project.

3.5 VIEWS REQUIRED

3.5.1 Prints and video shall illustrate condition and location of work
and the state of progress.

3.5.2 Consult with the RE at each period of photography for
recommendations concerning views required.

END OF SECTION

**SECTION 01400**

**CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL**

**PART I GENERAL**

1.1 SUMMARY

> The work covered by this section consists of establishing and
> maintaining an effective quality control system throughout the
> contract period.

1.2 REFERENCES

> The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
> extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by
> basic designation only.

AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)

> ASTM D 3740 (2001) Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in the
> Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering
> Design and Construction
>
> ASTM E 329 (2000) Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of
> Materials Used in Construction.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

> The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01330,
> "Submittal Procedures."

SD-08 Statements

Final Quality Control Plan; GA

> The Contractor shall furnish for review by the Government, not later
> than 10 days after receipt of Notice to Proceed, the Contractor
> Quality Control (CQC) Plan proposed to implement the requirements of
> the Contract. The plan shall identify personnel, procedures,
> instructions, tests, records, and forms to be used.

Interim Quality Control Plan; GA

> The Government will consider an interim plan for this first 30 days of
> operation. This plan shall be submitted at the CQC Coordination
> Meeting.

Notification of Proposed Changes to the Quality Control Plan; GA

> Proposed changes to the CQC Plan shall be submitted for approval a
> minimum of seven calendar days prior to any proposed change.

SD-18 Records

> Daily QC Records; GA
>
> The original and one copy of these records in report form shall be
> furnished to the Government daily within 24 hours after the date
> covered by the report, except that reports need not be submitted for
> days on which no work is performed. As a minimum, one report shall be
> prepared and submitted for every seven days of no work and on the last
> day of no work period. All calendar days shall be accounted for
> throughout the life of the contract. The first report following a day
> of no work shall be for that day only. Reports shall be signed and
> dated by the CQC Engineer. The report from the CQC Engineer shall
> include copies of test reports and copies of reports prepared by all
> subordinate quality control personnel.

**PART 2 PRODUCTS**

Not Applicable

**PART 3 EXECUTION**

3.1 GENERAL

> The Contractor is responsible for quality control and shall establish
> and maintain an effective system in compliance with the Contract. The
> quality control system shall consist of plans, procedures, and
> organization necessary to produce an end product which complies with
> the contract requirements. The system shall cover construction
> operations, both on-site and off-site, and shall be keyed to the
> proposed construction sequence.

3.2 QUALITY CONTROL PLAN

3.2.1 General

> Construction will be permitted to begin only after acceptance of the
> CQC Plan or acceptance of an interim plan applicable to the particular
> feature of work to be started. Work outside of the features of work
> included in an accepted plan will not be permitted to begin until
> acceptance of a CQC Plan or another interim plan containing the
> additional features of work to be started.

3.2.2 Content of the CQC Plan

> The CQC Plan shall include, as a minimum, the following to cover all
> construction operations, both on-site and off-site, including work by
> subcontractors, fabricators, suppliers and purchasing agents:
>
> a\. A description of the quality control organization, including a
> chart showing lines of authority and acknowledgment that the CQC staff
> shall implement the three phase control system for all aspects of the
> work specified. The staff shall include a CQC Engineer who shall
> report to the Project Manager or someone higher in the Contractor\'s
> organization. Project Manager in this context shall mean the
> individual with responsibility for the overall management of the
> project including quality and production.
>
> b\. The name, qualifications (in resume format), duties,
> responsibilities and authorities of each person assigned a QC
> function.
>
> c\. A copy of the letter to the Engineer signed by an authorized
> official of the firm which describes the responsibilities and
> delegates sufficient authorities to adequately perform the functions
> of the CQC Engineer including authority to stop work which is not in
> compliance with the contract. The CQC Engineer shall issue letters of
> direction to all other various quality control representatives
> outlining duties, authorities and responsibilities. Copies of these
> letters shall also be furnished to the Government.
>
> d\. Procedures for scheduling, reviewing, certifying, and managing
> submittals, including those of subcontractors, off-site fabricators,
> suppliers and purchasing agents. These procedures shall be in
> accordance with Section 01330, "Submittal Procedures."
>
> e\. Control, verification, and acceptance testing procedures for each
> specific test required by the Contract or Project Specification
> including: the test name, Specification or Contract paragraph
> requiring the test, feature of work to be tested, test frequency,
> acceptance or passing criteria, and person responsible for each test.
> (Laboratory facilities must be Corps of Engineers certified if
> required by the Contracting Officer's Technical Representative
> (COTR)).
>
> f\. Procedures for tracking preparatory, initial, and follow-up
> control phases and control, verification and acceptance tests
> including documentation.
>
> g\. Procedures for tracking construction deficiencies from
> identification through acceptable corrective action. These procedures
> will establish verification that identified deficiencies have been
> corrected.
>
> h\. Reporting procedures, including proposed reporting formats.
>
> i\. A list of the definable features of work. A definable feature of
> work is a task which is separate and distinct from other tasks and has
> separate control requirements. It could be identified by different
> trades or disciplines, or it could be work by the same trade in a
> different environment. Although each section of the specifications may
> generally be considered as a definable feature of work, there are
> frequently more than one definable feature under a particular section.
> This list will be agreed upon during the CQC coordination meeting.

3.2.3 Acceptance of Plan

> Acceptance of the Contractor's plan is required prior to the start of
> construction. Acceptance is conditional and will be predicated on
> satisfactory CQC performance during the construction. The Government
> reserves the right to require the Contractor to make changes in his
> CQC Plan and operations including removal of personnel, as necessary,
> to obtain the quality specified.

3.2.4 Notification of Changes

> After acceptance of the QC Plan, the Contractor shall notify the RE in
> writing a minimum of seven calendar days prior to any proposed change.
> Proposed changes are subject to acceptance by the RE.

3.3 CQC COORDINATION MEETING

> After the Preconstruction Conference, before start of construction and
> prior to acceptance by the Government of the Quality Control Plan, the
> Contractor shall meet with the Contracting Officer (CO) or Authorized
> Representative and discuss the Contractor's quality control system.
> During the meeting, a mutual understanding of the system details shall
> be developed, including the forms for recording the CQC operations,
> control activities, testing, administration of the system for both
> on-site and off-site work, and the interrelationship of Contractor's
> Management and control with the Government's Quality Assurance.
> Minutes of the meeting will be prepared by the Government and signed
> by both the Contractor and the CO or authorized representative. The
> minutes shall become a part of the contract files. There may also be
> occasions when subsequent conferences will be called by either party
> to reconfirm mutual understanding and/or address deficiencies in the
> CQC system or procedures which may require corrective action by the
> Contractor.

3.4 QUALITY CONTROL ORGANIZATION

3.4.1 CQC Engineer

> The Contractor shall identify an individual, within his organization
> at the site of the work who shall be responsible for overall
> management of CQC and have the authority to act in all CQC matters for
> the Contractor. This CQC Engineer shall be on the site at all times
> during construction and will be employed by the Contractor, except as
> noted in the following. An alternate for the CQC Engineer will be
> identified in the plan to serve in the event of the CQC Engineer's
> absence. Period of absence may not exceed two weeks at any one time,
> and not more than 30 workdays during a calendar year. The requirements
> for the alternate will be the same as for the designated CQC Engineer.

3.4.2 CQC Organizational Staffing

> When necessary, the Contractor shall provide CQC staff with complete
> authority to take any action necessary to ensure compliance with the
> contract. The CQC Engineer or staff member shall be at the site of the
> work at all times during progress.

3.4.2.1 CQC Staff

> Following are the minimum requirements for the CQC staff. These
> minimum requirements will not necessarily assure an adequate staff to
> meet the CQC requirements at all times during construction. The actual
> size of the CQC staff may vary during any specific work period to
> cover the needs of the work period. When necessary for a proper CQC
> organization, the Contractor shall add additional staff at no cost to
> the Government. This listing of minimum staff in no way relieves the
> Contractor of meeting the basic requirements of quality construction
> in accordance with contract requirements. All CQC staff members will
> be subject to acceptance by the RE.

3.4.2.2 CQC Engineer

> Since the majority of the project QC issues shall be related to
> excavation, placement of soils, backfilling, compaction, and
> identification of different soil strata, the CQC Engineer should have
> experience with similar Civil Engineering Projects.

3.4.2.3 Supplemental Personnel

> As required, a staff shall be maintained under the direction of the
> CQC Engineer such that the CQC Engineer and staff can perform all QC
> activities. The staff must be of sufficient size to ensure adequate QC
> coverage of all work phases, work shifts, and work crews involved in
> the construction. These personnel may perform other duties, but must
> be fully qualified by experience and technical training to perform
> their assigned QC responsibilities and must be allowed sufficient time
> to carry out these responsibilities. The QC plan will clearly state
> the duties and responsibilities of each staff member. It is assumed
> that the CQC Engineer shall perform the majority of the QC tasks.

3.4.3 Organization Changes

> The Contractor shall obtain RE's acceptance before replacing any
> member of the CQC staff. Requests shall include the names,
> qualifications, duties, and responsibilities of each proposed
> replacement.

3.5 CONTROL

> Contractor Quality Control is the means by which the Contractor
> assures that the construction, to include that of subcontractors and
> suppliers, complies with the requirements of the contract. The
> controls shall be adequate to cover all construction operations,
> including both on-site and off-site fabrication, and shall be keyed to
> the proposed construction sequence. The controls shall include at
> least three phases of control to be conducted by the CQC Engineer for
> all definable features of work, as follows:

3.5.1 Preparatory Phase

> This phase shall be performed prior to beginning any work on each
> definable feature of work and shall include:
>
> a\. A review of each paragraph of applicable specifications.
>
> b\. A review of contract plans.
>
> c\. A check to assure that all materials and/or equipment have been
> tested, submitted and approved.
>
> d\. A check to assure that provisions have been made to provide
> required control inspection and testing.
>
> e\. Examination of the work area to assure that all required
> preliminary work has been completed and is in compliance with the
> contract.
>
> f\. A physical examination of materials, equipment, and sample work to
> assure that they are on hand, conform to approved shop drawings or
> submittal data, and are properly stored.
>
> g\. A review of the appropriate activity hazard analysis to assure
> safety requirements are met.
>
> h\. Discussion of procedures for constructing the work including
> repetitive deficiencies. Document construction tolerances and
> workmanship standards for that phase of work.
>
> i\. A check to ensure that the portion of the plan for the work to be
> performed has been accepted by the RE.
>
> j\. The Government shall be notified at least 24 hours in advance of
> beginning any of the required action of the preparatory phase. This
> phase shall include a meeting conducted by the CQC Engineer and
> attended by the superintendent, other CQC personnel (as applicable),
> and the foreman responsible for the definable feature. The results of
> the preparatory phase actions shall be documented by separate minutes
> prepared by the CQC Engineer and attached to the daily QC report. The
> Contractor shall instruct applicable workers as to the acceptable
> level of workmanship required in order to meet contract
> specifications.

3.5.2 Initial Phase

> This phase shall be accomplished at the beginning of a definable
> feature of work. The following shall be accomplished:
>
> a\. A check of preliminary work to ensure that it is in compliance
> with contract requirements. Review minutes of the preparatory meeting.
>
> b\. Verification of full contract compliance. Verify required control
> inspection and testing.
>
> c\. Establish level of workmanship and verify that it meets minimum
> acceptable workmanship standards. Compare with sample panels is
> appropriate.
>
> d\. Resolve all differences.
>
> e\. Check safety to include compliance with and upgrading of the
> safety plan and hazard analysis. Review the activity analysis with
> each worker.
>
> f\. The Government shall be notified at least 24 hours in advance of
> beginning the initial phase. Separate minutes of this phase shall be
> prepared by the CQC Engineer and attached to the daily QC report.
> Exact location of initial phase shall be indicted for future reference
> and comparison with follow-up phases.
>
> g\. The initial phase shall be repeated for each new crew to work
> on-site, or any time acceptable specified quality standard are not
> being met.

3.5.3 Follow-Up Phase

> Daily checks shall be performed to assure continuing compliance with
> contract requirements, including control testing, until completion of
> the particular feature of work. The checks shall be made a matter of
> record in the CQC documentation. Final follow-up inspections shall be
> conducted and all deficiencies corrected prior to the start of
> additional features of work which may be affected by the deficient
> work. The Contractor shall not build upon or conceal nonconforming
> work.

3.5.4 Additional Preparatory and Initial Phase

Additional preparatory and initial phases may be conducted on the same
definable features of work as determined by the Government if the
quality of ongoing work is unacceptable; or if there are changes in the
applicable QC staff or in the on-site production supervision or work
crew; or if work on a definable feature is resumed after a substantial
period of inactivity, or if other problems develop.

3.6 TESTS

3.6.1 Testing Procedure

> The Contractor shall perform tests specified or required to verify
> that control measures are adequate to provide a product which conforms
> to contract requirements. Testing includes operation and/or acceptance
> tests when specified. The Contractor shall procure the services of a
> Corps of Engineers approved testing laboratory if required by the RE,
> or establish an approved testing laboratory at the project site. If
> FAA does require a Corps certified laboratory, but the Contractor
> desires the services of a laboratory which is not Corps of Engineers
> approved, then he will be responsible for all costs for acquiring the
> required approvals. A list of tests to be performed shall be furnished
> as part of the CQC Plan. The list shall give the test name, frequency,
> specification paragraph containing the test requirements, the
> personnel and laboratory responsible for each type of test, and an
> estimate of the number of tests required. The Contractor shall perform
> the following activities and record and provide the following data:
>
> a\. Verify that testing procedures comply with contract requirements.
>
> b\. Verify that facilities and testing equipment are available and
> comply with testing standards.
>
> c\. Check test instrument calibration data against certified
> standards.
>
> d\. Verify that recording forms and test identification control number
> system, including all of the test documentation requirements, have
> been prepared.
>
> e\. Results of all tests taken, both passing and failing tests, shall
> be recorded on the Quality Control report for the date taken.
> Specification paragraph reference, location where tests were taken,
> and the sequential control number identifying the test shall be given.
> Actual test reports may be submitted later, if approved by the RE,
> with a reference to the test number and data taken. An information
> copy of tests performed by an off-site or commercial test facility
> shall be provided directly to the RE. Failure to submit timely test
> reports, as stated, may result in nonpayment for related work
> performed and disapproval of the test facility for this contract.

3.6.2 Testing Laboratories

3.6.2.1 Capability Check

The Government reserves the right to check laboratory equipment in the
proposed laboratory for compliance with the standards set forth in the
contract specifications and to check the laboratory technician's testing
procedures and techniques. Laboratories utilized for testing soils,
concrete, asphalt and steel shall meet criteria detailed in ASTM D 3740
and ASTM E 329.

3.6.2.2 Capability Recheck

> If the selected laboratory fails the capability check, the Contractor
> will be assessed a charge to reimburse the Government for each
> succeeding recheck of the laboratory or the checking of a subsequently
> selected laboratory. Such costs will be deducted from the contract
> amount due the Contractor.

3.6.3 On-Site Laboratory and Field Testing Equipment

> The Government reserves the right to utilize the Contractor's control
> testing laboratory and field equipment to make assurance tests and to
> check the Contractor's testing procedures, techniques, and test
> results at no additional cost to the Government.

3.6.4 Split Samples

> The Government reserves the right to require split samples for quality
> assurance tests at an independent commercial or Government laboratory.

3.6.5 Furnishing or Transportation of Samples for Testing

> Costs incidental to the transportation of samples or materials shall
> be borne by the Contractor. If applicable, samples of materials for
> test verification and acceptance by the Government shall be delivered
> to the RE at the following address:

For delivery by mail: FAA William J. Hughes Technical Center

> Attn: Mr. Greg Falzetta
>
> Environmental and Safety Subteam, AJP-7932
>
> Atlantic City International Airport
>
> Atlantic City, NJ 08405
>
> For other deliveries; Same as above
>
> The RE contact shall be provided to the Contractor prior to initiation
> of site activities. Coordination for each specific test, exact
> delivery location and dates will be made through the RE.

3.7 COMPLETION INSPECTION

At the completion of all work or any increment thereof established by a
completion time or stated elsewhere in the specifications, the CQC
System Manger shall conduct an inspection of the work and develop a
"punch list" of items which do not conform to the approved plans and
specifications. Such a list of deficiencies shall be included in the CQC
documentation, as required by the paragraph: "Documentation" below, and
shall include the estimated date by which the deficiencies will be
corrected. The CQC Engineer or staff shall make a second inspection to
ascertain that all deficiencies have been corrected and so notify the
Government. The inspections and any deficiency corrections required by
this paragraph shall be accomplished within the time stated for
completion of the entire work or any particular increment thereof if the
project is divided into increments by separate completion dates.

3.8 DOCUMENTATION

> The Contractor shall maintain current records of quality control
> operations, activities, and tests performed including the work of
> subcontractors and suppliers. These records shall be on the required
> form and shall include factual evidence that required quality control
> activities and/or tests have been performed, including but not limited
> to the following:
>
> a\. Contractor/subcontractor and their area of responsibility.
>
> b\. Operating plant/equipment with hours worked, idle, or down for
> repair.
>
> c\. Work performed each day, giving location, description, and by
> whom. When Network Analysis (NAS) is used, identify each phase of work
> performed each day by NAS activity number.
>
> d\. Test and/or control activities performed with results and
> references to specifications/plans requirements. The control phase
> shall be identified (e.g., preparatory, initial, follow-up). List
> deficiencies noted along with corrective action.
>
> e\. Materials received with statement as to its acceptability and
> storage.
>
> f\. Identify submittals reviewed, with contract reference, by whom,
> and action taken.
>
> g\. Off-site surveillance activities, including actions taken.
>
> h\. Job safety evaluations stating what was checked, results, and
> instructions or corrective actions.
>
> i\. List instructions given/received and conflicts in plans and/or
> specifications.
>
> j\. Contractor\'s verification statement.
>
> k\. These records shall indicate a description of trades working on
> the project; the number of personnel working; the weather conditions
> encountered; and any delays encountered. These records shall cover
> both conforming and deficient features and shall include a statement
> that equipment and materials incorporate in the work and workmanship
> comply with the contract.

3.9 QUALITY CONTROL REPORT FORM

> The required form for recording quality control activities shall be
> provided by the FAA.

3.10 NOTIFICATION OF NONCOMPLIANCE

> The RE will notify the Contractor of any detected noncompliance with
> the foregoing requirements. The Contractor shall, after receipt of
> such notice, immediately take corrective action. Such notice when
> delivered to the Contractor at the site of the work shall be deemed
> sufficient for the purpose of notification. If the Contractor fails or
> refuses to comply promptly, the RE may issue an order stopping all or
> part of the work until satisfactory corrective action has been taken.
> No part of the time lost due to any such stop orders shall be made the
> subject of claim for extension of time or for excess costs or damages
> by the Contractor.

END OF SECTION

**SECTION 01500**

**CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES**

**PART 1 GENERAL**

1.1 SUBMITTALS

1.1.1 SD-01 Manufacturer's Catalog Data

> a\. Site Trailer; GA

1.2 TEMPORARY UTILITIES

> Reasonable amounts of the following utilities will be made available
> to the Contractor without charge.
>
> Water and Electricity
>
> The Contractor shall pay all costs incurred in connecting, converting,
> and disconnecting utilities. The Contractor shall make all connections
> and provide disconnects, fuse protection, overhead and buried power
> feed wires, transformers, and shall make disconnections and remove
> temporary components and feed wires upon project completion.
> Sufficient electrical service will be made available to power one site
> trailer. The Contractor shall ensure that new utility lines are
> complete, except for the connection, before interrupting existing
> service. The utility interruption to electric service shall be
> considered utility cutovers. Such interruption shall be further
> limited to four (4) hours. This limit includes time for deactivation
> and reactivation. The Contractor shall contact the FAA's electrical
> engineering personnel to determine the most appropriate temporary
> connection point on the adjacent FAA overhead electrical power lines.
>
> The only water available on site will be from an onsite injection well
> (RP-IW1) that has a capacity of up to approximately 90 gpm. If the
> Contractor desires to use water from this well, the Contractor shall
> be responsible for providing all necessary pumps and generators to
> pump water from the well. All submersible pumps, hose, and other
> components placed in the well shall be properly decontaminated (to the
> satisfaction of the FAA) prior to their installation. The water shall
> be considered non-potable.
>
> Ensure that new utility lines are complete, except for the connection,
> before interrupting existing service.

1.3 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES

> Provide adequate sanitary conveniences (portable chemical toilet with
> hand washes or sanitizers) of a type approved for the use of persons
> employed on the worksite, properly secluded from public observation,
> and maintained in such a manner as required or approved by the
> Resident Engineer (RE). Sanitary conveniences shall be provided at the
> site trailer. The facilities shall be secluded from public observation
> with stockade type fence or chain link fence with privacy slats.
> Maintain these conveniences at all times without nuisance. Upon
> completion of the work, remove the conveniences from the premises,
> leaving the premises clean and free from nuisance.

1.4 ODOR AND PEST CONTROL

> Include provisions for pest control and elimination of odors.

1.5 PROJECT SIGN

> Within 15 days after the commencement of work, provide one project
> identification sign at the Recharge Bed site. Construct the sign using
> 4‑foot by 8‑foot by 2‑inch thick exterior grade plywood,
> preservative‑treated lumber, and galvanized hardware. Paint the
> plywood portion of the sign using one coat of lead‑free alkyd oil
> primer paint and two coats of exterior enamel, but do not paint the
> preservative‑treated lumber portion of the sign. Lettering and details
> of construction shall be as indicated. Maintain throughout the life of
> the project. Upon completion of the project, remove the sign from the
> SITE.
>
> On the project sign, list two points of contact by name and telephone
> number

1.6 SITE TRAILER

> The Contractor is responsible for providing one site trailer. The
> trailer shall be suitably painted and kept in a good state of repair.
> Failure of the Contractor to maintain the trailer in good condition
> will be considered sufficient reason to require its removal. A sign
> not smaller than 24 inches by 24 inches shall be conspicuously placed
> on the trailer depicting the company name, business phone number, and
> emergency phone number. The trailer shall be anchored to resist high
> winds and must meet applicable state or local standards for anchoring
> mobile trailers. The trailer shall be furnished with necessary steps
> and anchors.
>
> The site trailer shall be approximately 10 feet x 40 feet and shall be
> located as shown on the Contract Drawings. Provide a weather-tight
> structure with adequate heating and cooling, lighting, ventilation, a
> 4‑foot by 8‑foot plan table, a standard size office desk and chair,
> and working cellular communications facilities. Provide either a
> 1,500‑watt radiant heater and a window‑mounted air conditioner rated
> at 9,000 BTUs minimum or a window‑mounted heat pump of the same
> minimum heating and cooling ratings. Provide a door with a cylinder
> lock and windows with locking hardware. Furnish all necessary
> utilities. File Contractor quality control records for ongoing work in
> the field office trailer and make available at all times to the
> Government. After completion of the work, remove the entire structure
> from the SITE.

1.7 IDENTIFICATION OF CONTRACTOR VEHICLES

> Each Contractor-provided vehicle and towed trailer shall show the
> Contractor's name so that it is clearly visible on both front doors of
> the vehicle and both sides of a towed trailer and shall at all times
> display a valid state license plate and safety inspection sticker.
> Contractor vehicles operated on Government property shall be
> maintained in good state of repair.

**PART 2 PRODUCTS**

> Not Used

**PART 3 EXECUTION**

3.1 TRAILER INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

The Contractor is responsible for providing, installing, connecting to
the utilities, and maintaining the Site trailer. The Contractor shall
remove the trailer upon completion of the project.

2.  UTILITY LOCATION

Utility markouts are required prior to any excavation work. The
Contractor is responsible for contacting the NJ One Call Utility
Hotline. Additionally, the contractor shall notify the RE of any
excavation work so that the Center Operations and Maintenance Services
(COMS) contractor can mark out the "private" utility lines. The
Contractor shall notify the RE at least seven days prior to beginning
any excavation activities.

END OF SECTION

##  SECTION 01560

**ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION**

**PART 1 GENERAL**

# 1.1 SUMMARY

> This section covers the furnishing of all labor, material, and
> equipment and performing all work required for the protection of the
> environment during construction operations except for those measures
> set forth in other sections of these Specifications.
>
> For the purpose of this Specification, environmental protection is
> defined as the retention of the environment in its natural state to
> the greatest extent possible during project construction and to
> enhance the natural appearance in its final condition. Environmental
> protection requires consideration of air, water, and land resources
> and involves noise, solid waste management and management of other
> pollutants. In order to prevent, and to provide for abatement and
> control of any environmental pollution arising from the construction
> activities in performance of this contract, the Contractor and his
> subcontractors shall comply with all applicable federal, state, and
> local laws and regulations and shall obtain all necessary permits
> required by same.

# 1.2 REFERENCES

> APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS: The publications listed below are integral to
> this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are
> referred to in the text by the basic designation only.
>
> U.S. DEPARTMENT OF LABOR, OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH
> ADMINISTRATION (OSHA)

29 CFR 1910.12 Subpart B - Adoption and Extension of Established Federal
Standards, Construction Work

> 29 CFR 1910.94 Subpart G - Occupational Health and Environmental
> Control, Ventilation
>
> 29 CFR 1910.95 Subpart G - Occupational Health and Environmental
> Control, Occupational Noise Exposure
>
> 29 CFR 1910.106 Subpart H - Hazardous Materials, Flammable and
> Combustible Liquids
>
> 29 CFR 1910.109 Subpart H - Hazardous Material, Explosives and
> Blasting Agents
>
> 29 CFR 1910.146 Permit-required Confined Spaces
>
> 29 CFR 1910.120 Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency Response
>
> 29 CFR 1910.134 Subpart I - Personal Protective Equipment, Respiratory
> Protection
>
> 29 CFR 1910.178 Subpart N - Materials Handling and Storage,
>
> Powered Industrial Truck
>
> 29 CFR 1910.1000 Subpart Z- Toxic and Hazardous Substances, Air
> Contaminants
>
> 29 CFR 1910.1200 Subpart Z - Toxic and Hazardous Substances Hazard
> Communication
>
> 29 CFR 1926.21 Subpart C - Safety Training and Education
>
> 29 CFR 1926.350 Subpart J - Welding and Cutting

ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA) REGULATIONS

> 40 CFR 51 Federal Conformity Determination for Federal Actions
>
> 40 CFR 173 Shippers -- General Requirements for Shipments and
> Packaging

40 CFR 761 Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCBs) Manufacturing, Processing,
Distribution in Commerce, and Use Prohibitions

> 40 CFR 261 Identification and Listing of Hazardous Waste
>
> 40 CFR 262 Standards Applicable to Generators of Hazardous Waste
>
> 40 CFR 263 Standards Applicable to Transporters of Hazardous Waste
>
> 40 CFR 264 Standards for Owners and Operators of Hazardous Waste
> Treatment, Storage, and Disposal Facilities
>
> 40 CFR 300 National Contingency Plan
>
> 49 CFR 178 Specifications for Packaging

NEW JERSEY ADMINISTRATIVE CODE (NJAC)

> NJAC 2:90 State Soil Conservation Committee
>
> NJAC 7:1E Discharges of Petroleum and Other Hazardous Substances
>
> NJAC 7:9 Water Pollution Control
>
> NJAC 7:10 Safe Drinking Water Act
>
> NJAC 7:14A The New Jersey Pollutant Discharge Elimination System
>
> NJAC 7:14B Underground Storage Tanks
>
> NJAC 7:18 Regulations Governing the Certification of
>
> Laboratories and Environmental Measurements
>
> NJAC 7:19 Water Supply Allocation Permits
>
> NJAC 7:26 Solid Waste
>
> NJAC 7:26G Hazardous Waste
>
> NJAC 7:27 Bureau of Air Pollution Control Regulations
>
> NJAC 7:30 Pesticide Control Code
>
> NJAC 7:50 Pinelands Comprehensive Management Plan

#### FEDERAL AVIATION ADMINISTRATION (FAA) ORDERS

> 1050.1D Policies and Procedures for Considering Environmental Impacts
>
> 1050.10B Prevention, Control, and Abatement of
>
> Environmental Pollution at FAA Facilities
>
> 1050.17 Airway Facilities Environmental and Safety Compliance Program
>
> 3900.13B Personal Protective Equipment and Clothing
>
> 3900.24A Accident and Fire Reporting
>
> 3900.25 Respiratory Protection Program
>
> FAA WJH TECHNICAL CENTER ORDERS
>
> 3900.55 Occupational Safety and Health
>
> ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (COE)
>
> COE EM-385-1-1 Corps of Engineers Safety and Health Requirements
> Manual

1.3 DEFINITIONS

[Debris]{.underline}

Combustible and noncombustible wastes such as ashes; waste materials
resulting from construction, demolition, maintenance, or repair work;
leaves; and tree trimmings.

[Discharge]{.underline}

Any intentional or unintentional action or omission resulting in the
releasing, spilling, leaking, pumping, pouring, emitting, emptying or
dumping of hazardous substances, hazardous wastes, hazardous materials,
or pollutants into surface or ground waters or onto lands from which it
might flow or drain into said waters or volatilize into the air.

[Drip Line]{.underline}

The outer most horizontal perimeter of the foliage or limbs of trees and
shrubs.

[Environmental Assessment (EA)]{.underline}

A concise public document for which a federal agency is responsible,
that serves to: (a) briefly provide sufficient evidence and analysis for
determining whether to prepare an environmental impact statement or a
finding of no significant impact;(b) aid an agency's compliance with the
National Environmental Policy Act (NEPA) when no environmental impact
statement is necessary; and, (c) facilitate preparation of an
environmental impact statement when one is necessary.

[Environmental Impact Statement (EIS)]{.underline}

A document required by the NEPA for major projects or legislative
proposals significantly affecting the environment. A tool for decision
making, it describes the positive and negative effects of the
undertaking and lists alternative actions.

[Hazardous Substance]{.underline}

Such elements and compounds, including petroleum, petroleum products,
pesticides, solvents and other substances as set forth NJAC 7:1E.

[Hazardous Waste]{.underline}

Hazardous substances as defined in 40 CFR 261 or as defined by
applicable state and local regulations.

[Oily Waste]{.underline}

Petroleum products and bituminous materials.

[Pollutant]{.underline}

Any dredged spoil, solid waste, sewage, garbage, refuse, oil, grease,
sewage sludge, munitions, chemical wastes, biological materials, thermal
waste, wrecked or discarded equipment, rock, sand, construction waste or
runoff, or other residue discharged to the land, ground waters or
surface waters.

[Rubbish]{.underline}

Combustible and noncombustible wastes such as paper, boxes, glass,
crockery, metal, lumber, cans, and bones.

[Sewage]{.underline}

Wastes characterized as domestic sanitary sewage.

[Garbage]{.underline}

Refuse and scraps resulting from preparation, cooking, dispensing, and
consumption of food.

[Sediment]{.underline}

Soil and other debris that has eroded and have been transported by
runoff water or wind.

[Solid Waste]{.underline}

Non-hazardous rubbish, debris, garbage, and other discarded solid
materials resulting from industrial, commercial, and agricultural
operations and from community activities.

[Volatile Organic Substance]{.underline}

Any organic substances, mixture of organic and inorganic substances
including, but not limited to, petroleum crudes, petroleum fractions,
petrochemicals, solvents, diluents, and thinners which have vapor
pressures or sums of partial pressures of substances of 0.02 pounds per
square inch (one millimeter of mercury) absolute or greater measured at
standard conditions of atmospheric pressure and a temperature of 60
degrees Fahrenheit; in the case of surface coating formulations,
includes coalescing or other agent, regardless of vapor pressure, which
evaporates from the coating during the drying phase; but does not
include methane, CFC-11, CFC-12, CFC-22, FC-23, CFC-113, CFC-114 and
CFC-115.

[Wetlands]{.underline}

Those areas that are inundated or saturated by surface or ground water
at a frequency and duration sufficient to support, and that under normal
circumstances do support, a prevalence of vegetation typically adapted
for life in saturated soil conditions. Wetlands generally include
swamps, marshes, bogs and similar areas. National Wetland Inventory
Maps, promulgated by the U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service, shall be used
to identify wetlands to be protected. Maps are available from the Fish
and Wildlife Service and the New Jersey Department of Environmental
Protection.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01330,
"Submittal Procedures."

1.4.1 SD-04 Drawings

> a\. Location of Laydown and Trailer Areas, GA
>
> Plans showing construction facilities shall be submitted for approval
> of the RE.

1.4.2 SD-08 Statements

> a\. Environmental Permit Applications; GA
>
> Submit four (4) copies of applicable construction permit
> applications(s) in accordance with Part 3 of this section.
>
> b\. Administrative or Closeout Submittals; GA
>
> i\. Solid Waste Disposal Permit (if required)
>
> Submit one copy of a state and local permit or license showing such
> agencies' approval of the disposal plan.

1.4.3 SD-09, Reports

> a\. Environmental Protection Plan; GA
>
> Prior to commencement of the work, the Contractor shall submit to the
> RE for approval four (4) copies of his proposed Environmental
> Protection Plan. The Contractor shall also prepare and submit to the
> Cape-Atlantic Soil Conservation District for certification, a Soil
> Erosion and Sediment Control Plan, in accordance with Section 02112. A
> copy of the approved Soil Erosion and Sediment Control Plan shall be
> submitted to the Resident Engineer (RE) prior to the commencement of
> work.
>
> b\. Monthly Recycling Report; GA

See Paragraph 3.4.4

> c\. Dirt and Dust Control Plan; GA
>
> Prior to commencement of the work, submit truck and material haul
> routes along with a plan for controlling dirt, debris, and dust on
> base roadways. As a minimum, identify in the plan the subcontractor
> and equipment for cleaning along the haul route and measures to reduce
> dirt, dust, and debris from roadways.

1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS

Provide and maintain all environmental protection measures established,
during the life of the contract. Plan for and provide environmental
protective measures to control pollution that develops during normal
construction practice. Plan for and provide environmental protective
measures required to correct conditions that develop during the
construction of permanent or temporary environmental features associated
with the project. Comply with all applicable federal, state, Pinelands
Commission and local regulations pertaining to the environment,
including but not limited to water, air, soil, sediment, wetlands,
floodplains, and noise pollution.

1.5.1 Environmental Protection Plan

Five (5) days after Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall meet with
the RE to discuss the proposed environmental protection plan and to
develop mutual understanding relative to the details of environmental
protection, including measures for protecting natural resources,
required reports, and other measures to be taken. Approval of the
Contractor's plan for environmental protection does not relieve the
Contractor of his responsibility for adequate and continuing control of
pollutants.

1.5.1.1 Environmental Planning

The Contractor shall comply with all specified mitigative measures
and/or environmental concerns in preparation of the Environmental
Protection Plan by addressing the Environmental Assessment (EA),
Environmental Impact Statement (EIS) and the preconstruction and
postconstruction phases of the project. The Contractor shall be
financially and legally liable for any deviations and/or non-conformance
with the applicable EA or EIS.

Fourteen (14) days after the environmental protection plan meeting,
submit to the RE the proposed environmental plan for further discussion,
review, and approval.

1.5.1.2 Commencement of the Work

As directed by the RE, following approval.

1.5.2 Preconstruction Survey

Prior to field mobilization perform a preconstruction survey of the
project site with the RE, and take photographs showing existing
environmental conditions in and adjacent to the site. Land, streams,
wetlands, and fish and wildlife resources to be protected shall be
specifically noted. Photographs shall be submitted in accordance with
Specification Section 01380, "Project Photographs and Video."

1.5.3 Postconstruction Survey

Within five (5) days after completion of construction, perform a
postconstruction survey of the project site with the RE, and take
photographs showing existing environmental conditions in and adjacent to
the site. Land, streams, wetlands, and fish and wildlife resources that
were identified in the preconstruction survey shall be specifically
noted. Photographs shall be submitted in accordance with Specification
Section 01380, "Project Photographs and Video".

1.5.4 EA and EIS Compliance

The Contractor shall comply with all specific mitigation measures and/or
environmental concerns in preparation of the Environmental Protection
Plan, during and after construction. The Contractor shall be financially
and legally liable and responsible for any deviations or nonconformance
with the EA or EIS. It is the contractor's responsibility to clearly
understand the requirements of this paragraph.

1.5.5 Environmental Permit Compliance

The Contractor shall construct all work in conformance with requirements
or conditions of all federal, state, Pinelands Commission and local
environmental permits. It is the Contractor's responsibility to fully
understand the environmental permit requirements. With many permits
issued contingent to design specifications and drawings, no deviations
from these Specifications and Drawings shall occur without written
approval of the RE. The Contractor shall be financially and legally
liable for any deviations, nonconforming or in violation of applicable
environmental permits.

1.6 NOTIFICATION OF NON-COMPLIANCE

> The RE or RE's representative will notify the Contractor in writing of
> any non-compliance with the aforementioned federal, state or local
> laws or regulations. Such notice, when delivered to the Contractor or
> his authorized representative at the site of the work, shall be deemed
> sufficient for the purpose. The Contractor shall, after receipt of
> such notice, immediately inform the RE of proposed corrective action
> and take such action as may be approved. If the Contractor fails or
> refuses to comply promptly, the RE may issue an order stopping all or
> part of the work until satisfactory corrective action has been taken.
> No part of the time lost due to any such stop orders shall be made
> subject of a claim for extension of time or for excess costs or
> damages by the Contractor.

1.7 SUBCONTRACTORS

> Compliance with the provisions of this section by subcontractors will
> be the responsibility of the Contractor.

1.8 CLASS I ODS PROHIBITION

> Class I Ozone Depleting Substances (ODS), as defined in Section 602(a)
> of the Clean Air Act, shall not be used in the performance of this
> contract, nor be provided as part of the equipment.

1.9 UNFORSEEN HAZARDOUS REGULATED MATERIAL

> If material that is not indicated in the contract documents is
> encountered that may be dangerous to human health upon disturbance
> during construction operations, stop that portion of work and notify
> the RE immediately. Intent is to identify hazardous substances or
> wastes. Within 14 calendar days the RE will determine if the material
> is hazardous. If the material is not hazardous or poses no danger, the
> RE will direct the Contractor to proceed without change. If the
> material is hazardous and handling of the material is necessary to
> accomplish the work, the RE will issue a modification and additional
> direction regarding material handling, management and disposal.

**PART 2 PRODUCTS**

Not used.

**PART 3 EXECUTION**

3.1 PROTECTION OF NATURAL RESOURCES

> The natural resources within the project boundaries and outside the
> limits of permanent work performed under this contract shall be
> preserved in their present condition or be restored to a condition
> after completion of construction that will appear to be natural and
> not detract from the appearance of the project. The Contractor shall
> confine his construction activities to areas defined by the Plans and
> Specifications. The following additional requirements are intended to
> supplement the requirements of the Contract Clauses.

3.1.1 Land Resources

> Except in areas indicated on the plans or specified to be cleared, the
> Contractor shall not deface, injure, or destroy trees or shrubs, nor
> remove or cut them without the authority of the RE. Ropes, cables, or
> guys shall not be fastened to or attached to any existing nearby trees
> for anchorages unless specifically authorized. Where such special
> emergency use is permitted, it shall be performed in such a manner as
> to avoid damage to the trees. The Contractor shall in any event be
> responsible for any damage resulting from such use.

3.1.1.1 Protection

> Where the possibility exists that trees may be defaced, bruised,
> injured, or otherwise damaged by the Contractor's equipment or
> operations, the Contractor shall adequately protect such trees. Stone,
> earth or other material that is displaced into uncleared areas shall
> be removed. By approved excavation, remove trees with 30 percent or
> more of their root system destroyed. The use of heavy equipment within
> the drip line of trees shall be avoided to prevent root system damage.
> Boards shall not be nailed to trees that will be saved during
> construction. Damaged trunks or exposed roots shall be painted
> immediately with a good grade of tree paint. Tree limb removal, where
> necessary, will be done flush to trunk or main branch and that area
> painted with a good grade of tree paint. Monuments and markers shall
> be protected before construction operations commence.

3.1.1.2 Replacement

> Remove trees and other landscape features scarred or damaged by
> equipment operations, and replace with equivalent, undamaged trees and
> landscape features. Tree species shall conform to Pineland Commission
> requirements, NJAC 7:50-6.23 et seq. Obtain RE's approval before
> replacement. Restoration of scarred and damaged trees shall be
> performed in an approved manner by experienced workmen. Trees damaged
> beyond restoration shall be removed and disposed of under requirements
> for excavation. Trees that are to be removed because of damage shall
> be replaced at the Contractor's expense by nursery-grown trees of the
> same species or a species approved by the RE. The size and quality of
> nursery-grown trees shall also be approved by the RE. Any disturbed
> turfed (grassed) areas shall be seeded and mulched as directed by the
> RE.

3.1.1.3 Temporary Construction

> Remove traces of temporary construction facilities such as haul roads,
> work areas, structures, foundations of temporary structures,
> stockpiles of excess or waste materials, and other signs of
> construction. Grade temporary roads, parking areas, and similar
> temporarily used areas to conform with surrounding contours. Temporary
> construction facilities shall not be located in or encroach wetlands,
> streams or wildlife management areas unless prior approval has been
> received from the RE.

3.1.1.4 Replanting

> Contractor shall be responsible to replant trees and/or shrubs until
> 100% survival is attained for one complete year after construction is
> completed.

3.1.1.5 Location of Storage Facilities

> A Contractor laydown area shall be designated by the RE. Grade
> temporary roads, parking areas, and similar temporarily used areas to
> conform with surrounding contours. Temporary construction facilities
> shall not be located in or encroach upon wetlands, streams or wildlife
> management areas, unless prior approval has been received from the RE.
>
> The Contractor will not be permitted to store materials in other
> existing buildings on portions of the FAA property. Storage and other
> construction facilities shall be confined to the approved Contractor
> operations and laydown areas.

3.1.2 Water Resources

> The Contractor shall not pollute any streams, rivers or waterways with
> fuels, oils, bitumens, calcium chloride, acids, insecticides,
> herbicides or other hazardous or harmful materials or pollutants. The
> Contractor shall investigate and comply with all applicable federal,
> state, county and municipal laws concerning pollution of rivers and
> streams.

3.1.2.1 Stream Crossings

> The RE's approval is required before any equipment will be permitted
> to ford live streams. In areas where frequent crossings are required,
> install temporary culverts or bridges. Remove temporary culverts or
> bridges upon completion of work, and repair the area to its original
> condition or as specified.

3.1.2.2 Oily Wastes

> Prevent oily or other hazardous substances from entering the ground,
> drainage areas, or local bodies of water. Any tank utilized for
> storage shall be double walled and designed to contain the type of
> liquids required for the project as well as providing secondary
> containment. Surround all temporary fuel oil or petroleum storage
> tanks with a temporary earth berm of sufficient size and strength to
> contain 110% (by volume) of the contents of the tanks in the event of
> leakage or spillage. The berm shall be covered by poly sheeting to
> protect the soil from contamination that might occur from the filling,
> draining, or failure of the tank. All spills and discharges of oily or
> other hazardous substances shall be immediately reported to the RE or
> authorized representative in accordance with NJAC 7:1E-2.14, Standard
> Operating Procedures.

3.1.2.3 Wetlands Protection

> Except in conformance with an issued federal, state, or Pinelands
> Commission permits, do not disturb, alter, fill, affect, drain,
> encroach upon or destroy any wetlands. Except in conformance with an
> issued federal, state, or Pinelands Commission permit, do not disturb,
> alter, fill, affect, encroach upon, or destroy upland buffers within
> 300 feet of a wetlands or alter surface or ground water flows into or
> from wetlands. Do not allow the discharge of petroleum products,
> pesticides, hazardous substances, chemicals, solid wastes, or silt
> into wetlands. Do not stage construction materials, supplies, or
> equipment in wetlands or floodplains.

3.1.3 Fish and Wildlife Resources

> Do not disturb fish and wildlife. Do not alter water flows or
> otherwise significantly disturb the native habitat adjacent to the
> project and critical to the survival of fish and wildlife, except as
> indicated or specified. Protect and do not alter, modify or affect
> endangered or threatened species habitat. Protect other noted critical
> fish and wildlife habitats.

3.1.3.1 Wildlife Hazard Abatement

> Comply with the requirements and recommendations as approved by the
> RE.

3.2 HISTORICAL AND ARCHAEOLOGICAL RESOURCES

> Carefully protect in-place and report immediately to the RE items
> having possible historical and archaeological interest or human
> skeletal remains discovered in the course of work. Stop work in the
> immediate area of the discovery until directed by the RE to resume
> work. Protect monuments, markers, and works of art. Do not disturb
> archaeological finds.

3.3 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL MEASURES

> Soil erosion measures shall comply with the Standards for Soil Erosion
> and Sediment Control in New Jersey, in accordance with NJAC 2:90 et.
> seq., Section 02112, "Erosion and Sediment Controls," and any other
> requirement specified herein.

3.3.1 Burnoff

> Burnoff of the ground cover is not permitted.

3.3.2 Borrow Pit Areas

> Manage and control borrow pit areas to prevent sediment from entering
> nearby streams or lakes. Restore areas, including those outside the
> borrow pit, disturbed by borrow and haul operations. Restoration
> includes grading, replacement of topsoil, and establishment of a
> permanent vegetative cover. Uniformly grade side slopes of borrow pit
> to not more than a slope of 1 part vertical to 2 parts horizontal.
> Uniformly grade the bottom of the borrow pits to provide a flat
> bottom, and drain by outfall ditches or other suitable means.
> Stockpile topsoil removed during the borrow pit operation, and use as
> part of restoring the borrow pit area.

3.3.3 Protection of Erodible Soils

> Immediately finish the earthwork brought to a final grade, as
> indicated or specified. Immediately protect the side slopes and back
> slopes upon completion of rough grading. Plan and conduct earthwork to
> minimize the duration of exposure of unprotected soils.

3.3.4 Temporary Protection of Erodible Soils

> Use the following methods to prevent erosion and control
> sedimentation:

3.3.4.1 Mechanical Retardation and Control of Runoff

> Mechanically retard and control the rate of runoff from the
> construction site. This includes construction of silt fences, straw
> bale barriers, diversion ditches, benches, and berms to retard and
> divert runoff to protected drainage courses.

3.3.4.2 Vegetation and Mulch

> Provide temporary protection on sides and back slopes as soon as rough
> grading is completed or sufficient soil is exposed to require erosion
> protection. Protect slopes by accelerated growth of permanent
> vegetation, temporary vegetation, mulching, or netting. Stabilize
> slopes by hydroseeding, anchoring mulch in place, covering with
> anchored netting, sodding, or such combination of these and other
> methods necessary for effective erosion control.
>
> Seeding: Provide new seeding where ground is disturbed. Seed type
> shall be consistent with NJAC 7:50 requirements. Include topsoil or
> nutriment during the seeding operation necessary to establish a
> suitable stand of grass.

3.3.4.3 Borrow

> Borrow is permitted only in areas where suitable environmental
> controls are possible.

3.3.5 Seeding

> Provide new seeding where ground is disturbed. Include topsoil during
> the seeding operation necessary to establish a suitable stand of
> cover. The seeding operation shall be as specified in Specification
> Section 02935, "Turf."

3.4 CONTROL AND DISPOSAL OF SOLID AND SANITARY WASTES

> Pick up solid wastes (at least daily), and place in containers which
> are regularly emptied (no less than once every two weeks unless
> approved by the RE). Do not prepare, cook, or dispose of food on the
> project site. Prevent contamination of the site of other areas when
> handling and disposing of wastes. On completion, leave the areas
> clean. Control and dispose of waste.

3.4.1 Disposal of Rubbish and Debris

> Dispose of rubbish and debris in accordance with the requirements
> specified.
>
> Remove and dispose rubbish and debris from Government property at a
> properly licensed facility.

3.4.2 Garbage Disposal

> Place garbage in approved containers, and move to a pickup point or
> disposal area, where directed.

3.4.3 Sewage, Odor, and Pest Control

> Provide chemical toilets or comparably effective units in accordance
> with Section 01500, "Construction Facilities," and periodically empty
> wastes into municipal, district, or station sanitary sewage systems.
> Include provisions for pest control and elimination of odors in
> accordance with NJAC 7:30. Sewage discharges onto the land or into
> surface or ground water from leaks, spills or broken pipes must
> immediately be reported to the RE and Security Operations Center. All
> work shall be in accordance with the General Paragraphs titled,
> "SANITATION."

3.4.4 Recycling

> The Contractor shall comply with Center Order 1050.2.
>
> On a monthly basis the Contractor shall provide a written report of
> the volume or weight of the following recycled materials:
>
> Office -- Paper, aluminum cans, glass containers of all colors,
> triangle 1 and 2 plastics, and cardboard.
>
> Construction -- Concrete, asphalt, iron, steel, carbon, bulk aluminum,
> copper, bulk plastics, batteries, oil, and fuel.

3.5 CONTROL AND DISPOSAL OF HAZARDOUS WASTE

3.5.1 Hazardous Storage Containers (if required)

> Choose approved containers utilizing the Hazardous Materials Table
> (HMT) in 49 CFR 172.101. Refer to 49 CFR 173 to ensure manufacturing
> is in compliance with 49 CFR 178. Store hazardous waste in approved
> containers properly labeled to identify the type of waste and the date
> the container was filled. Remove the containers from the project site,
> and handle, transport and dispose of hazardous waste within 90 days in
> accordance with 40 CFR 263, 40 CFR 264 and NJAC 7:26-7.1 through 12.1
> et. seq. and paragraph 3.8 of this section. For oil and hazardous
> material spills, notify the RE immediately.

3.5.2 Petroleum Products

> Conduct the fueling and lubricating of equipment and motor vehicles to
> protect against spills and evaporation. Dispose of lubricants to be
> discarded and all excess oil as hazardous waste in accordance with
> NJAC 7:26G-7.1 to 9.1 et. seq.

3.5.3 Lead-Acid Battery Electrolyte

> Dispose of electrolyte solution from lead-acid batteries. Do not dump
> electrolyte onto the ground or into storm drains or sanitary sewers.
> Comply with 29 CFR 1910.178(g), when installing or charging storage
> batteries. Use one of the following alternatives for disposal of waste
> electrolyte:

a\. An industrial waste treatment plant, if available and approved by
the RE for neutralizing and disposing of battery acid electrolyte.

b\. Transport the electrolyte to a state-approved hazardous waste
disposal site. The method of transportation and equipment shall comply
with applicable Federal and state regulations.

3.5.4 Discharges

> Prevent discharges of hazardous wastes, hazardous substances,
> hazardous materials or pollutants from entering the environment. If an
> accidental leak occurs, take immediate steps to contain free flowing
> liquid, e.g. construct temporary containment dikes using soil. All
> spills and discharges of hazardous materials shall be immediately
> reported to the Security Operations Center and the RE in accordance
> with NJAC 1:E-2.14, Standard Operating Procedures.

3.5.5 Disposal

> Disposal of any debris resulting from the contract work and any
> wastes, effluents, trash, garbage, oil, grease chemicals, etc., in or
> adjacent to the work area will not be permitted. If any waste material
> is dumped in unauthorized areas the Contractor shall remove the
> material and restore the area to its original condition at no cost to
> the FAA. If necessary, contaminated ground shall be excavated,
> disposed of as directed by the RE, replaced with suitable fill
> material, compacted and finished with topsoil, and planted as required
> to reestablish vegetation, all at the Contractor's expense.

3.6 DUST CONTROL

> Keep dust down at all times, including during non-working periods.
> Sprinkle or treat, using [water-]{.underline}only, the soil at the
> site, haul roads, and other areas disturbed by operations. Dry power
> brooming will not be permitted. Instead, use vacuuming, wet mopping,
> wet sweeping, or wet power brooming. Air blowing will be permitted
> only for cleaning nonparticulate debris such as steel reinforcing
> bars. Only wet cutting will be permitted for cutting concrete blocks,
> concrete, and bituminous concrete. Do not unnecessarily shake bags of
> cement, concrete mortar, or plaster.

3.7 NOISE

> Make the maximum use of low-noise emission products, as certified by
> the EPA. Blasting or use of explosives will not be permitted without
> written permission from the RE, and then only during the designated
> times.

3.8 AIR

3.8.1 Open Burning

> Open burning for salvage operations and of rubbish is strictly
> prohibited.

3.8.2 Volatile Organic Substances (VOS)

> All architectural coatings shall comply with NJAC 7:27-23.3
> requirements regarding the maximum allowable VOS content per volume of
> the specific coating.

3.9 PERMIT APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS

> The Contractor shall obtain and accurately prepare all other required
> environmental construction permit applications and registration forms,
> together with all supporting documents and drawings, in accordance
> with paragraph "Submittals". Submit completed applications(s) to RE
> for review and approval. Submit approved application(s) and applicable
> fees to appropriate regulatory agencies within 5 working days of the
> RE's approval.

3.10 WELL DRILLING PERMIT(S)

> Prepare and submit permit application form(s) for the drilling of
> well(s) and boring holes into ground water in accordance with NJAC
> 7:10-12.1 et. seq. The Contractor shall be responsible for all fees
> assessed per well permit. All wells and borings into ground water must
> be drilled by a New Jersey licensed well driller. A copy of all permit
> applications shall be provided to the RE. Adhere to the drilling
> requirements contained in Section 02730 and shown on the Contract
> Drawings.

3.11 COMPLIANCE WITH PERMITS

> The Contractor shall comply with all permits issued and with all terms
> and conditions contained therein. Copies of all permits issued shall
> be made available to the Contractor and RE.

3.12 SUPERFUND AREAS OF CONCERN (AOC)

> The entire Center was placed on the National Priorities List
> (Superfund) on October 1, 1990. There are currently 25 separate
> parcels of land called AOCs located throughout the Center on which the
> disposal of hazardous wastes did occur or is suspected of having
> occurred. Every reasonable effort has been made to delineate and avoid
> contaminated areas. However, if during the course of performing any
> subsurface work, debris (paper, wood, concrete, asphalt, brick,
> vehicle/airplane parts, eating utensils, dishware, scrap metal, drums,
> military ordnance, etc); unusual odors; or staining is encountered
> subsurface work at that particular location will stop and the RE shall
> be notified immediately.

3.13 ENVIRONMENTAL HEALTH AND SAFETY

> Health, Safety, and Emergency Response is addressed in Specification
> 01740, "Health, Safety, and Emergency Response."

END OF SECTION

#  SECTION 01700

**AS-BUILT RECORDS**

**PART 1 GENERAL**

1.1 AS-BUILT RECORD DRAWINGS

> During the progress of the work, the Contractor shall keep a careful
> record at the job site of all changes and corrections from the layouts
> and details shown on the drawings. The Contractor shall enter such
> changes and corrections on the contract drawings promptly, but in no
> case later than on a weekly basis. The Contractor shall maintain at
> the job site two sets of full-size marked prints; marked sets shall be
> available for review by the Contracting Officer's Technical
> Representative (COTR) or Resident Engineer (RE) at all times.

1.2 AS-BUILT RECORD OF MATERIALS

> A record of the materials used shall be furnished prior to completion
> of the contract. Submission of this data is a condition of final
> payment under the contract. Where several manufacturer's brands,
> types, or classes of the item listed have been used in the project,
> the specific areas where each item was used shall be designed.
> Designations shall be keyed to the areas and spaces depicted on the
> contract drawings. The record of materials used shall be furnished in
> the following format:

Materials Used

> Materials (Manufacturer's Where
>
> [Designation]{.underline} [Specification]{.underline}
> [Manufacturer]{.underline} [Designation)]{.underline}
> [Used]{.underline}

1.3 SUBMITTALS

> The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01330,
> "Submittal Procedures."

1.3.1 SD-04 Drawings

As-Built Record Drawings; GA

> At the time of completion of the installation of each major structure
> involved under the contract, the Contractor shall submit to the RE
> as-built record drawings showing the aforementioned changes,
> corrections and data. If the Contractor fails to maintain the record
> drawings as required herein, the Contracting Officer (CO) will
> consider that satisfactory progress has not been achieved for the
> period, thereby requiring the retainage of 10% of any progress
> payments to be made until such drawings are made current. In addition,
> the estimated cost of maintaining the record drawings will be deducted
> from any such progress payment. Requests for final payment will not be
> approved until the marked prints are delivered to the RE.

1.3.2 SD-18 Records

As-Built Record of Materials; GA

**PART 2 PRODUCTS**

Not Used

**PART 3 EXECUTION**

Not Used

END OF SECTION

**SECTION 01740**

**HEALTH, SAFETY, AND EMERGENCY RESPONSE**

**PART 1 GENERAL**

1.1 REFERENCES

> The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
> extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by
> the basic designation only.
>
> AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)
>
> ANSI A10.14 Construction and Demolition Operations - Requirements for
> Safety Belts, Harnesses, Lanyards and Lifelines for Construction and
> Demolition Use
>
> ANSI Z359.1 Safety Requirements for Personal Fall Arrest Systems

U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE)

> EM-385-1-1 U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Safety and Health Requirements
> Manual

U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)

> 29 CFR 1910 Occupational Safety and Health Standards
>
> 29 CFR 1910.120 Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency Response
>
> 29 CFR 1910.146 Permit-Required Confined Spaces
>
> 29 CFR 1910.147 The Control of Hazardous Energy (Lockout/Tagout)
>
> 29 CFR 1926 Safety and Health Regulations for Construction
>
> 29 CFR 1926.65 Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency Response

FEDERAL AVIATION ADMINISTRATION (FAA) ORDERS

The publications listed below are available upon request to assist the
Contractor in

preparing his bid. Submit all certifications, permit applications, and
issued

permits as required by these FAA Orders to complete the work.

> CT 3900.55 Occupational Safety and Health Order

NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)

> NFPA 70 National Electrical Code
>
> NFPA 241 Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition
> Operations

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

> This section describes the minimum health, safety, and emergency
> response requirements for performing specified activities at the
> Department of Transportation, Federal Aviation Administration (FAA),
> FAA William J. Hughes Technical Center (Center), Atlantic City, New
> Jersey site. The responsibility for development, implementation, and
> enforcement of the Site Safety and Health Plan (SSHP) lies with the
> Contractor and his health and safety personnel. The SSHP developed by
> the Contractor shall include programs for accident prevention,
> personnel protection, emergency responses/contingency planning, and
> air monitoring. Controls and procedures specified herein and by the
> SSHP may be terminated only when a Certified Industrial Hygienist
> (CIH) determines that hazards have been eliminated. Such termination
> shall be effective if approved in writing by the Resident Engineer
> (RE).
>
> This section provides additional requirements for implementing the
> accident prevention provisions of Contract Clause: EM 385-1-1, and
> specifies a Site Safety and Health Plan (SSHP) which shall satisfy the
> requirements for submission of a separate Accident Prevention Plan
> (APP) as required by EM 385-1-1. The requirements shall apply to all
> work.

1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

> Work performed under this contract shall comply with EM 385-1-1,
> applicable federal, state, and local safety and occupational health
> laws and regulations. This includes, but is not limited to,
> Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) standards, 29 CFR
> 1910, especially Section .120 "Hazardous Waste Site Operator
> Standards" and 29 CFR 1926, especially Section .65 "Hazardous Waste
> Site Operations and Emergency Response." This also includes the FAA
> Technical Center's Occupational Safety and Health Order, CT Order
> 3900.55. Matters of interpretation of standards shall be submitted to
> the appropriate administrative agency for resolution before starting
> work. Where the requirements of this specification, applicable laws,
> criteria, ordinances, regulations, and referenced documents vary, the
> most stringent requirements shall apply.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

> The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01330,
> "Submittal Procedures".

1.4.1 SD-01 Data

> a\. Site Safety and Health Plan (SSHP); GA
>
> The Contractor shall submit four copies of an SSHP to the RE within 15
> days of the Notice of Award. Approval of the SSHP shall be the
> responsibility of the RE. Contents of the SSHP shall include, but not
> be limited to, items described herein (Articles 3.1 through 3.9).
>
> b\. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS); GA
>
> The Contractor shall submit Material Safety Data Sheets for all
> hazardous or other applicable materials, both furnished for the work
> or used in the course of the work.

**PART 2 PRODUCTS**

Not Used

**PART 3 EXECUTION**

3.1 ORGANIZATIONAL RESPONSIBILITIES

> a\. Key Personnel and Organization Chart: The Contractor shall
> provide, at a minimum, an organizational chart and resumes of key
> personnel involved in all phases of construction. This chart must
> include Senior-Level Management, Project Manager, Site Safety and
> Health Officer (SSHO), Field Supervisors/Foreman Personnel that are
> key personnel.
>
> b\. SSHO: The Contractor must employ or contract a qualified
> individual (e.g., an industrial hygienist, safety engineer, etc.) to
> function as the SSHO for the project. That individual must be
> responsible to the Contractor and have the authority and knowledge
> necessary to implement the SSHP and verify compliance with applicable
> safety and health requirements.
>
> c\. At a minimum, the SSHO shall have the following responsibilities
> and authority to perform the following functions:
>
> 1\. Visit the site as needed to insure that the SSHP is being
> implemented, ensure that daily tailgate safety meetings are being
> conducted by the Field Supervisor/Site Forman, and provide any
> necessary training to on-site personnel.
>
> 2\. Have the authority to enforce the SSHP and stop operations if
> safety and health of personnel may be jeopardized.
>
> 3\. Effect evacuation of the site if necessary.
>
> 4\. Evaluate monitoring data to make field decisions regarding safety
> and health.
>
> 5\. Respond and visit the site within 24 hours of notification from
> the RE regarding health and safety violations and concerns.

3.2 HAZARD ASSESSMENT

> The Contractor shall perform and provide a hazard assessment for each
> location and operation to be performed. The hazard assessment shall be
> based on the best information available regarding contaminants and
> conditions present at the site as well as the practice and tools to be
> applied in the operation and shall include but not be limited to the
> following:
>
> a\. A preliminary evaluation of the site's characteristics
>
> b\. An evaluation of the known (including the use of MSDS) or
> suspected hazards.
>
> c\. An evaluation of known or potential safety hazards associated with
> each task.
>
> d\. An overview of the site including descriptions of the operations
> and tasks to be performed. Include the following:

1\. Size and location of the site.

2\. Description of the operation and tasks to be performed.

3\. Approximate duration of the operation and each task.

4\. Site topography and special features (e.g., structures, tanks,
etc.).

> 5\. Known or suspected pathways of hazards pertinent to the operation
> and tasks performed.
>
> 6\. Site accessibility.
>
> 7\. Safety and health hazards expected on the site.

3.3 EMPLOYEE TRAINING

> The Contractor shall provide site specific training and perform daily
> safety briefings (tailgate safety meetings) that will provide an
> awareness of planned operations, the site specific SSHP, the form and
> warning properties of potential hazards, work zones, locations of
> emergency/safety equipment, local emergency response procedures, site
> characteristics, levels of protection, communications, decontamination
> procedures, emergency facilities and signals, and evacuation
> procedures.

3.4 PERSONNEL PROTECTION

> The Contractor shall apply engineering and/or work practice controls
> as a means of protecting personnel in performance of site-specific
> tasks. Engineering controls shall be implemented to reduce and
> maintain employee exposure to at or below safety levels for those
> tasks demonstrating known or suspected hazards. Work practice controls
> shall be applied when engineering controls are impractical and shall
> be incorporated as site-specific standard operating procedures (SOPs)
> for personnel precautions and routine operations.

The Contractor shall use personal protective equipment (PPE) beyond
Level D only when engineering and/or work practice controls have been
deemed impractical or insufficient to protect employees during site
operations. Personnel shall be properly trained in the use of PPE. When
necessary, personnel shall be medically cleared to use the required PPE.
If the use of PPE beyond Level D (hard had, steel toe shoes, and
reflective safety vest) is required, contact the RE. Use of PPE in
emergency situations is allowed as necessary.

If PPE beyond Level D is required, the SSHO shall update the SSHP to
include all necessary training and medical surveillance. The SSHP shall
also be revised as follows:

> a\. The Contractor shall include in the SSHP a list of components for
> each protective ensemble, the level of protection (LOP) selected for
> each task, the rationale for each task-specific selection, and any
> contaminant action levels to be followed in LOP decision making.
>
> b\. The Contractor shall include in the SSHP a description of their
> respiratory protection program and the method of respirator fit
> testing employed.
>
> c\. The Contractor shall only make use of NIOSH approved respiratory
> protective equipment.
>
> d\. The Contractor shall establish and include in the SSHP a PPE
> program addressing the following elements:
>
> 1\. Site hazards
>
> 2\. PPE selection
>
> 3\. PPE use
>
> 4\. Duration of site operations
>
> 5\. PPE maintenance and storage
>
> 6\. PPE decontamination
>
> 7\. PPE training and proper fit
>
> 8\. Donning and doffing procedures
>
> 9\. PPE inspection
>
> 10\. PPE in-use monitoring
>
> 11\. Evaluation of program effectiveness
>
> 12\. Heat stress and temperature limitations

3.5 EMPLOYEE HEAT AND COLD STRESS MONITORING

> As dictated by seasonal conditions, the Contractor shall implement an
> employee heat or cold stress monitoring program during site operations
> and shall incorporate the program into the site SSHP.
>
> a\. The program shall include employee awareness of the signs and
> symptoms of heat or cold stress, preventive measures, and employee
> parameters to be monitored.
>
> b\. The Contractor shall maintain a daily heat or cold stress log on
> all employees on-site engaging in field activities and shall describe
> the log in the SSHP.

3.6 SITE CONTROL

> The Contractor shall be responsible for conducting operations at the
> site in a manner as to reduce the possibility of contact with any
> contaminants present to prevent the removal of contaminants by
> personnel or equipment leaving the site, and to prevent the migration
> of contaminants.
>
> The Contractor shall keep a daily log of site activities, including:
> personnel visiting the site, affiliation, date, arrival time,
> departure time, and purpose of the visit.
>
> The Contractor shall provide the RE with a list of all Contractor and
> subcontractor personnel authorized to enter the site prior to start of
> operations, updating the list as necessary.

3.7 SITE STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES

> The Contractor shall be responsible for the development and
> implementation of all necessary SOPs (e.g., air monitoring) for site
> operations. The SOPs shall be incorporated into the SSHP.

3.8 CONTINGENCY PLANNING

> The Contractor shall develop and implement an Emergency Response Plan
> (ERP) to handle anticipated on-site emergencies prior to start of site
> operations. The ERP shall be incorporated into the SSHP as a separate
> section of that document and shall be periodically reviewed and
> amended to keep it current with new or changing site conditions or
> information.

3.9 CONFINED SPACE ENTRY (if required)

Entry into and work in a confined space will not be allowed when oxygen
readings are less than 19.5% or greater than 23.5% or if the Lower
Flammable Limit (LFL) reading is greater than 10%, unless these
conditions are adequately addressed in the confined space entry program.
In addition, action levels for toxic atmospheres shall be determined.

> In accordance with CT 3900.55, Chapter 20, Contractors must present a
> copy of their confined space program and proof of training prior to
> being allowed to enter any confined space on the Center. CT Form
> 3900-40 must be properly filled in and signed prior to a confined
> space entry and a copy of the form must be provided to the FAA
> Technical Center Safety Office, ACX-42.
>
> In addition, all confined space entries must be arranged with the
> Technical Center Safety Office. An entry permit identifying all
> conditions that must be satisfied prior to confined space entry shall
> be prepared in accordance with EM-385-1-1, 29 CFR 1910.146, and 29 CFR
> 1910.147. The SSHP shall describe the standard operating safety
> procedures, engineering controls and safe work practices to be
> implemented for compliance with these permit requirements.
>
> In addition to the requirements set forth in EM-385-1-1, 29 CFR
> 1910.146, and 29 CFR 1910.147, the Contractor shall also satisfy the
> following:
>
> 1\. The Contractor shall supply all sampling and testing equipment and
> personnel.
>
> 2\. The Contractor shall have an OSHA approved mechanical extraction
> system that utilizes a full torso harness.

END OF SECTION

**SECTION 02003**

**SURVEY CONTROL FOR EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING**

**PART 1 GENERAL**

1.1 REFERENCES

> The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
> extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by
> the basic designation only.
>
> STATE OF NEW JERSEY BOARD OF PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERS & LAND SURVEYORS
>
> Title 45:8 New Jersey State Statues, Chapter Professional Engineers
> and Land Surveyors
>
> Chapter 40 State Board of Professional Engineers and Surveyors
> Administrative Rules and Regulations

CODE OF FEDERAL REGULATIONS

> 29 CFR 1910 Occupational Safety and Health Standards; General Industry

1.2 DESCRIPTION

> This section includes requirements for field survey control,
> measurement and marking for work associated with the excavation and
> backfilling of the Recharge Bed. The requirements are also applicable
> to surveys performed in work areas sampled to demonstrate that soil
> has not become contaminated during the project, if required by the RE.

1.3 SURVEY REQUIREMENTS

> All surveys shall be performed in accordance with an accuracy of class
> A-2 as defined in the Code of Survey Standards dated 1976 and shall be
> performed by a surveyor licensed in the State of New Jersey. All
> survey control work shall be conducted with standards set forth by the
> Federal Geodetic Control Committee for third order Class I traverse
> and triangulation and third order leveling.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

1.4.1 SD-02; Data

a\. Survey Field Notes; GA

> Two (2) copies of all survey field notes and calculations shall be
> provided to the Resident Engineer (RE).

1.4.2 SD-04 Drawings

a\. Topographic As-Built Maps; GA

> Provide copies of Topographic As-Build Maps. Provide copies of all
> survey data in tabular form.

**PART 2 PRODUCTS**

2.1 STAKES AND FLAGGING

> Tall stakes shall be 1" by 1" by 36" high oak or other material
> approved by the Resident Engineer (RE) with point for driving.
> Flagging to be tied to stakes shall be wide bright colored plastic
> flagging.

**PART 3 EXECUTION**

3.1 EXCAVATION LAYOUT

> The Contractor shall locate and mark the location of the Recharge Bed
> excavation with tall stakes and flagging of all excavations. Locations
> shall be located to an accuracy of 0.1 feet and the surface elevation
> to an accuracy of 0.01 feet.

3.2 EXCAVATION SURVEY

> As soil is being excavated from the Recharge Bed area, the survey crew
> shall check the depth of excavation and provide depth correction and
> grade stakes for the excavation equipment operators. Where computer
> controlled construction equipment is used, provided survey data as
> needed. As the excavation is completed for the construction of the
> Recharge Bed, a survey of location and depth shall be completed. The
> coordinate location and elevation of the surface at each survey
> location shall be measured to an accuracy of 0.1 and 0.01 feet,
> respectively. The Surveyor shall provide a complete topographic survey
> of the bottom of the recharge bed excavation prior to backfilling. No
> backfilling will be allowed until the RE approves the survey data.

3.3 POST-EXCAVATION SURVEY

> Following completion of all excavation activities, the Contractor
> shall survey the recharge bed area. The Contractor shall prepare a
> topographic as-built map of the Recharge Bed area with a minimum of
> one-foot contour intervals.

END OF SECTION

**SECTION 02099**

**SMALL ACCESS BRIDGE**

**PART 1 GENERAL**

1.1 DESCRIPTION

> a\. This work consists of the design, fabrication and erection of a
> simple span, wood and steel model bridge with a timber deck in
> accordance with the specifications and Project Plans.
>
> b\. The bridge shall have a span length of 20 feet and clear width of
> 7 feet. The clear width shall be defined as the total width of the
> timber deck. The bridge style shall be curb-only.

1.2 REFERENCES

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic
designation only. Unless otherwise directed, use the most recent version
of the applicable publication.

> AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
>
> ASTM A 36 (2005) Carbon Structural Steel
>
> ASTM A 307 (2007) Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile
> Strength

ASTM A588 (2005) Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy
Structural Steel

ASTM A572 (2007) Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy
Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel

1.3 MANUFACTURER

> The bridge shall be a product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in
> the manufacture of similar bridges and shall essentially duplicate
> items that have been in satisfactory use for at least 2 years prior to
> bid opening.

The recommended bridge supplier:

Moosman Enterprises

P.O. Box 803

Valentine, NE 69201

Phone: (402) 376--2544

Fax: (402) 376--1737

or an approve equal.

The acceptable Bridge configuration is the Moosman "Tioga" model or

approved equal.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

> The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01330
> \"Submittal Procedures".

1.4.1 SD‑01 Data; GA

a.  Timber; GA

b.  Structural Steel; GA

c.  Structural Fasteners; GA

> Provide data showing all materials conform to the requirements of the
> specifications.

1.4.2 SD‑01 Data; GA

a.  Loading Calculations; GA

> Provide loading calculations demonstrating conformance with the
> specifications. All calculations shall be signed and sealed by a New
> Jersey licensed PE.

1.4.3 SD‑04 Drawings; GA

Bridge Drawings; GA

> Drawings of the bridge shall include a complete list of materials,
> bridge dimensions, and installation instructions. All drawings shall
> be signed and sealed by a New Jersey licensed Professional Engineer
> (PE).

1.4.3 SD‑13 Certifications

Warranty; GA

> Provide a copy of the bridge manufacturer's standard warranty on
> materials and workmanship. The warranty shall be a minimum of 10
> years.

Qualifications of Bridge Manufacturer; GA

> Qualifications of the Bridge Manufacturer demonstrating compliance
> with Article 1.3.

**PART 2 PRODUCTS**

2.1 MATERIALS

2.1.1 Structural Steel

> a\. All structural steel shall be new (unused) material. The
> Contractor shall provide the Owner with copies of all certified mill
> test reports for all structural steel and bolts upon request.
>
> b\. All structural wide flange beams shall conform to the requirements
> of ASTM A588 or ASTM A572, Corten Structural Steel.
>
> c\. All structural plates shall conform to the requirements of ASTM
> A588 Structural Steel.

2.1.2 Timber

> a\. All timber shall be pentachlorophenol treated material.
>
> b\. All timber except deck material shall be Douglas Fir--Larch,
> "Select Structural" or better quality, graded in accordance with West
> Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB) rules.
>
> c\. Douglas Fir--Larch, "No. 1 or better" or better quality shall be
> used for the timber decking only.

2.1.3 Structural Fasteners

> a\. All bolts shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A307 or ASTM
> A36. All bolts exposed in wood structure shall be plain, uncoated
> steel.
>
> b\. All anchor bolts and nuts shall conform to the requirements of
> ASTM A307, Grade A, Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs. Each anchor bolt
> shall be provided with two nuts for jamming.

2.2 DESIGN

> The superstructure of the bridge shall consist of two Douglas Fir
> timbers. Floor beams shall be fabricated from structural steel wide
> flange sections. The structure shall conform to the clear span and
> clear width requirements as specified.

2.2.1 Design Loads

> Each bridge shall be designed for the following loads and loading
> conditions:
>
> a\. Pedestrian live load shall be as defined by the AASHTO Guide
> Specifications for load group I of the AASHTO Standard Specifications,
> Section 3. A minimum pedestrian live load of 85 psf, or a reduced
> pedestrian live load as defined in the AASHTO Guide Specifications
> shall be used for design. Distribution to the stringer and floor beams
> shall be in accordance with Section 3 of the AASHTO Standard
> Specifications. Deflection and vibration limits shall be met per the
> AASHTO Guide Specifications.
>
> b\. Vehicle live load shall be as defined by the AASHTO Guide
> Specifications, and used in load group IB of the AASHTO Standard
> Specifications, Section 3 or as noted following. The vehicle axle
> loads shall be 4,000 lbs for rear axles and 2,000 lbs for the front
> axle. The total vehicle live load shall be 10,000 lbs.
>
> c\. Minimum thickness of a structural steel shall be ¼ of an inch for
> tubular steel and 3/8 of an inch for steel plate material.
>
> d\. Timber decking shall have a minimum nominal thickness of 3 inches.
> Decking shall be securely fastened to each floor beam and at each end
> to prevent warping. Decking shall be fastened from the bottom up.
>
> e\. Final design and construction of the bridge support (abutment,
> pier, or footing) will be the responsibility of the Contractor and
> shall be based on bridge support reactions and anchor bolt location
> and placement which shall be furnished by the bridge manufacturer.

**PART 3 EXECUTION**

3.1 DELIVERY AND ERECTION

> a\. Bridge materials shall be delivered to the site using normal
> over--the--road tractor/trailer equipment. The Contractor shall unload
> the bridge sections/materials and store them in accordance with the
> manufacturers' instructions. The Contractor shall supply all lifting
> equipment needed to unload the bridge sections/materials.
>
> b\. The bridge manufacturer or its representative will instruct the
> Contractor or his representatives in the proper lifting procedure for
> the unloading of the bridge. Care shall be taken to prevent damage to
> the finish of the bridge.

b.  The unloading, splicing (if required), and placement of the bridge
    shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. The procedure for
    bolting field splices shall be given to the Contractor by the bridge
    manufacturer.

c.  No wetlands shall be disturbed during the construction and placement
    of the bridge.

END OF SECTION

**SECTION 02110**

**CLEARING AND GRUBBING**

**PART 1 GENERAL**

1.1 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS

> The publications listed form a part of this specification to the
> extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the
> basic designation only.
>
> AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS
> (AASHTO)
>
> M182‑60(1974) Burlap Cloth Made From Jute or Kenaf

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

> The work described herein and as shown on the Contract Drawings shall
> consist of furnishing all labor, material and equipment and performing
> all operations required for performing clearing and grubbing during
> construction as specified herein and as shown on the Contract
> Drawings. The work shall conform to the Soil Erosion and Sediment
> Control Plan and Permit as approved by the Pinelands Commission and
> Soil Conservation District. Site soil erosion and sediment controls
> must be in place and pest control must also be conducted before
> proceeding with any site construction activity (i.e., clearing and
> grubbing).

1.3 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

> Deliver materials to and store at the SITE in a manner which will
> maintain the materials in their original manufactured or fabricated
> condition until ready for use.

1.4 PROTECTION

1.4.1 Roads

> Keep roads free of dirt and debris at all times.

1.4.2 Trees, Shrubs, and Existing Facilities

> Provide barricades for trees, shrubs, and existing facilities
> designated to remain in areas to be cleared and grubbed. In addition
> to fencing, protect shrubs from wind damage with burlap enclosures as
> indicated. Currently, no trees or shrubs will be preserved in the area
> to be cleared and grubbed.

1.4.3 Barricades

> Erect barricades for items in paragraph "Trees, Shrubs, and Existing
> Facilities," above, before commencing clearing and grubbing
> operations. Barricades shall be of a 4- to 6‑foot high wire or wood
> fencing supported by posts on 10‑ to 12‑foot centers. Erect barricades
> at or outside the tree and shrub drip line. Place barricades for
> existing facilities as directed by the Resident Engineer (RE). No
> traffic or storage shall be permitted within the barricaded areas.
> Upon completion of all work all barricades shall become the property
> of the Contractor and shall be removed from the SITE.

1.4.4 Utility Lines

> Protect from damage all existing utility lines that are indicated to
> remain. Notify the RE immediately of any damage to or encounter with
> an unknown existing utility line. The Contractor shall be responsible
> for the repair of any damage to existing utility lines that are
> indicated or made known to the Contractor prior to start of clearing
> and grubbing operations.

1.4.5 Blasting

> The use of explosives will not be permitted.

1.4.6 Personal Protective Equipment

> All work within the contaminant zone shall require that personal
> protective equipment be worn to protect the health and safety of
> workers. The personal protective equipment shall be in accordance with
> the Contractor's approved health and safety plan.

**PART 2 PRODUCTS**

2.1 MATERIALS

2.1.1 Burlap

> AASHTO M182

2.1.2 Tree Wound Paint

> Tree wound paint shall be bituminous based paint of standard
> manufacture specially formulated for the intended use.

**PART 3 EXECUTION**

3.1 CLEARING

> Clearing shall consist of the felling, trimming, and cutting of trees
> into sections and the satisfactory disposal of the trees and other
> vegetation designated for removal, including downed timber, snags,
> brush, and rubbish occurring within the areas to be cleared. Cut off
> flush with the original ground surface trees, stumps, roots, brush,
> and other vegetation in areas to be cleared, except for trees and
> vegetation indicated or directed to be left standing. Trim trees
> designated to be left standing within the cleared areas of dead
> branches 1‑1/2 inches or more in diameter; and trim all branches to
> heights and in a manner as indicated. Neatly cut limbs and branches to
> be trimmed close to the bole of the tree or main branches. Paint cuts
> more than 1‑1/4 inches in diameter with an approved tree‑wound paint.

3.2 GRUBBING

> Grubbing shall consist of the removal and disposal of roots larger
> than 3 inches in diameter, matted roots, and stumps from the indicated
> grubbing areas. Excavate this material together with logs, organic and
> metallic debris, brush and refuse. Excavate materials completely in
> areas where construction of the recharge bed is to occur. Where
> required, fill depressions made by grubbing with backfill material and
> compact in accordance with the requirements specified to make the new
> surface conform with the existing adjacent surface of the ground.

3.3 PEST CONTROL

> Remove and eradicate all pests from the work area during the clearing
> and grubbing project and during the course of the project. This shall
> include the removal of wasp and bees nests in the work area and
> equipment to be scrapped or staged.

3.4 DISPOSAL OF CLEARED AND GRUBBED MATERIALS

> All trees, shrubs, stumps and roots removed during clearing and
> grubbing shall be thoroughly dried and cleaned of all soil prior to
> chipping and grinding. All cleared and grubbed materials shall be
> chipped and disposed of off-site.
>
> Timber may be disposed of off-site prior to chipping if approved by
> the RE. Burning will not be permitted.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 02112

**EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL**

**PART 1 GENERAL**

1.1 REFERENCES

> The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
> extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by
> the basic designation only.

AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)

ASTM D 4439 (2000) Geosynthetics

ASTM D 4491 (1999a) Water Permeability of Geotextiles by Permittivity

ASTM D 4533 (1991; R 1996) Trapezoid Tearing Strength of Geotextiles

ASTM D 4632 (1991; R 1997) Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of
Geotextiles

ASTM D 4751 (1999a) Determining Apparent Opening Size of Geotextile

> STATE OF NEW JERSEY, DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION STORMWATER
> MANAGEMENT REGULATIONS
>
> NJDEP New Jersey Soil Erosion and Sediment Control Manual, revised
> July
>
> 1999\.

NEW JERSEY DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION (NJDOT)

> NJDOT‑SS 1989 New Jersey Department of Transportation Standard
>
> Specification for Road and Bridge Construction

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

> The work described herein and as shown on the Contract Drawings shall
> consist of furnishing all labor, material and equipment and performing
> all operations required for furnishing and installing the erosion and
> sediment controls during construction as specified herein and as shown
> on the Contract Drawings, and maintaining the erosion and sediment
> controls through the construction period until the SITE has been
> stabilized, as determined by the Resident Engineer (RE).
>
> The work shall conform to the Soil Erosion and Sediment Control Plan
> and Permit as approved by the Pinelands Commission and Cape-Atlantic
> Soil Conservation District. Site soil erosion and sediment controls
> must be in place before proceeding with any site construction activity
> (i.e., clearing and grubbing).

1.3 SUBMITTALS

> Submit to the RE the following:

1.3.1 SD-08, Statements

> a\. Soil Erosion and Sediment Control Plan; GA
>
> Describe materials and methods to be used. Provide plans, sketches,
> details and sequence.

**PART 2 PRODUCTS**

2.1 STRUCTURAL PRACTICES

2.1.1 Silt Fence Fabric

> The geotextile shall comply with the requirements of ASTM D 4439, and
> shall consist of polymeric filaments which are formed into a stable
> network such that filaments retain their relative positions. The
> filament shall consist of a long-chain synthetic polymer composed of
> at least 85 percent by weight of ester, propylene, or amide, and shall
> contain stabilizers and/or inhibitors added to the base plastic to
> make the filaments resistance to deterioration due to ultraviolet and
> heat exposure. Synthetic filter fabric shall contain ultraviolet ray
> inhibitors and stabilizers to provide a minimum of six months of
> expected usable construction life at a temperature range of --18 to 49
> degrees C (0 to 120 degrees F). The filter fabric shall meet the
> following requirements:
>
> FILTER FABRIC FOR SILT SCREEN FENCE

# Physical Property Test Procedure Strength Requirement

> Grab Tensile ASTM D 4632 100 lbs. min.
>
> Elongation (%) 30% max.
>
> Trapezoid Tear ASTM D 4533 55 lbs. min.
>
> Permittivity ASTM D 4491 0.2 sec-1
>
> AOS (U.S. Std Sieve) ASTM D 4751 20-100

2.1.2 Run-On/Barrier Fabric

> Fabric used to wrap the soil pile in run-on barrier construction shall
> be non-rotting, ultraviolet light resistant, non-woven polyester
> geotextile with sufficient strength for the purpose intended.

2.1.3 Strawbales

> Bales used in sedimentation control system shall be made of straw with
> forty pounds minimum weight and one hundred and twenty pounds maximum.

2.1.4 Wood Stakes

> Wood stakes used in sedimentation control system shall be a minimum
> 2-inch by 2-inch nominal size by a minimum 3 feet long.

2.1.5 Run-on Barrier Soil

> Run-on Barrier soil shall be Backfill Material as specified in Section
> 02225, "Excavation, Backfilling, and Compacting".

2.1.6 Silt Fence Wire Mesh (if used)

> The wire mesh used shall be steel wire mesh of significant strength to
> support the filter fabric loaded with sediment to 1/3 of its overall
> height. Minimum 20 gauge with 1-inch square openings wire shall be
> used.

2.1.7 Stone

> Stone used for the stabilized construction entrance shall be 1-inch to
> 2-inch crushed stone conforming to the requirement of Size #3 in Table
> 901-1 of the NJDOT-55.

2.1.8 Sand Bags

> Sand bag fabric shall be woven polypropylene, polyethylene or
> polyamide with a minimum unit weight of four ounces per square yard.
> The fabric shall have a mullen burst strength of at least 300 psi,
> conforming to the requirements in ASTM D 3786, and an ultraviolet (UV)
> stability exceeding 70 percent. Sand bags shall have a length of 24 to
> 32 inches, width of 16 to 18 inches, thickness of 6 to 8 inches, and
> mass of 88 to 121 pounds.

Sand bag fill material shall be non-cohesive, coarse sand or gravel,
free from deleterious material.

2.1.9 Dewatering Filtration Bag

Dewatering filtration bags shall be manufactured of durable nonwoven
needle punched poly propylene geotextile, Geo-Synthetics Inc Dirtbag® or
approved equal. Hose opening shall be 4". Flow through filtration bag
shall have minimal impact on pump efficiencies.

**PART 3 EXECUTION**

3.1 CONSTRUCTION METHODS

Construction of erosion and sediment control practices shall be
sequenced to coordinate with the construction schedule. Perimeter
erosion and sediment controls shall be in place and be completely
functional prior to start of any land disturbing activities. Perimeter
controls, topsoil stockpiles and other disturbed areas on the SITE shall
be stabilized within 14 calendar days following soil disturbance. All
erosion and sediment controls shall be constructed and installed in
accordance with the Contract Drawings and Soil Erosion and Sediment
Control Plan approved by the Cape-Atlantic Soil Conservation District.

> Install controls where shown on plans and as necessary to protect
> areas disturbed by the Contractor which may not be shown on the plans.

3.1.1 Silt Fence

> Furnish and install silt fence as detailed and at the locations as
> shown on the Contract Drawings. The silt fence shall remain in place
> during the duration of the project and shall not be removed without
> the approval of the RE.

3.1.2 Run-On Barrier

Run-on barriers shall be constructed as detailed and at the locations
shown on the Contract Drawings. Filter fabric shall be placed on the
natural ground surface and backfill material placed to form the berm
shown on the Contract Drawings. Filter fabric shall completely encircle
the soil berm and the two ends of fabric shall be buried in a 4 inches
deep continuous trench on the upstream side. The run-on barrier shall
remain in place during the duration of the project and shall be removed
with the approval of the RE.

3.2 MAINTENANCE

> The erosion and sediment control measures shall remain in place for
> the duration of the construction period, unless otherwise noted on the
> contract drawings. The Contractor shall inspect all erosion and
> sediment control measures after each rainfall event and replace or
> repair as necessary for measures to remain functional and as directed
> by the RE.

END OF SECTION

**SECTION 02225**

**EXCAVATION, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING**

**PART 1 GENERAL**

1.1 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS

> The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
> extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the
> basic designation only.

AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)

> ASTM C 136 Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates
>
> ASTM C 913 Precast Concrete Water and Wastewater Structures
>
> ASTM D 422 Particle‑Size Analysis of Soils
>
> ASTM D 698 Moisture‑Density Relations of Soils and Soil‑Aggregate
> Mixtures, Using 5.5 lb (2.49‑kg) Rammer and 12‑in. (304.8‑mm) Drop
>
> ASTM D 1140 Amount of Material in Soils Finer than the No. 200
> (75‑micrometer) Sieve
>
> ASTM D 1556 Density of Soil in Place by the Sand Cone‑Method
>
> ASTM D 1557 Moisture‑Density Relations of Soils and Soil‑Aggregate
> Mixtures Using 10‑lb (4.54‑kg) Rammer and 18‑in. (457‑mm) Drop
>
> ASTM D 2434 Permeability of Granular Soil (Constant Head)
>
> ASTM D 2487 Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes
>
> ASTM D 2922 Density of Soil and Soil‑Aggregate in Place by Nuclear
> Methods (Shallow Depth)
>
> ASTM D 3017 Moisture Content of Soil and Soil‑Aggregate in Place by
> Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)
>
> ASTM D 4318 Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils

ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (COE)

> EM‑385‑1‑1 Safety and Health Requirements Manual

STATE OF NEW JERSEY, DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION (DOT)

STANDARD SPECIFICATION

> NJDOT Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction

STATE OF NEW JERSEY, DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION, DIVISION OF
WATER RESOURCES

> NJDEP Underground Storage Tank Regulations - NJAC 7:14B
>
> NJDEP Guidance Document for the Remediation of Contaminated Soils
>
> NJDEP Technical Requirements for Site Remediation NJAC 7:26E

1.2 DESCRIPTION

> This section includes requirements for excavating, preparation of soil
> surface, bedding, backfilling and compaction for all work, including
> but not limited to the Recharge Bed, structures, and trenching.

1.2.1 Requirements

> Referenced Standard Specifications: Materials and workmanship
> specified herein with reference to the State of New Jersey Department
> of Transportation (NJDOT) Standard State Specifications shall be in
> accordance with the referenced articles, sections, and paragraphs of
> the NJDOT Standard Specifications except that contractual and payment
> provisions do not apply.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

1.3.1 Backfill

> Material used in refilling a trench or other excavation.

1.3.2 Cohesive Materials

> Soils classified by ASTM D 2487 as GC, SC, ML, CL, MH, and CH.
> Materials classified as GM and SM will be identified as cohesive only
> when fines have a plasticity index greater than four.

1.3.3 Cohesionless Materials

> Soils classified by ASTM D 2487 as GW, GP, SW, and SP. Materials
> classified as GM and SM will be identified as cohesionless only when
> the fines have a plasticity index of less than or equal to four.

1.3.4 Compaction

> Any method of mechanically stabilizing a material by increasing its
> density at a controlled moisture condition. "Degree of Compaction" is
> expressed as a percentage of the maximum density obtained by the test
> procedure described in ASTM D 698 or ASTM D 1557 for general soil
> types or abbreviated in this specification as "95 percent ASTM D 1557
> (or ASTM D 698) maximum density."

1.3.5 Controlled Fill

> A fill consisting of a specified soil mix or gradation of materials
> constructed to attain maximum bearing strength and minimize
> consolidation or differential settlement under a load. Controlled fill
> is sometimes called "structural fill."

1.3.6 Embankment

> A "fill" having a top that is higher than adjoining ground.

1.3.7 Excavation

> The removal of soil, rock, or hard material to obtain a specified
> depth or elevation.

1.3.8 Fill

> Specified material placed at a specified degree of compaction to
> obtain an indicated grade or elevation.

1.3.9 Granular Pipe Bedding

> A dense, well‑graded aggregate mixture of sand, gravel, or crushed
> stone (mixed individually, in combination with each other, or with
> suitable binder soil) placed on a subgrade to provide a suitable
> foundation for pipe. Granular bedding material may also consist of
> poorly graded sands or gravels where fast draining soil
> characteristics are desired.

1.3.10 Hard Material

> Weathered rock, dense consolidated deposits, or conglomerate materials
> which are not included in the definition of "rock" but which usually
> require the use of heavy excavation equipment, ripper teeth, or jack
> hammers for removal.

1.3.11 In‑Situ Soil

> Existing in place soil.

1.3.12 Lift

> A layer or course of soil placed on top of unprepared subgrade or a
> previously prepared or placed soil in a fill or backfill.

1.3.13 Refill

> Material placed in excavation to correct overcut in depth.

1.3.14 Rock

> Solid homogeneous interlocking crystalline material with firmly
> cemented, laminated, or foliated masses or conglomerate deposits,
> neither of which can be removed without systematic drilling and
> blasting, drilling and the use of expansion jacks or feather wedges,
> or the use of backhoe‑mounted pneumatic hole punchers or rock
> breakers; also large boulders, buried masonry, or concrete other than
> pavement, pits and vaults exceeding one cubic yard in volume. Removal
> of "hard material" will not be considered rock excavation because of
> intermittent drilling and blasting that is performed merely to
> increase production.

1.3.15 Soil

> The loose surface material of the earth's crust resulting from the
> chemical and mechanical weathering of rock and organic material.

1.3.16 Subgrade

> The bottom layer of material (sometimes in‑situ soil or rock) graded
> or otherwise prepared for supporting the addition of fill material,
> pavement courses, or a building slab.

1.3.17 Suitable Backfill Material

> Backfill material that meets all of the requirements for its intended
> use as specified in this, and other, sections.

1.3.18 Unyielding Material

> Rock or soil with cobbles in the trench bottom requiring a covering of
> finer grain material or special bedding to avoid bridging in the pipe
> or conduit.

1.3.19 Unsatisfactory Material

> In‑situ Soil or other material identified as having insufficient
> strength or stability to carry intended loads on trench backfills
> without excessive consolidation or loss of stability. Also backfill
> material which contains refuse, frozen material, large rocks, debris,
> and other material which could damage the pipe or cause the backfill
> not to compact. Materials containing contaminants above regulatory
> concern are unsatisfactory. Materials classified as MH, CH, PT, OH, or
> OL by ASTM D 2487 are unsatisfactory. Additionally, unsatisfactory
> material may refer to material within the footprint that does not have
> sufficient permeability to allow the basin to perform adequately.

1.3.20 Unstable Material

> Material in the trench bottom which lacks firmness to maintain
> alignment and prevent joints from separating in the pipe, conduit, or
> appurtenant structure during backfilling. This may be material
> otherwise identified as satisfactory which has been disturbed or
> saturated.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

> Submit the following in accordance with Section 01330, "Submittal
> Procedures."

1.4.1 SD-09 Reports; GA

> Provide certified test reports stating the materials below meet the
> requirements of Articles 2.1.1 through 2.1.3 of this section of the
> specifications.
>
> a\. Pipe Bedding Material
>
> b\. Backfill Material Tests

c\. Sand

d\. Gravel and Crushed Stone

1.4.1.1 SD‑09 Soil Laboratory Analytical Test Reports; GA

> Submit copies of all analytical reports from the testing service.

1.4.2 SD-13 Certificates; GA

> a\. Manufacturers Certificates of Compliance - Warning and
> identification tape
>
> b\. Certifications of each welder's qualifications prior to on‑site
> welding.

1.4.3 SD-08 Statements and SD-04 Drawings; GA

> Provide Contractor Furnished Plans and Shop Drawings, and necessary
> permits for the following:
>
> a\. Shoring and Sheeting Plan: Describe materials of shoring system to
> be used. Components shall not remain after filling or backfilling.
> Provide plans, sketches, or details along with calculations by a
> professional engineer registered in any jurisdiction. Indicate
> sequence and method of installation and removal.
>
> b\. Hot Work Permit from the FAA Technical Center Fire Inspector.
>
> c\. Confined Space Entry Permit per applicable OSHA and FAA
> requirements.

1.4.4 SD-09 Reports; GA

Provide field test reports, as described below:

a.  Laboratory Density and Moisture Tests: Submit within 14 days of test
    date.

b.  Results of Field Density and Moisture Tests: Results shall be made
    available in the field immediately after testing. Submit results
    within 2 days of test date.

> Submit all test data not listed above sufficiently in advance of
> construction so as not to delay work.

1.4.5 SD-02 Data; GA

a.  Provide a list of all excavation equipment to be used at the site
    including the track or tire loading.

b.  Scrim/String Reinforced LDPE Liner

c.  Non-woven Filter Fabric

d.  Tri-planar Drainage Grid

1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

> Materials and workmanship specified herein with reference to DOT State
> Standard shall be in accordance with the referenced articles, sections
> and paragraphs of the standard except that contractual and payment
> provisions do not apply. Where the term "Engineer" is used, it shall
> mean the Resident Engineer (RE). Where term "state" is used, it shall
> mean "Federal Government."

1.6 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

> Deliver and store materials in a manner to prevent contamination,
> segregation, freezing, and other damage. Store synthetic fiber filter
> fabric to prevent exposure to direct sunlight.

1.7 PROTECTION

1.7.1 Utility Location

> Contact the RE 10 calendar days prior to construction to request FAA
> location of underground utilities. The Contractor shall verify the
> location of all utilities shown on the Contract Drawings or identified
> during utility mark-outs.
>
> Movement of construction machinery and equipment over pipes and
> utilities during construction shall be at the Contractor's risk.
> Perform all work adjacent to non‑government utilities as indicated in
> accordance with procedures outlined by the utility company. For work
> immediately adjacent to or for excavations exposing a utility or other
> buried obstruction, use hand or light equipment excavation. Start hand
> or light equipment excavation on each side of the indicated
> obstruction and continue until the obstruction is uncovered or until
> clearance for the new grade is assured. Support uncovered lines or
> other existing work affected by the contract excavation until approval
> for backfill is granted by the RE. Report damage to utility lines or
> subsurface construction immediately to the RE. The Contractor shall be
> responsible for the repair of all damaged utilities that were
> previously shown on Contract Drawings identified during utility
> mark-outs at no cost to the FAA.

1.7.2 Structures and Surfaces

> Protect newly backfilled areas and adjacent structures, slopes, or
> grades from traffic, erosion settlement, or any other damage. Repair
> and reestablish damaged or eroded grades and slopes and restore
> surface construction prior to acceptance. All work shall be conducted
> in accordance with the requirements specified in Section 01560,
> "Environmental Protection," and Section 02112, "Erosion and Sediment
> Control."

1.7.3 Use suitable surplus excavated material as backfill for excavated
areas as shown on the Contract Drawings.

**PART 2 PRODUCTS**

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS

> Provide soil materials as described below free of debris, roots, wood,
> scrap material, vegetable matter, refuse, soft unsound particles, ice,
> or other deleterious and objectionable materials. Unless otherwise
> noted, maximum particle size permitted is 3 inches. Use excavated
> material from the SITE for the work indicated when material falls
> within the requirements specified herein.
>
> No soft, spongy, highly plastic, or otherwise unstable material is
> permitted. Material shall be unclassified but shall contain sufficient
> fines to ensure proper compaction. Material shall be classified as GP,
> GM, GC, SP or SM, by ASTM D 2487. If more material is required than is
> available from on‑site excavation, then provide that material from
> approved sources.
>
> All soil materials brought to the site from offsite sources (including
> but not limited to sand, recharge bed materials, gravel, stone,
> borrow, and pipe bedding materials) shall be tested in accordance with
> Article 3.9 with all data being reported to the RE.

2.1.2 Sand (other than that used in the Recharge Bed)

> Clean, coarse‑grained sand, all of which passes a 3/8-inch sieve and
> not more than 10 percent passes a #200 sieve.

2.1.3 Recharge Bed Sand Layer

> Clean, washed, coarse‑grained 6 x 12 (1.7 -- 3.4 mm) rounded sand
> /gravel, not crushed.

2.1.4 Gravel and Crushed Stone

> Clean, coarsely graded natural gravel, crushed stone or a combination
> thereof meeting the following requirements:

Percent Passing by Weight

[Sieve Size]{.underline} [Nominal Size]{.underline}

[½\"]{.underline} [3/4\"]{.underline} [2\"]{.underline}

2‑1/2\" 100

2\" 90 ‑ 100

1‑1/2\" 35 ‑ 70

1\" 100 0 ‑ 15

3/4\" 100 90 ‑ 100

½\" 90 ‑ 100 20 ‑ 15 0 - 5

3/8\" 40 ‑ 70 0 ‑ 15

No. 4 0 ‑ 15 0 ‑ 5

No. 8 0 ‑ 5 ‑

2.1.5 Borrow

> Borrow material shall meet requirements for the backfill for which it
> is intended to be used. Obtain borrow materials in excess of those
> furnished from excavations described herein from tested sources within
> FAA property, if available. If untested sources are proposed, the
> Contractor shall be responsible for all testing requirements.

2.1.6 Pipe Bedding

> Provide material for specific types of pipe bedding as described in
> the following Table 2.1.6-1 for pipe material listed.

Table 2.1.6-1

[Pipe Material]{.underline} [Spec. Article]{.underline} [Bedding
material]{.underline}

a\. PVC 2.1.2 or 2.1.4 Sand or ½\" Gravel

b\. Copper or Steel 2.1.2 or 2.1.4 Sand or ½\" Gravel

c\. Electrical Conduit 2.1.2 Sand

d\. Polyethylene 2.1.2 Sand

> e\. RCP 2.1.2 Sand

2.2 BURIED WARNING AND IDENTIFICATION TAPE

> Polyethylene plastic and metallic core or metallic‑faced, acid‑ and
> alkali‑resistant, polyethylene plastic warning tape manufactured
> specifically for warning and identification of buried utility lines.
> Provide tape on rolls, 3‑inch‑minimum width, color coded as stated
> below for the intended utility with warning and identification
> imprinted in bold black letters continuously over the entire tape
> length. Warning and identification to read, "CAUTION, BURIED (intended
> service) LINE BELOW" or similar wording. Color and printing is to be
> permanent, unaffected by moisture or soil.
>
> [Warning Tape Color Codes]{.underline}
>
> Red: Electric
>
> Orange: Telephone and Other Communications
>
> Blue: Water Systems

2.2.1 Warning Tape for Metallic Piping: Acid and alkali‑resistant
polyethylene plastic tape conforming to the width, color, and printing
requirements indicated above. Minimum thickness of the tape shall be
0.003 inch. Tape shall have a minimum strength of 1500 psi lengthwise
and 1250 psi crosswise with a maximum 350 percent elongation.

2.2.2 Detectable Warning Tape for Non‑Metallic Piping: Polyethylene
plastic tape conforming to the width, color, and printing requirements
indicated above. Minimum thickness of the tape shall be 0.004 inch. Tape
shall have a minimum strength of 1500 psi lengthwise and 1250 psi
crosswise. The tape shall be manufactured with integral wires, foil
backing, or other means of enabling detection by a metal detector when
the tape is buried up to 3 feet deep. Encase the metallic element of the
tape in a protective jacket or provide with other means of corrosion
protection.

2.3 RECHARGE BED MATERIALS (OTHER THAN BED SAND)

2.3.1 Scrim/String Reinforced LDPE Liner

> The Scrim/String Reinforced LDPE Liner to be place above the Recharge
> Bed is a 6 mil (.006" thick) LDPE material with a cross-patterned
> polyester tie cord between layers to provide strength and tear
> resistance. Liner shall meet ASTM D751-95. Liner shall be as
> distributed by McMaster-Carr Part No. 85505K16 or approved equal.

2.3.2 Non-woven Filter Fabric

> Nonwoven needle punched geotextile made of 100% polypropylene staple
> filaments. The density shall be 7.0 oz/sy. The product shall conform
> to the following test methods and values.

[Property]{.underline} [Test Method]{.underline} [Value]{.underline}

Tensile Strength ASTM D 4632 180 lbs

Elongation Break ASTM D 4632 50 %

Mullen Burst ASTM D 3786 350 psi

U.V. Resistance ASTM 4335 70 %

Trapezoidal Tear ASTM D 4533 75 lbs

Puncture Strength ASTM D 4833 105 lbs

AOS ASTM D 4751 70 U.S. Std Sieve

Permittivity ASTM D 4491 1.5 Sec^-1^

Flow Rate ASTM D 4491 100 gal/min/sf

2.3.3 Tri-planar Drainage Grid

> The drainage geocomposite shall be comprised of a tri-axial geonet
> structure consisting of thick supporting ribs with diagonally placed
> top and bottom ribs with thermally bonded nonwoven geotextiles on both
> sides. The product shall conform to the following test methods and
> values.

[Property]{.underline} [Test Method]{.underline} [Value]{.underline}

Density ASTM D 1505 0.94 g/cm^3^

Melt Flow Index ASTM D 1238 1.0 g/10 min

Tensile Strength - MD ASTM D 4595 1,200 lb/ft

Thickness ASTM D 5199 300 mil

Carbon Black ASTM 4218 2 -- 3 %

U.V. Resistance ASTM G 154 or D 4335 70 %

Grab Tensile ASTM D 4632 157 lbs

Tear Strength ASTM D 4533 56 lbs

Puncture Resistance ASTM D 4833 56 lbs

AOS ASTM D 4751 70 U.S. Std Sieve

Permittivity ASTM D 4491 (falling head) 0.5 Sec^-1^

Peel Adhesion ASTM D7005 1.0 lb/in

> The tri-planar drainage grid shall be Tenax Corporation's Tendrain
> 770-2 or approved equal.

**PART 3 EXECUTION**

3.1 SITE PREPARATION

> Refer to Section 01010, "Summary of Work" and procedural notes on the
> Contract Drawings for a description of the sequencing and site
> preparation activities.

3.1.1 Sedimentation, Erosion and Run-on Controls

> Install in accordance with Section 02112, "Erosion and Sediment
> Control" and the Contract Drawings.

3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION

3.2.1 Clearing and Grubbing

> Perform as specified in Section 02110, "Clearing and Grubbing."

3.2.2 Stockpiling Topsoil

> Strip suitable soil from the SITE where excavation or grading is
> indicated and stockpile separately from other excavated material.
> Material unsuitable for use as topsoil shall be stockpiled and used
> for backfilling. Locate topsoil so that the material can be used
> readily for the finished grading. Where sufficient existing topsoil
> conforming to the material requirements is not available on site,
> provide borrow materials suitable for use as topsoil. Protect topsoil
> and keep in segregated piles until needed.

3.  GENERAL EXCAVATION

3.3.1 Excavation of Material from the Recharge Bed Area

> Keep excavations free from water while construction is in progress.
> Construct sediment berms at the bottoms of the basin as shown on the
> Project Drawings. Notify the RE immediately in writing if it becomes
> necessary to remove hard, unstable, or otherwise unsatisfactory
> material or excavate to a depth greater than indicated. Slope trench
> sides as necessary to meet OSHA requirements (where depth and
> stability of soils prohibits vertical side walls). When excavating
> and/or transporting material from the Recharge Bed area, minimize the
> amount of compaction of the remaining soils to the maximum extent
> practicable. This is especially true when traveling across the soils
> near the elevation of the bottom of the Recharge Bed (see Project
> Drawings for restrictions on construction vehicle compaction). After
> the excavation reaches the elevation of the bottom of the Recharge Bed
> (uncovers the underlying higher permeability materials), and prior to
> beginning installation of Recharge Bed sand materials, the underlying
> materials shall be scarified to a depth of at least two feet using a
> dozer/grader mounted ripper, farm equipment, or other suitable means.
>
> Material that is removed from the bed footprint and will be utilized
> for backfilling the Recharge Bed excavation. Segregate the materials
> of mixed permeability from the low permeability materials to the
> extent practical. Stockpile the differing permeablity materials
> separately.
>
> If suspected contaminated soil (stained, odorous, or other) is
> encountered at the site, immediately stop all site activities and
> contact the RE.

3.3.2 Excavation for Pipe Installation

> When piping is being installed in a trench, sides of trenches shall
> not be sloped from the bottom of the trench up to the elevation of the
> top of the pipe. Keep the remainder of the trench walls as nearly
> vertical as possible. Excavate ledge rock, boulders, and other
> unyielding material to an over depth at least 6 inches below the
> bottom of the pipe and appurtenances unless otherwise indicated or
> specified. Blasting will not be permitted. Over excavate soft, weak,
> or wet excavations as indicated. Use gravel or sand placed in
> 6‑inch‑maximum layers to refill over depths to the proper grade. At
> the option of the Contractor, the excavations may be cut to an over
> depth of not less than 4 inches and refilled to required grade as
> specified. Grade bottom of trenches accurately to provide uniform
> bearing and support for each section of pipe conduit and structure on
> undisturbed soil, or bedding material as indicated or specified at
> every point along its entire length except for portions where it is
> necessary to excavate for bell holes and for making proper joints. Dig
> bell holes and depressions for joints after trench has been graded.
> Dimension of bell holes shall be as required for properly making the
> particular type of joint to ensure that the bell does not bear on the
> bottom of the excavation. Trench dimensions shall be as indicated on
> the Contract Drawings.

3.3.3 Shoring and Sheeting

> Sheeting, shoring and bracing are not shown on the Drawings. Provide
> shoring, bracing and sheeting where required. In addition to Section
> 25 of COE EM‑385‑1, and other requirements of this Contract meet the
> following requirements:
>
> a\. Prevent undermining of pavements, foundations and slabs.
>
> b\. Slope banks where space permits.
>
> c\. Remove all shoring and sheeting materials when work has been
> completed.

3.3.4 Dewatering

> Dewatering may be required. Any dewatering water encountered north of
> the proposed new small access bridge location shall be temporarily
> containerized and transported to the water treatment plant for
> treatment. Any dewatering water encountered south of the proposed new
> small access bridge location may be discharged to the ground surface
> through a discharge structure as shown on the Project Plans. The water
> shall be discharged outside of any wetlands.
>
> If minor amounts of water are observed during trenching for piping,
> ½-inch gravel may be used to fill the trench to the level of the
> water. In no case shall gravel be installed when water is present in
> the trench at the required piping depth.
>
> Remove and dispose of surface runoff water which may accumulate in
> open excavations, unfinished fills, or stump holes prior to soil
> removal and backfilling operations, as described above.

3.3.5 Protection and Restoration of Surfaces

> Protect newly graded areas from traffic, erosion, and settlements.
> Repair and reestablish damaged or eroded slopes, elevations or grades
> and restore surface construction prior to acceptance. Protect existing
> streams, ditches and storm drain inlets from water‑borne soil by means
> of filter fabric fences. Conduct work in accordance with requirements
> specified in Section 01560, "Environmental Protection."

3.3.6 Disposal of Excavated Material

> It is anticipated that all materials excavated from the Recharge Bed
> area will be reused for backfilling. Removal of excess excavated
> material shall be approved by the RE.
>
> Any excess excavated material to be removed from the site shall be
> stockpiled in an area at the FAA Facility designated by the RE.
> Stockpile excavated material in such a manner that it will not
> obstruct the flow of runoff, streams, endanger a partly finished
> structure, impair the efficiency or appearance of facilities, or be
> detrimental to site work or operations.

3.3.7 Excavations for Structures

> Excavate to depth indicated on the Contract Drawings. If excavation is
> deeper than indicated, then fill with compacted granular subbase
> material prior to placement of structures.

3.4 GENERAL BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION

> Remove all wood, metal paper, organic debris, or other deleterious and
> objectionable materials prior to backfill placement. Prior to
> placement of fill materials, ensure that areas to be filled are free
> from standing water, frost, frozen materials, trash, and debris.
>
> Backfilling and compaction shall be segregated into three distinct
> operations: backfilling the sand for the Recharge Bed, backfilling the
> excavation area above the Recharge Bed, and backfilling and compacting
> the conveyance piping and conduit trenches.

1.  Backfilling and Compacting the Sand for the Recharge Bed

> Place the one-foot of coarse/gravel sand in the Recharge Bed location
> as shown on the Contract Drawings. Spread the sand bed material using
> construction equipment that minimizes the compaction of the materials
> (see Project Plans). .

2.  Backfilling the Excavation Above the Recharge Bed

> Material that has been removed from the Recharge Bed footprint shall
> be utilized to backfill the excavation. The previously segregated
> material shall be placed as shown on the Contract Drawings.
>
> The materials of mixed permeability shall be placed at the bottom of
> the excavation (above the bed) and be used as the backfilling proceeds
> toward the proposed surface grade. The material shall be placed in
> lifts with a maximum depth of two feet. While no specific compaction
> values are required, the material shall be compacted by passing
> construction equipment, used to spread the backfill, across the
> surface of the backfill to mitigate the formation of voids. Use only
> low ground pressure (5 psi) equipment within the first three feet of
> the top of the recharge bed. At least two passes shall be required.
>
> The lower permeability materials shall be used to form a cap-like
> layer near the surface of the previously excavated area. The lower
> permeability material shall be spread such that the entire cap-like
> layer is approximately the same thickness across the entire previously
> excavated area. As with the materials of varying permeability, no
> specific compaction values are required. The lower permeability
> materials shall, however, also be compacted by passing construction
> equipment, used to spread the backfill, across the surface of the
> backfill. At least two passes shall be required.
>
> The surface of the previously excavated area shall be re-graded per
> the Contract Drawings.

3.  Backfilling and Compacting Utility Trenches

> Excavate utility trenches in accordance with Article 3.3.2. Backfill
> using material described in Articles 1.3.9 and 2.1.6 and previously
> excavated native trench material meeting the backfill requirements.
> Place bedding and backfill material as shown on the Contract Drawings.
> Compact backfill material in accordance with Article 3.5.2.

3.4.4 Filling and Backfilling Beside Structures

> Place backfill adjacent to structures and compact to prevent wedging
> action or eccentric loading upon or against the structures. Step or
> serrate slopes bounding or within areas to be backfilled to prevent
> sliding of the fill. Do not use equipment for backfilling operations
> or for the formation of embankments against structures that will
> overload the structure. Construct backfill for storm drains, manholes,
> utility lines, and other utility appurtenances using the material and
> compaction requirements specified herein for the adjacent or overlying
> work. Backfilling against concrete shall be done only after approval
> has been obtained from the RE.

3.4.5 Final Backfill for Utilities

> Construct backfill (final backfill) for manholes, utility lines, and
> other utility appurtenances using the material and compaction
> requirements specified herein for the adjacent or overlying work.
> Backfilling against concrete shall be done only after the concrete has
> attained its 28‑day compressive strength or that it is demonstrated
> that sufficient strength has been obtained to fully protect the
> utility.

3.4.6 Weather Limitations

> Fill and backfill shall not be constructed when weather conditions
> detrimentally affect the quality of the finished course. Place fill
> and backfill only if the atmospheric temperature is above freezing in
> the shade and is rising. Do not construct fill and backfill in the
> rain or on saturated subgrades. If weather conditions are windy, hot
> or arid, with high rate of evaporation, schedule the placement in
> cooler portions of the day and furnish equipment to add moisture to
> the fill or backfill during and after placement.

3.5 GENERAL COMPACTION

> Use hand‑operated, plate‑type, vibratory, or other suitable hand
> tampers in areas not accessible to larger rollers or compactors. Avoid
> damaging pipes and protective pipe coatings. Compact material in
> accordance with the following Table 3.5-1 unless otherwise specified.
> If necessary, alter, change, or modify selected equipment or
> compaction methods to meet specified compaction requirements.

Table 3.5-1

[Percent ASTM D-1557 Maximum Density]{.underline}

Fill, Embankment, Backfill Cohesive Cohesionless

and Crushed Stone Material Material

Under footings, building slabs, 95 95

steps, septic tank and secondary

pavements

Under grassed areas 85 85

Adjacent to structures 90 95

Refill undercut materials N/A 100

3.5.1 Compaction of Material for Subcuts or Overexcavations

> In soft, weak, or wet soils, tamp material to consolidate to density
> of adjacent material in trench wall. In stable soils, compact to 90
> percent of ASTM D 1557 maximum density.

3.5.2 Compaction of Pipe and Conduit Bedding

> Compact to 90 percent of ASTM D 1557 maximum density except where
> higher values are specified adjacent to, or under, structures or for
> refilling undercuts.

3.5.3 Compaction of Backfill

> Compact initial backfill overlying pipes, cables, conduits, or ducts,
> to 85 percent of ASTM D 1557 maximum density except where bedding and
> backfill are the same material. Where bedding and backfill are the
> same material, compact initial backfill to the density of the bedding.
> For utilities under driveways, building slabs or other areas to be
> paved compact succeeding layers of final backfill as specified under
> paragraph entitled "Special Earthwork Installation Requirements."

3.6 SPECIAL EARTHWORK INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

3.6.1 Roads, Streets, and Gravel Surfaces

> Place final backfill in 6‑inch‑maximum loose lifts. If a vibratory
> roller is used for compaction of final backfill, the lift thickness
> can be increased to 9 inches. Compact all backfill and bedding
> surrounding pipes, ducts, conduits, and other structures to 90 percent
> of ASTM D 1557 maximum density except compact the top 12 inches of
> subgrade to 95 percent of ASTM D 1557 maximum density. Backfill to
> permit the rolling and compacting of the completed excavation with the
> adjoining material, providing the specified density necessary to
> enable paving of the area immediately after backfilling has been
> completed.

3.6.2 Manholes and Other Appurtenances

> Provide at least 12 inches clear from outer surfaces to the embankment
> or shoring. Remove rock as specified herein. Remove unstable soil that
> is incapable of supporting the structure to an over depth of two feet
> and refill with ¾-inch gravel or sand to the proper elevation. Refill
> over depths with gravel and sand to the required grade and as shown in
> Table 3.5-1 herein.

3.7 FINISH OPERATIONS

3.7.1 Grading

> All areas covered by the project, including excavated and filled
> sections and adjacent transition areas, shall be uniformly
> smooth‑graded. The finished surface shall be reasonably smooth,
> compacted, and free from irregular surface changes. The degree of
> finish shall be that ordinarily obtainable from blade‑grader
> operations, except as otherwise specified. The surface of areas to be
> turfed shall be finished to a smoothness suitable for the application
> of turfing materials.
>
> Finish to grades indicated within one‑tenth of a foot. Provide topsoil
> in areas to be seeded as indicated and in accordance with requirements
> specified in Section 02935, "Turf". Grade areas to drain water away
> from structures and to provide suitable surfaces for mowing machines.
> Grade existing grades that are to remain but have been disturbed by
> the Contractor's operations.

3.7.2 Finishing Subgrades Under Structures and Pavements

> Finish the surface of the top lift of the fill or top of the subgrade
> to the elevation and cross section indicated. The finished surface
> shall be smooth and of uniform texture. Lightly scarify or blade the
> finished surface to bring the finished surface to within
> [0.2]{.underline} foot of the indicated grade and to eliminate
> imprints made by compaction and shaping equipment.

3.7.4 Protection of Surfaces

Protect newly graded areas from traffic, erosion, and settlements that
may occur and as required in Section 01560, "Environmental Protection,"
and Section 02112, "Erosion and Sediment Control." Repair or reestablish
damaged grades, elevations, or slopes.

3.8 FIELD SAMPLING AND TESTING

3.8.1 Pipe Bedding and Backfill

> Test sand, gravel, bedding material and backfill for conformance to
> specified requirements. Test sand and gravel gradation in accordance
> with ASTM C136. Test bedding and backfill for moisture‑density
> relations in accordance with ASTM D 1557 as specified herein. Perform
> at least one of each of the required tests for each material used
> sufficiently in advance of construction so as not to delay work.
> Provide additional tests as specified above for each change of source.
>
> Perform density and moisture tests in randomly selected locations and
> in accordance with ASTM D 2992 and ASTM D 3017 as follows:
>
> a\. Bedding and Backfill in Trenches: One test per 100 linear feet in
> each lift.

c.  Appurtenant Structures: One test per 400 square feet or fraction
    thereof in each lift.

    9.  OFF SITE SOURCE MATERIAL TESTING

> Material brought to the site from offsite sources shall be tested in
> accordance with the following laboratory analytical methods:
> Gradation - ASTM D 422, Priority Pollutant Semivolatile Organic
> Compounds (SVOCs) - EPA Method 8270, Priority Pollutant Volatile
> Organic Compounds (VOCs) - EPA Method 8260, Priority Pollutant
> Metals - EPA Method 6010 (HG Method), Pesticides - EPA Method 8081,
> PCBs - EPA Method 8082, Herbicides - EPA Method 8151, and Soil pH -
> EPA Method 9045D.
>
> The services of a qualified testing laboratory shall be engaged by the
> Contractor to make tests and determine acceptability of the material
> as listed below. The laboratory shall be New Jersey certified for the
> applicable tests.
>
> Tests for Topsoil material from off-site shall be performed at a
> frequency of 1 per 3,000 cubic yards or 3 per source, whichever is
> more stringent.
>
> Material shall be acceptable if environmental test results show that
> all contaminant levels are below the lowest (most restrictive) soil
> cleanup criteria established by the NJDEP.

3.10 PERMITTING

> The Contractor is responsible for obtaining any permits necessary to
> perform the excavation work. The Contractor shall obtain the necessary
> permits/permission to remove the section of curbing along Tilton Road
> necessary to install the construction entrance as shown on the Project
> Plans.

END OF SECTION

**SECTION 02420**

**MANHOLE STRUCTURES**

**PART 1 GENERAL**

1.1 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS

> The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
> extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the
> basic designation only.
>
> FEDERAL SPECIFICATIONS (FED. SPEC.)
>
> RR‑F‑621C Frames, Covers, Gratings, Steps, Sump and Catch Basin,
> Manhole
>
> TT‑C‑490B Cleaning Methods and Pretreatment of Ferrous Surfaces for
> Organic Coatings
>
> TT‑E‑489G Enamel, Alkyd, Gloss (for Exterior and Interior Surfaces)
>
> TT‑P‑645A Primer, Paint, Zinc Chromate, Alkyd Type
>
> AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE
>
> ACI 315 1980 (Rev. 1986) Details and Detailing of Concrete
> Reinforcement

AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)

> ASTM C 478 1993 Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections

ASTM C 834 1991 Latex Sealing Compounds

ASTM C 920 1987 Elastomeric Joint Sealants

> ASTM A 615 1990 Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars for Concrete
> Reinforcement
>
> ASTM D 4101 1992 (Rev. A) Propylene Plastic Injection and Extrusion
> Materials

1.2 SUMMARY

> This section applies to manholes associated with the control vaults as
> shown on the Contract Drawings.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

1.3.1 Shop Drawings; GA

Submit shop drawings for the following:

> a\. Precast concrete structures; GA
>
> b\. Structure frames and covers; GA
>
> c\. Concrete reinforcement in accordance with ACI 315; GA

1.3.2 Manufacturer's Data; GA

> Submit manufacturer\'s standard drawings or catalog cuts of the
> following items:
>
> a\. Fittings; GA
>
> b\. Joints and couplings; GA
>
> c\. Gaskets; GA
>
> d\. Wall penetration sleeves; GA

e\. Manhole steps; GA

1.3.3 Manufacturers' Certificates of Conformance; GA

> Submit manufacturer's certificates of conformance or compliance for
> each of the following materials which are specified to conform to
> publications referenced under paragraph, "MATERIALS," in this section:
>
> a\. Precast concrete manhole sections; GA
>
> All tests required by each applicable referenced publication shall
> have been performed, whether specified in that publication to be
> mandatory or otherwise. For tests which are not specified in the
> referenced publications to be performed at definite intervals during
> manufacture, the tests shall have been performed within 3 years of the
> date of submittal of certificates on the same type, class, grade, and
> size of material as is being provided for the project.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING OF MATERIALS

1.4.1 Cement and Lime (if applicable)

> Store cement and lime immediately upon receipt at site of work. Cement
> in ripped bags at time of delivery shall be rejected. Store bagged
> cement and lime in a suitable waterproof structure which has been made
> as air‑tight as practicable, and which has floors elevated above
> ground a sufficient distance to prevent absorption of moisture. Stack
> bags close together to reduce circulation of air, but do not stack
> against outside walls; arrange storage to permit easy access for
> inspection and identification of each shipment. Transfer bulk cement
> and lime to elevated weatherproof and air‑tight bins. Use cement in
> the chronological order in which it is delivered to the job site. At
> the time of use, cement and lime shall be free‑flowing and free of
> lumps. Cement or lime that has been in storage longer than 6 months
> will be tested by standard mortar tests or other tests as deemed
> necessary to determine its suitability for use, and such cement or
> lime shall not be used without approval.

1.4.2 Precast Concrete Manholes

> Handle precast manhole sections with care to avoid chipping and
> breakage; store as directed. Protect precast concrete from contact
> with the earth and exposure to weather; keep dry until used. Use of
> precast concrete containing frost will not be permitted.

1.4.3 Metal Items (Except Concrete Reinforcement)

> Check upon arrival; identify and segregate as to types, functions, and
> sizes. Store in a manner affording easy accessibility and not causing
> excessive rusting or coating with grease or other objectionable
> materials.

1.4.4 Aggregates

> Store aggregates on areas covered with tightly laid wood planks,
> sheet‑metal, or other hard and clean material. Store aggregates of
> different sizes in separate piles. Store masonry mortar aggregates
> separately from concrete aggregates. Build stockpiles of coarse
> aggregate in horizontal layers not exceeding 4 feet in depth to
> minimize segregation. Should coarse aggregate become segregated, remix
> to conform to the applicable grading requirements.

**PART 2 PRODUCTS**

2.1 MANHOLES

> The system shall include watertight precast concrete manholes, frames
> and covers and appurtenances.

2.1.1 Manholes

2.1.1.1 Watertight Manholes

> All manhole structures, frames and covers shall be watertight. Provide
> watertight manholes at the locations indicated, constructed as
> indicated on the Drawings.

2.2 MATERIALS

2.2.1 Manholes

> Manholes to be constructed as shown on the Contract Drawings and
> consisting of precast concrete units with ASTM A615 reinforcing steel
> capable of supporting H20 traffic loading.

2.2.2 Manhole Covers

> Covers (frames and hatches) for the manhole structures shall be as
> shown on the Contract Drawings and capable of supporting H20 traffic
> loading. Covers (hatches) shall be as manufactured by Pennsylvania
> Insert Corporation or approved equal.

2.2.3 Sealant and Caulking

> Sealant and caulking shall conform to ASTM C 834 or ASTM C 920. For
> joints in vertical surfaces, provide ASTM C920, Type S or M, Grade NS,
> Class 25, Use NT. For joints in horizontal surface, provide ASTM C
> 920, Type S or M, Grade P, Class 25, Use T. Provide a sealant
> compatible with the material(s) to which it is applied. Do not use a
> sealant that has exceeded shelf life or has jelled and cannot be
> discharged in a continuous flow from the gun. Apply sealant in
> accordance with the manufacturer instructions with a gun having a
> nozzle that fits the joint width. Force sealant into joints to fill
> the joints solidly without air pockets.

2.2.4 Steps

> Install into base, riser, and top sections sidewall at 12- to 16-inch
> intervals.

2.2.3.1 Plastic

> Co-polymer polypropylene plastic in accordance with ASTM D 4101; as
> shown on the Project Plans.

2.2.3.2 Steel Bar

> As shown on the Project Plans.

**PART 3 EXECUTION**

3.1 MANHOLE CONSTRUCTION

> Seal all joints and opening with sealant with the limits of 40 and 100
> degrees F.
>
> Use precast concrete units meeting ASTM C478. Construct all manhole
> structures with precast concrete sections. For precast concrete
> construction, make joints between sections with rubber gaskets and
> watertight. Give a smooth finish to inside joints of precast concrete
> manholes. Parging will not be required for precast concrete manholes.
>
> Steel sleeves for passing pipes shall be cast into the manhole. The
> annular space between the steel pipe sleeve and passing pipe shall be
> made water tight through the use of a Link-Seal® type (or approved
> equal) mechanical seal. All mechanical seal hardware (nuts, bolts,
> etc.) shall be stainless steel. The annular space shall be 2-inches
> from the exterior of the passing pipe to the inside of the steel pipe
> sleeve, or as required by the mechanical seal manufacturer to produce
> a watertight seal.
>
> All buried exterior manhole surfaces shall be completely coated with
> two (2) layers of bitumastic waterproofing sealant.

3.2 METAL WORK

3.2.1 Workmanship and Finish

> Manhole frames, covers and gratings shall be of watertight type. Seal
> watertight all joints and openings. For surfaces contaminated with
> rust, dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants, wash with solvents
> until thoroughly clean. Immediately after cleaning, coat surfaces with
> a coat of pretreatment coating, Mil. Spec. MIL‑C‑15328, applied to a
> dry film thickness of 0.3 to 0.5 mil; or apply a crystalline phosphate
> coating, Fed. Spec. TT‑C‑490, Method I, Type II. As soon as
> practicable after the pretreatment coating has dried, prime treated
> surfaces with a coat of zinc chromate primer, Fed. Spec. TT‑P‑645,
> applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 1.0 mil. If primed surfaces
> are damaged before removal from the shop, retouch with primer.

3.3 FIELD TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, GENERAL

> The Resident Engineer (RE) will conduct field inspections and witness
> all field tests specified in this section. The Contractor shall
> perform all field tests and provide all labor, equipment, and
> incidentals required for testing. The Contractor shall be able to
> produce evidence, when required, that any item of work has been
> constructed properly in accordance with the drawings and
> specifications.

END OF SECTION

**SECTION 02713**

**SITE PIPING SYSTEMS**

**PART 1 GENERAL**

1.1 SUMMARY

1.2 REFERENCES

> The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
> extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the
> basic designation only.
>
> AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS
> (AASHTO)
>
> AASHTO M 294 Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe, 300- to 1200-mm Diameter
>
> AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
>
> ASTM A53 Specification for Threaded Seamless Galvanized Steel Pipe
>
> ASTM D1248 Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Molding and
> Extrusion Materials
>
> ASTM D2241 Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe (SDR‑PR)
>
> ASTM D 2321 Standard Practice for Underground Installation of
> Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications.
>
> ASTM D 3212 Standard Specification for Joints and Sewer Plastic Piping
> Using Elastomeric Seals
>
> ASTM D3139 Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using Flexible
> Elastomeric Seals
>
> ASTM D3350 Polyethylene Plastic Pipe and Fittings Materials
>
> ASTM F477 Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe

AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS (ASME)

> ASME B16.3 Malleble Iron Threaded Fittings

AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)

> AWWA C111 Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and
> Fittings
>
> AWWA C605 Underground Installation of PVC Pressure Pipe and Fittings
> for Water.
>
> AWWA C800 Underground Service Line Valves and Fittings
>
> MANUFACTURES STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS
> INDUSTRY (MSS)
>
> MSS SP-58 Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and
> Manufacture
>
> MSS SP-70 Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends
>
> MSS SP-80 Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves
>
> MSS SP-71 Cast Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends

THE PLASTIC PIPE INSTITUTE (PPI)

> TR-31 Underground Installation of Polyolefin Piping
>
> UNI‑BELL PLASTIC PIPE ASSOCIATION (UNI)
>
> UNI B3 Installation of Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe
> Complying with AWWA Standard C‑900.

1.3 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

> The work includes providing new piping systems and related work.
> Provide each system complete and ready for operation. Piping systems
> including piping, fittings, valves, flow meters, pressure sensors,
> materials, installation, and workmanship shall be as specified herein.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

> Submit the following in accordance with Section 01330, "Submitted
> Procedures."

1.4.1 SD-01 Data; GA

> Manufacturer\'s Data:

a.  Pipe, fittings, joints, couplings, and gaskets (separate submittal
    for each type of piping, fitting, joint, coupling, gasket, etc.)

b.  Flexible Coupling

c.  Repair Coupling

d.  Wall Penetration Seals

e.  Pipe Supports

f.  Others as required by the Resident Engineer (RE)

1.4.2 SD-13 Certificates; GA

> Manufacturer's Certificate of Conformance:
>
> a\. Pipe and fittings, including shop‑applied linings and coatings
>
> b\. Pipe joint materials
>
> c\. Flexible Coupling
>
> d\. Repair Coupling
>
> e\. Others as required by the RE
>
> Resin Certification; GA
>
> Certified copies of test reports demonstrating conformance to
> applicable pipe specifications, before pipe is installed.
> Certification on the ability of frame and cover or gratings to carry
> the imposed live load.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE, DELIVERY AND STORAGE, AND HANDLING OF MATERIALS

1.5.1 Quality Assurance

All materials supplied and the installation shall conform to the
applicable standards referenced. All materials provided shall be new.

Provide materials and equipment that are standard products of
manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products,
which are of similar material design and workmanship. Standard products
shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years
prior to bid opening. The 2 year use shall include applications of
equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size.

1.5.2 Delivery and Storage

> Inspect materials delivered to site for damage. Unload and store with
> minimum handling. Store materials in enclosures or under protective
> covering. Store rubber gaskets and plastic piping not to be installed
> immediately under cover, out of direct sunlight. Do not store
> materials directly on the ground. Keep interior of pipes and fittings
> free of dirt and debris.

1.5.3 Handling

> Handle pipe, fittings, valves and other accessories in such manner as
> to ensure delivery to the trench in sound, undamaged condition. Avoid
> injury to coatings and linings on pipe and fittings; make satisfactory
> repairs if coatings or linings are damaged. Carry pipe to the trench;
> do no drag it.

1.6 EXCAVATION, TRENCHING, AND BACKFILLING

> Provide in accordance with Section 02225, "Excavation, Backfilling,
> and Compacting" except as specified herein.

**PART 2 PRODUCTS**

2.1 MATERIALS FOR PIPING

Piping systems shall installed as shown in the project drawings.

2.1.1 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe and Fittings (if required)

> All PVC pipe and fittings shall be Schedule 40, unless otherwise
> specified, as shown on the project drawings. Pipe shall be Type I,
> Grade 1 conforming to the requirements of ASTM-D-1784 and ASTM-D-1785.
> Pipe shall be rigid, homogeneous throughout, and free from visible
> cracks, holes, foreign inclusions, and other defects. All PVC pipe and
> fittings shall be installed with socket-type joints conforming to the
> requirements of ASTM D-2466 or D-2467 (Sch. 80) using PVC solvent
> cement, conforming to ASTM D-2564, or with flanged or screwed joints
> conforming to ASTM D-2464, where necessary to connect to valves,
> equipment or existing piping. Gaskets for flanged connections shall be
> full faced elastomeric Viton, durometer A scale 55 to 80, 1/8-inch
> thick.

2.1.2 Polyethylene Pipe

> Polyethylene piping material and fittings shall be Type III C5 P34 as
> tabulated in ASTM D‑1248, and have recommended designation values of
> 3‑3‑5‑4‑3‑3‑C or better as referenced in ASTM D 3350.
>
> The polyethylene pipe shall have a minimum rating of 100 psi and
> minimum thickness equivalent to SDR-11 or as shown on the Contract
> Drawings.
>
> The pipe shall be homogeneous throughout and free from visible cracks,
> holes, foreign materials, blisters, wrinkles and dents.
>
> The pipe shall be marked with an easily legible and permanent surface
> mark specifically identifying the manufacturers by name or trademark
> and the size, schedule, and type of pipe.
>
> All polyethylene piping and fittings shall be joined by the heat
> fusion process producing homogeneous sealed, leak-tight joints in
> accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and procedures.

2.1.3 Perforated Corrugated HDPE Pipe with Integral Wall Liner (Recharge
Bed Distribution Piping)

> AASHTO M 294, Type S, for pipes 12 to 36 inches. Type S piping shall
> be produced from PE certified by the resin producer as meeting the
> requirements of ASTM D 3350, minimum cell class 324420C, except that
> the carbon black content shall not exceed 5%. Pipe walls shall have
> the following properties:
>
> Minimum Moment
>
> Nominal Minimum of Inertia of
>
> Size Wall Area Wall Section
>
> (in.) (square in/ft) (in to the 4th/in)

12 1.50 0.024

Piping shall have integrally formed smooth interior waterway.

> All perforations shall conform to AASHTO M294. The pipes shall be
> perforated with 0.375\" holes every 60° around the pipe circumference
> with a minimum inlet open area of no less than 4.14 in^2^/ft for 12\"
> diameter pipe. The perforations shall be located in the outside
> valleys of each of the corrugations.
>
> All HDPE distribution piping for this project, shall include water
> tight joints.
>
> Water tight joints shall be made using a PVC or PE coupling and rubber
> gaskets as recommended by the pipe manufacturer. Rubber gaskets shall
> conform to ASTM F 477 and shall be constructed to meet a laboratory
> pressure test of 10.8 psi per ASTM D 3212.
>
> Gaskets and jointing materials shall be as recommended by the
> particular manufacturer in regard to use of lubricants, cements,
> adhesives, and other special installation requirements. Surfaces to
> receive lubricants, cements, or adhesives shall be clean and dry.
> Gaskets and jointing materials shall be affixed to the pipe not more
> than 24 hours prior to the installation of the pipe, and shall be
> protected from the sun, blowing dust, and other deleterious agents at
> all times. Gaskets and jointing materials shall be inspected before
> installing the pipe; any loose or improperly affixed gaskets and
> jointing materials shall be removed and replaced. The pipe shall be
> aligned with the previously installed pipe, and the joint pushed home.
> If, while the joint is being made the gasket becomes visibly
> dislocated the pipe shall be removed and the joint remade.
>
> Piping shall be capable of supporting H-25 live loads with 12" minimum
> cover.
>
> All necessary watertight fittings needed to transition from the HDPE
> piping downcomers and risers shall be provided where necessary.
>
> Piping shall be ADS N-12® or approved equal. Joints shall be
> watertight and equal to ADS N-12 Pro Link WT®.

2.1.4 Insulating Joints (if required)

> Joints between pipe of dissimilar metals shall have a rubber gasket or
> other approved type of insulating joint or dielectric coupling which
> will effectively prevent metal‑to‑metal contact between adjacent
> sections of piping.

2.1.5 Polyethylene Pipe Compression Gasket Fittings

> Compression gaskets shall be manufactured and tested in accordance
> with AWWA C800. The compression gasket shall be constructed of
> corrosion resistant cast bronze for underground use and shall be
> installed with a stainless steel liner as recommended by the
> manufacturer for use with plastic pipe.

2.1.6 Accessories

> Provide flanges, connecting pieces, transition glands, transition
> sleeves, and other adapters as required.

2.2 PIPE SUPPORTS AND HANGERS

> All piping shall be supported in a substantial manner to prevent
> sagging, vibration and noise due to vibration. Structural members
> necessary or required to support, brace, or otherwise secure piping
> shall be furnished by Contractor unless specifically noted otherwise.
> The installation shall comply with MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69, and the
> latest edition of the ANSI code for Pressure Piping, B31.3 or B31.9.
> Piping near floors shall be supported with adjustable saddles.

2.3 BURIED UTILITY WARNING AND IDENTIFICATION TAPE

> Polyethylene plastic and metallic core or metallic‑faced, acid‑ and
> alkali‑resistant, polyethylene plastic warning tape manufactured
> specifically for warning and identification of buried utility lines.
> Provide tape on rolls, 3‑inch‑minimum width, color coded as stated
> below for the intended utility with warning and identification
> imprinted in bold black letters continuously over the entire tape
> length. Warning and identification to read, "CAUTION, BURIED (intended
> service) LINE BELOW" or similar wording. Color and printing is to be
> permanent, unaffected by moisture or soil.

[Warning Tape Color Codes]{.underline}

Red: Electric

Orange: Telephone and other communications

Blue: Water systems

2.4 IDENTIFICATION TAGS AND PLATES

> Provide valves with tags or plates numbered and stamped for their
> usage. Plates and tags shall be of brass or nonferrous materials and
> shall be mounted or attached to the valve.

2.5 FLEXIBLE COUPLING

> Flexible couplings shall be single spool type consisting of a tube,
> body or a carcass and a cover. The tube shall be a leak proof lining
> of natural rubber. The body shall consist of fabric and various rubber
> compounds reinforced with steel rings for strength. The cover shall be
> formed from natural rubber. A special Hypalon paint shall be applied
> to resist weathering. Flanges supplied with flexible couplings shall
> be of duck and rubber construction to resist stresses and form a tight
> seal with companion pipe flanges without need for gaskets. Flanges
> shall be full‑faced with 150 #ASME standard drilling.

2.6 REPAIR COUPLING

> Repair couplings shall be single spool complete circumferential with
> stainless steel band and gasket resistant to volatile organic
> compounds and a pressure rating not less than that of the pipe.

2.7 WALL PENETRATION SEAL

> Seal the space between sleeves and all pipe penetrations through
> concrete as shown on Contract Drawings or with a mechanical seal
> constructed for such purpose so as to effect a watertight seal and not
> exert excessive stresses to the pipe. Seal shall be Link‑Seal or
> approved equivalent.

**PART 3 EXECUTION**

3.1 INSTALLATION

> Piping shall be installed principally as shown on the drawings. Refer
> to the drawings to ensure all required valves, instruments and gages
> are provided. In addition, provide whatever piping and fittings are
> necessary, whether shown on the drawings or not, for a complete and
> working system. Provide also vent valves at all high points and drain
> valves at all low points, whether shown on the drawings or not.
> Provide flanged connectors for all process valves, instruments, and
> gages to facilitate removal (except those items with end connections
> of 2 inches or less may be threaded or provided with a threaded or
> socket union).
>
> These requirements shall apply to all piping except as specified
> otherwise.

3.1.1 General

> 3.1.1.1 No defective pipe or fittings shall be used in piping systems.
> Any piece discovered to be defective shall be removed and replaced by
> a sound and satisfactory piece.
>
> 3.1.1.2 Any fitting showing a crack and any fitting or pipe which has
> received a severe blow that may have caused an incipient fracture,
> even though no such fracture can be seen, shall be marked as rejected
> and removed at once from work.
>
> 3.1.1.3 Every pipe and fitting shall be cleaned of all debris and dirt
> before being used and shall be kept clean until accepted in completed
> work.
>
> 3.1.1.4 Pipe and fittings shall be accurately installed to required
> lines and grades. Care shall be taken to preserve a good alignment.
>
> 3.1.1.5 All joints shall be made in clean dry conditions and in strict
> accordance with manufacturer\'s recommendations.
>
> 3.1.1.6 The entire installation shall comply with the ANSI code for
> Pressure Piping, B31.3 or B31.9.
>
> 3.1.2 Pipe Laying and Jointing
>
> Inspect pipe, fittings, valves, and accessories before and after
> installation; those found defective shall be replaced with new
> materials. Remove fins and burrs from pipe and fittings. Before
> placing in position, clean pipe, fittings, valves, and accessories,
> and maintain in a clean condition. Provide facilities for lowering
> sections of pipe into trenches. Do not drop or dump pipe, fittings,
> valves, or any other piping material into trenches. Cut pipe
> accurately to measurements established at the site and work into place
> without springing or forcing. Replace pipe or fitting that does not
> allow sufficient space for proper installation of joint material with
> new pipe or fittings or proper dimensions. Blocking or wedging between
> bells and spigots will not be permitted. Lay bell‑and‑spigot pipe with
> the bell end point in the direction of laying. Grade the piping in
> straight lines; avoid the formation of any dips or low points. Support
> pipe at its proper elevation and grade; ensure firm and uniform
> support. Wood support blocking will not be permitted. Lay pipe so that
> the full length of each section of pipe and each fitting will rest
> solidly on the pipe bedding; excavate recesses to accommodate bells,
> joints, and couplings. Provide anchors and supports where necessary
> for fastening work into place. Make proper provisions for expansion
> and contraction of piping. Keep trenches free of water until joints
> have been completely assembled. At the end of each day's work, close
> open ends of pipe temporarily with wood blocks or bulkheads.

3.1.3 Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings (not including perforated
distribution piping)

> All pipes shall be marked in accordance with the latest acceptable
> standards for the "Marking of Pipe" such as specified by ASME. Mark
> number and weight and/or pipe schedule shall be conspicuously painted
> on each piece.
>
> Any pipe which has received a severe blow that may have caused an
> incipient fracture, even through no such fracture can be seen, shall
> be marked as rejected and [removed at once from the work]{.underline}.
>
> Polyethylene pipe may also be joined using the sidewall fusion method
> in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and
> procedures. Install fusion machine on main pipeline. Clean pipe (main
> and branch) with a clean cotton cloth and prepare surface for fusion
> by roughing with 60 grit or courser utility cloth. Align branch on the
> main piping and tighten clamp. Check branch for square alignment on
> main. Retract moveable clamp, roll in and center heater plate with
> adapter between base of branch and main. For all sizes, apply a
> strong, firm, continuous pressure until complete melt bead can be seen
> on main. Release pressure to light pressure. Continue heat soak cycle
> on branch and main. Watch base of branch for:

[Main]{.underline} [Heat Soak Cycle Fitting Base Bead]{.underline}

1-1/4\" 1/16\" Melt Bead

2\" 1/8\" Melt Bead

3\" and larger 1/8\"-3/16\" Melt Bead

> Retract removable clamp and cleanly remove heater plate. Bring melted
> surfaces together rapidly. DO NOT SLAM. Apply continuous progressive
> pressure until proper fusion bead is formed. Maintain pressure until
> joint has cooled.

3.1.4 Bedding Requirements

> Pipe bedding shall be as indicated on the contract drawings and comply
> with the requirements of Section 02225, "Excavation, Backfilling and
> Compacting."

3.1.5 Pipe Anchorage

> Support piping in structures in accordance with MSS SP-58, Type 1
> hangers and braces.

3.2 FIELD TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

> Perform all field tests, and provide all labor, equipment, and
> incidentals required for testing. The Contractor shall produce
> evidence, when required, that any item of work has been constructed in
> accordance with the contract requirements.

3.2.1 Testing Procedure

> The piping system shall be tested during the progress of the work over
> completed pipe sections as determined by the RE until all pipe has
> been tested. The Contractor shall first clean and flush all lines and
> remove all debris. The section of pipe being tested shall be plugged
> and adequately braced. All air shall be bled from the line and
> completely filled with water and pressurized to 100 psi, per ANSI
> B31.3. The test pressure is then maintained for one hour during which
> time two pressure gauges, one at each end of the piping system, are
> monitored for pressure loss. The line must remain at the test pressure
> ([+]{.underline} 2%) for a minimum of one hour to pass the test
> procedure. Hydrostatic test water shall be properly disposed upon
> completion of the pressure test.
>
> Testing for PVC pipe shall be conducted per Section 7.3 of AWWA C605
> and HDPE pipe testing shall be conducted per PPITR-31.
>
> Leakage in excess of this standard shall be repaired and pipe retested
> until passing. Any visible leakage shall be repaired regardless of
> testing results.

3.2.2 Final Testing

> All equipment shall be tested in operation for a period of 30 days to
> demonstrate compliance with the contract requirements. Compliance with
> the contract requirements shall mean zero defects for 30 consecutive
> days.

END OF SECTION

**SECTION 02730**

**ROTARY‑DRILLED GROUND WATER MONITORING WELLS AND DIRECTIONAL DRILLED
SYSTEM PIPING**

**PART I GENERAL**

1.1 REFERENCES

> The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
> extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the
> basic designation only.
>
> AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)
>
> B2. 1‑68 Pipe Threads (Except Dryseal)
>
> AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM):
>
> ASTM C150 1992 Portland Cement
>
> ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA)
>
> 570/9‑75‑001 Manual of Water Well Construction Practices
>
> NEW JERSEY ADMINISTRATIVE CODES (NJAC)
>
> NJAC 7:9-9.1 December 1977, Sealing of Abandoned Wells
>
> NJAC 7:10 Safe Drinking Water Act
>
> NEW JERSEY DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
>
> Field Sampling Procedures Manual, August 2005

1.2 SUBMITTALS

1.2.1 SD-06 Statements; GA

Sand Placing Equipment and Methods; GA

> Provide a description of equipment and methods required to place the
> sand into the well borehole (see Article 3.4).

1.2.2 SD-09 Reports; GA

a.  Well Data and Completion Report; GA

b.  Permit Application Forms; GA

> c\. NJDEP Monitoring Well Certification Forms A and B; GA

1.2.2.1 Well Data

> Submit a geologic log with coarseness and fineness modules of each
> strata and time penetration log (time to drill through each
> formation). Record split spoon blow count results on log. Submit well
> completion diagram on each log.

1.2.2.2 Permit Application Forms

> Contractor shall prepare and submit permit application form(s) for the
> drilling of well(s) and bore holes into ground water in accordance
> with NJAC 7:10-12.1 et. seq. The Contractor shall be responsible for
> all fees assessed per well permit. All wells and borings into ground
> water must be drilled by a New Jersey licensed well driller. A copy of
> all permit applications shall be provided to the Resident Engineer
> (RE).

1.2.2.3 NJDEP Forms

> The Contractor shall submit NJDEP forms A and B for all completed
> wells. These forms can be found at the following websites:

http://www.state.nj.us/dep/srp/dl/wcerta.pdf

<http://www.state.nj.us/dep/dwq/pdf/well_b.pdf>

1.2.3 SD-13 Certificates; GA

> a\. Well Driller License; GA
>
> Contractor shall provide a copy of the driller\'s New Jersey well
> driller\'s license to the Resident Engineer (RE).

1.3 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

> The work includes installing shallow monitoring wells using hollow
> stem auger techniques. Each well including equipment, materials,
> installation, and workmanship shall be in accordance with the EPA
> Manual of Water Well Construction Practices, except as modified
> herein.
>
> In the manual referred to herein, the advisory provisions shall be
> considered mandatory, as though the word "shall" has been substituted
> for the word "should" wherever it appears. Reference to the "Project
> Representative" and the "Owner" shall be interpreted to mean the RE.
> Other applicable requirements are included under Section 01560,
> "Environmental Protection".
>
> The work also includes the installation of conveyance piping using
> directional drilling techniques.

1.4 ABANDONMENT OF WELLS

> In the event that the Contractor fails to properly construct a well
> and the well must be abandoned because of loss of tools or for any
> other cause, the Contractor shall fill the abandoned hole with
> cement/bentonite grout and remove the casing, at no additional cost to
> the government. Refer to NJAC 7:9-9.1 et seq. for requirements for
> well abandonment. All wells or borings shall be abandoned by a New
> Jersey licensed well driller.

**PART 2 PRODUCTS**

2.1 MATERIALS

> Shall conform to the respective Project Documents and other
> requirements as specified herein.

2.1.1 Casings

> Monitoring well casings will be constructed of Schedule 40 PVC
> materials as shown on the Contract Drawings.

2.1.2 Well Screens

> Monitoring well with screens will be constructed of PVC well screen as
> shown on the Contract Drawings.

2.1.3 Filter Sand

> Provide clean, round, uniform filter sand from U.S. Silica,
> Mauricetown, New Jersey or equivalent. Silica (SiO~2~) content of
> filter sand shall exceed 95%. The gradation of the filter sand shall
> be such that the uniformity coefficient is not more than 2.5.

2.1.4 Cement/Bentonite Grout

> Provide cement/bentonite grout consisting of the following ratio of
> materials: 94 lbs of cement/5 lbs of bentonite/6 gallons of water.

2.1.5 Bentonite Grout Powder

> Provide neat bentonite grout, type Volclay7 grout, a high solids
> (20%), polymer free grout. The mixed grout shall contain no more than
> 24 gallons of water per 50 pound bag.

2.1.6 Cement

> Use Portland Cement meeting the requirements of ASTM C150.

**PART 3 EXECUTION**

3.1 GENERAL

> The Contractor shall be required to install Monitoring Wells at the
> locations shown and to the details and depths as indicated on the
> Contract Drawings.
>
> The Contractor shall also install HDPE conveyance piping using
> directional drilling techniques.

3.2 WELL DRILLING

> The driller shall install the monitoring wells using hollow stem auger
> techniques. For the 2-inch monitoring wells, a minimum 4.25-inch
> inside diameter hollow stem auger shall be utilized. Drill cuttings
> shall be spread on the ground surface adjacent to the well locations.

3.2.1 Special Considerations

> During installation of the wells, all soil cuttings and development
> water shall be prevented from entering adjacent wetlands or stream
> using silt fencing, diking, or other means.

3.3 CASING AND WELL SCREEN

> Provide threaded joints for all well casing and screen. The monitoring
> well screen length is indicated on the Contract Drawings. Install the
> casing and well screens concentrically in the drill hole. Well screen
> and casing shall not be dropped or allowed to fall uncontrolled into
> the borehole. The well screen and casing shall be lowered into the
> borehole by a method which will allow for control of the rate of fall
> at all times.

3.4 FILTER SAND ENVELOPE

> Following completion of the borehole, and the screen and casing has
> been concentrically set in the borehole, fill the annular space
> between the screen and wall of the borehole with filter sand (lower
> filter sand). A filter sand conductor pipe having an inside nominal
> diameter of not less than 1 inch shall be lowered to the bottom of the
> annular space between the screen and the inside of the hollow stem
> augers. The filter sand conductor pipe shall be arranged and connected
> at the surface to water pumping and graveling equipment so that water
> and filter sand fed at uniform rates are discharged as the filter sand
> fills the annular space from the bottom up. The filter sand conductor
> pipe and hollow stem augers shall be raised at a rate that will keep
> the bottom of the pipe and the augers at the surface of the filter
> sand at all times. Dumping filter sand from the surface of the ground
> and agitating the well in an effort to settle the filter sand will
> [not]{.underline} be allowed. Place the filter sand at the depth
> intervals shown on the Contract Drawings. The gradation of the lower
> filter sand shall be such that the uniformity coefficient is not more
> than 2.5. Following installation of the lower filter sand, it shall be
> tamped with a flat ended rod to ensure the lower filter sand is
> tightly packed. After placement of the lower filter sand has been
> completed, a layer of sand size #000 (US Silica Mauricetown, NJ or
> equivalent) shall be placed by the filter sand conductor pipe directly
> on top of the lower filter sand as shown on he Contract Drawings.
> Control speed of sand placement and withdrawal of hollow stem augers
> to prevent bridging and to allow for settlement of the sand. Following
> installation of the upper filter sand, it shall be tamped with a flat
> ended rod to ensure the upper filter sand is tightly pressed against
> the lower filter sand pack. Equipment and methods required to place
> the sand shall be approved by the RE prior to commencement of work.

3.5 GROUTING

> Following installation of the upper filter sand envelope, a
> cement/bentonite grout shall be installed. The grout shall be
> installed by extending a tremie pipe to the top of the upper filter
> sand and grouting slowly by filling the annular space with grout and
> retracting the grout pipe and hollow stem augers at the rate the grout
> fills the space.

3.6 WELL DEVELOPMENT

> Following the completion of each monitoring well, well development
> shall be conducted by the surge block and submersible pump technique.
> The surge block will be used to draw fine-grained material into the
> wells and a submersible pump outfitted with drinking-grade
> polyethylene tubing will be used for removing water from the wells.
> The monitoring wells will be developed for approximately two hours or
> until such time as turbidity readings remain less than 30 NTU and
> stabilize for a period of 30 minutes. The surge block and submersible
> pump shall be properly decontaminated as described in NJDEP's Field
> Sampling Procedures Manual (August 2005) prior to being used in each
> well. Clean, new tubing shall also be used for each well.
>
> Well development water originating from the monitoring wells shall be
> discharged directly onto the ground into a temporary sediment
> structure (see Article 3.2.1), to mitigate soil erosion.

3.7 DIRECTIONAL DRILLING

> System piping shall be installed via directional drilling for one
> wetlands crossing, at Area B as indicated on the Contract Drawings.
> The directional drilling shall allow the installation of the piping to
> the required depth without any disturbance to existing structures,
> piping or wetlands. The directional drilling shall be installed as
> described below.
>
> Directional drilling is governed by the geometry of each situation.
> The drill rig shall be positioned on the ground surface with the drill
> angled at the necessary entry angle (typically 12 to 14 degrees from
> the horizontal). The direction of the drill shall be controlled by a
> sensor placed behind the drill head or other mean approved by the RE.
> The sensor shall allow manual tracking of the depth and position of
> the drill head. The directional drill crossing procedure shall use a
> bentonite-based slurry to drive the cutting or jetting head and
> stabilize the hole against collapse. Drilling slurry returns shall be
> collected in a bentonite receiving pit located at the drill entry
> point. The Contractor shall construct an earth dug pit as shown on the
> Project Plans surrounded by lined straw bales or silt fence. Once
> bentonite returns to the pit, it shall be pumped into steel tanks and
> processed through a solids control system which removes spoil from the
> drilling slurry, allowing the slurry to be reused. No drilling slurry
> or spoils shall be discharged on-site. Any drilling slurry or spoils
> remaining upon completion of the directional drilling shall be
> collected, properly handled and disposed of in accordance with
> Federal, state and municipal regulations. Once the initial borehole is
> completed, if necessary, a larger backreaming bit shall be used to
> expand the borehole diameter. The backreaming process shall be
> repeated with larger diameter backreaming bits until the borehole
> reaches the required diameter as indicated on the Contract Drawings.
> After the final backreaming pass, the HDPE piping shall be pulled
> through the drill hole without the use of steel casing.
>
> The upland staging areas for drilling equipment at entry and exit
> points shall be enclosed with straw bales and Best Management
> Practices shall be used for protection of the environment and to
> prevent soil erosion and sedimentation, as indicated on the Contract
> Drawings. Material excavated from the entry and exit points shall be
> temporarily sidecast in upland areas. Disturbed areas shall be
> restored to pre-construction grade and reseeded immediately upon
> completion of piping installation.
>
> Contractors may propose alternate directional drilling or pushing
> techniques to the RE for approval. The RE retains the right to approve
> or disapprove any alternate techniques.

**SECTION 02831**

**FENCE, CHAIN LINK**

**PART 1 GENERAL**

1.1 REFERENCES

> The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
> extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the
> basic designation only.

AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)

ASTM F 883 1990 Padlocks

ASTM C 94 1992 (Rev. A) Ready-Mixed Concrete

FEDERAL SPECIFICATIONS (FS)

> FS RR‑F‑191 (Rev. K) Fencing, Wire and Post Metal (and Gates,
> Chain‑Link Fence Fabric, and Accessories) (General Specification)
>
> FS RR‑F‑191/1 (Rev. D) Fencing, Wire and Post, Metal (Chain‑Link Fence
> Fabric) (Detail Specification)
>
> FS RR‑F‑191/2 (Rev. D) Fencing, Wire and Post, Metal (Chain‑Link Fence
> Gates) (Detail Specification)
>
> FS RR‑F‑191/3 (Rev. D) Fencing, Wire and Post, Metal (Chain‑Link Fence
> Posts, Top Rails and Braces) (Detail Specification)
>
> FS RR‑F‑191/4 (Rev. D) Fencing, Wire and Post, Metal (Chain‑Link Fence
> Accessories) (Detail Specification)

1.2 SUBMITTALS

> Submit the following in accordance with Section 01330, "Submittal
> Procedures."

1.2.1 SD‑02, Manufacturer's Catalog Data

a\. Chain‑link fencing components

b\. Accessories

1.2.2 SD‑04, Drawings

a\. Gates

b\. Post spacing

c\. Location of gate, corner, end, and pull posts

1.2.3 SD‑06, Instructions

a\. Fence

1.2.4 SD‑10, Test Reports

a\. Weight in ounces for zinc coating

1.2.4.1 Required Report Data

> Submit reports of listing of chain‑link fencing and accessories
> regarding weight in ounces for zinc coating.

1.2.5 SD‑13, Certificates

a\. Fabric

b\. Posts

c\. Braces

d\. Framing

e\. Rails

f\. Tension wires

g\. Gates

h\. Padlocks

1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

> Deliver materials to SITE in an undamaged condition. Store materials
> off the ground to provide protection against oxidation caused by
> ground contact.

**PART 2 PRODUCTS**

2.1 CHAIN‑LINK FENCING AND ACCESSORIES

> FS RR‑F‑191 and detailed specifications as referenced and other
> requirements as specified. All posts, fabric, clips, caps, rods, etc.,
> shall be galvanized steel.

2.1.1 Fabric

> FS RR‑F‑191/1; I, zinc‑coated steel, 9‑gage core wire size. Diamond
> mesh size, 2 inches. Provide selvage knuckled at one selvage and
> twisted and barbed at the other. Height of fabric, as indicated.

2.1.2 Gates

> FS RR‑F‑191/2; Type II, double swing. Shape and size of gate frame, as
> indicated on Contract Drawings. Framing and bracing members, round of
> galvanized steel. Gate frames and braces of minimum sizes listed in FS
> RR‑F‑191/3 for each Class and Grade except that steel pipe frames
> shall be 1.90 inches O.D., 0.120 inches minimum wall thickness. Gate
> fabric, as specified for fencing fabric. All steel latches, stops,
> hinges, keepers, and accessories, shall be galvanized. Gate leaves
> less than 8 feet wide shall have truss rods or intermediate braces.
> Attach gate fabric to gate frame in accordance with manufacturer's
> standards, except that welding will not be permitted. Arrange
> padlocking latches to be accessible from both sides of gate,
> regardless of latching arrangement.

2.1.3 Fencing Accessories

> FS RR‑F‑191/4. Provide accessories with coatings similar to that
> specified for chain‑link fabric or framework. Provide all necessary
> accessory items (posts, post caps, clips, ties, bands, loop caps,
> collars, gate latches, gate stops, keepers, etc.) to provide a
> complete working fence system.

2.1.4 Post, Braces, and Rails

> Steel pipe, Class 1, Grade B galvanized

2.1.5 Tension Wire

Seven (7) gauge

2.1.6 Concrete

> Provide 3,000 psi concrete (ASTM C 94).

2.1.7 Padlocks

ASTM F 883, with chain.

**PART 3 EXECUTION**

3.1 SITE PREPARATION

3.1.1 Clearing and Grading

> Where necessary, clear fence line of trees, brush, and other obstacles
> to install fencing as specified in Section 02110, "Clearing and
> Grubbing". Establish a graded, compacted fence line prior to fencing
> installation. Compact fill used to establish fence line.

3.1.2 Excavation

> Excavate to dimensions indicated for concrete‑embedded items, except
> in bedrock. Clear post holes of loose material.

3.2 FENCE INSTALLATION

> Install fence on prepared surfaces to line and grade indicated.
> Install fence in accordance with fence manufacturer's written
> installation instructions except as modified herein.

3.2.1 Post Spacing

> Provide line posts spaced equidistantly apart, not exceeding 10‑feet
> on center. Provide gate posts spaced as necessary for size of gate
> openings. Do not exceed 500 feet on straight runs between braced
> posts. Provide corner or pull posts, with bracing in both directions,
> for changes in direction of 15 degrees or more, or for abrupt changes
> in grade. Provide drawings showing location of gate, corner, end, and
> pull posts.

3.2.2 Post Setting

> Set posts plumb. Allow concrete to cure a minimum of 72 hours before
> performing other work on posts.

3.2.2.1 Earth

> Provide concrete bases of dimensions indicated.
> Compact/agitate/vibrate concrete to eliminate voids, and finish to a
> dome shape.

3.2.3 Bracing

> Brace gate, corner, end, and pull posts to nearest post with a
> horizontal brace used as a compression member, placed at least 12
> inches below top of fence, and a diagonal truss rod and truss
> tightener used as a tension member.

3.2.4 Top Rail and Tension Wires

> Install top rail and top tension wire tension wire as shown on the
> drawings. Before installing chain‑link fabric, pull wires taut. Place
> top rail/tension wires within 8 inches of respective fabric line.

3.2.5 Fabric

> Pull fabric taut and secure fabric to top wire and bottom wire, close
> to both sides of each post and at maximum intervals of 24 inches on
> center. Secure fabric to posts using stretcher bars, ties or clips
> spaced 15 inches on center, or by integrally weaving to integral
> fastening loops of end, corner, pull, and gate posts for full length
> of each post. Install fabric on opposite side of posts from area being
> secured. Install fabric so that bottom of fabric is 2 inches above
> ground level. Install fence fabric to provide approximately 2‑inch
> deflection at center of fabric span between two posts, when a force of
> approximately 30 pounds is applied perpendicular to fabric. Fabric
> should return to its original position when force is removed.
>
> Where deer fencing is specified, the fence fabric shall be installed
> in a shallow trench with the fabric extending to two feet below grade.

3.3 ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION

3.3.1 Post Caps

> Install post caps as recommended by the manufacturer.

3.3.2 Gates

> Install swing gates to swing through 180 degrees from closed to open.
> Install forked type or plunger bar type latch to permit operation from
> either side of gate. Provide keeper for all vehicle gates, which will
> automatically engage the gate leaf and hold it in the open position
> until manually released. Provide gate stops for all double gates,
> consisting of mushroom type of flush plate with angles. Set in
> concrete to engage center drop rod or plunger bar.

3.3.3 Padlocks

> Provide padlocks for gate openings and provide chains that are
> securely attached to gate or gate posts. Provide padlocks keyed alike,
> and provide two keys for each padlock.

3.3.4 Supporting Arms

> Design supporting arms to accommodate top rail. Install supporting
> arms as recommended by manufacturer. In addition to manufacturer's
> standard connections, permanently secure supporting arms to posts.
> Studs driven by low-velocity powder-actuated tools may be used with
> steel, wrought iron, ductile iron, or malleable iron. Do not use studs
> driven by powder-actuated tools with gray iron or other material that
> will fracture.

3.4 CLEANUP

> Remove waste fencing materials and other debris from the station.

END OF SECTION

**SECTION 02935**

**TURF**

**PART 1 GENERAL**

1.1 REFERENCES

> The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
> extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by
> basic designation only.

FEDERAL SPECIFICATION (FED. SPEC.)

> O-F-241D Fertilizer, Mixed, Commercial

AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)

ASTM C 602 Agricultural Liming Materials

ASTM D 977 Emulsified Asphalt

ASTM E 11 Wire-Cloth Sieves for Testing Purposes

DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE (DOA)

Statutory Authority: Federal Seed Act 7 U.S.C. 1551-1611

1.2 EXTENT OF WORK

> Provide seedbed preparation, topsoiling, liming, fertilizing, seeding,
> and mulching of all newly graded finish earth surfaces, unless
> indicated otherwise, and at all areas inside or outside the limits of
> construction that are disturbed by the Contractor's operation.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

> The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300,
> "Submittal Procedures".

1.3.1 SD‑07 Schedules; GA

a\. Equipment List

> A list of proposed seeding and mulching equipment to be used in
> performance of turfing operation, including descriptive data and
> calibration tests.

1.3.2 SD‑08 Statements

a\. Maintenance Report; GA

Written record of maintenance work performed.

b\. Turf Establishment Period

> Written calendar time period for the turf establishment period. When
> there is more than one turf establishment period, the boundaries of
> the turfed area covered for each period shall be described.

c\. Delivery Schedule

Submit at least 10 days before delivery.

d\. Topsoil Supplier

> Written statement giving the location of the properties from which the
> Topsoil is to be obtained, the names and addresses of the suppliers,
> and, if applicable, crops grown on the properties during the past 2
> years.

1.3.3 SD‑09 Reports

a.  Soil Laboratory Analytical Reports; GA

> Submit copies of all analytical reports from the testing service.

1.3.4 SD‑13 Certificates; GA

> Certificates of compliance certifying that materials meet the
> requirements specified, prior to the delivery of materials. Certified
> copies of the reports for the following materials shall be included:

a\. Seed

> For mixture, percent pure live seed, minimum percent germination and
> hard seed, maximum percent weed seed content, date tested and state
> certification.

b\. Fertilizer

For chemical analysis, composition percent.

c\. Agricultural Limestone

For calcium carbonate equivalent and sieve analysis.

d\. Topsoil

For pH, particle size, chemical analysis and mechanical analysis.

1.4 DELIVERY

1.4.1 Fertilizer and Lime

> Deliver materials to the site in original, unopened containers bearing
> the manufacturer's chemical analysis, name, trade name, trademark, and
> indication of conformance to state and federal laws. In lieu of
> containers, furnish fertilizer and lime in bulk with a certificate
> indicating the above information accompanying each delivery.

1.4.2 Seed

> Deliver seed to the site in original sealed packages bearing the
> producer's guaranteed analysis for percentages of mixtures, purity,
> germination, weed seed content, and inert material. Label in
> conformance with USDA Federal Seed Act and applicable state seed laws.
> Wet, moldy, or otherwise damaged seed with be rejected.

1.5 STORAGE AND HANDLING

> Store lime, fertilizer, and seed in dry locations and away from
> contaminants. Protect seed from drying out. Do not drop or dump
> materials from vehicles.

1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION

> All work and Contractor operations shall comply with the requirements
> of Section 01560, "Environmental Protection."

**PART 2 PRODUCTS**

2.1 SEED

> State‑certified seed of the latest season's crop shall be provided in
> original sealed packages bearing the producer's guaranteed analysis
> for percentages of mixture, purity, germination, hard seed, weed seed
> content, and inert material. Mix seed on site in the presence of the
> RE or authorized representative.

Seed mixtures shall be proportioned by weight as follows:

Mixture Percent Percent Pure

[Common Name]{.underline} [by Weight]{.underline} [Live
Seed]{.underline}

Red Fescues 50 95

Redtop 20 92

Perennial Ryegrass 30 95

> Weed seed shall not exceed 1 percent by weight of the total mixture.
> Wet, moldy, or otherwise damaged seed shall be rejected.

2.2 SOIL AMENDMENTS

> Soil amendments shall consist of lime, fertilizer, organic soil
> amendments and soil conditioners meeting the following requirements.

2.2.1 Lime

> ASTM C 602, commercial agricultural limestone containing a minimum of
> 94 percent of total carbonates, 80 percent calcium, and 14 percent
> magnesium. Provide the following ASTM E 11 gradation: minimum 100
> percent passing the No. 20 sieve and 75 percent passing the No. 100
> sieve.

2.2.2 Fertilizer

> Fed. Spec. O-F-241, Type I, Class II, except provide Type II for
> hydroseeding. Granular fertilizer shall contain a minimum percentage
> by weight of 10 percent nitrogen, 10 percent available phosphoric
> acid, and 10 percent potash.

2.3 TOPSOIL

> Natural, friable soil representative of productive, well-drained soils
> in the area; free of subsoil, stumps, rocks larger than 1.0 inch in
> diameter, brush, weeds, toxic substances, and other material
> detrimental to plant growth.
>
> Furnish topsoil from approved sources off the site meeting the
> requirements described in the following Table 2.3-,1 and the testing
> requirements of Article 3.5.

TABLE 2.3-1

USDA Soil Survey Investigation

[Report No. 1, Laboratory Test for:]{.underline} [Acceptable
Limits]{.underline}

Sand Content 20 ‑ 75 percent by weight

Silt Content 10 ‑ 60 percent by weight

Clay Content 5 ‑ 30 percent by weight

Organic Material (Walkley‑Block) 1.5 percent

pH 5.5 to 7.0

Soluble Salts 600 ppm maximum

2.4 MULCH

Mulch shall be free from weeds, mold, and other deleterious materials.

2.4.1 Straw

> Straw shall be stalks from oats, wheat, rye, barley, or rice furnished
> in air‑dry condition and with a consistency for placing with
> commercial mulch‑blowing equipment.

2.4.2 Hay

> Hay shall be native hay, sudan‑grass hay, broomsedge hay, or other
> herbaceous mowings furnished in an air‑dry condition suitable for
> placing with commercial mulch‑blowing equipment.

2.4.3 Wood Cellulose Fiber

> Wood cellulose fiber shall not contain any growth or
> germination‑inhibiting factors and shall be dyed an appropriate color
> to facilitate visual metering during application. Composition on
> air‑dry weight basis: 9 to 15 percent moisture, pH range from 3.5 to
> 5.0.

2.6 WATER

Unless otherwise approved, contaminant-free potable water not containing

elements toxic to plant life.

2.7 EROSION CONTROL MATERIAL

Soil erosion control shall conform to the following:

2.7.1 Soil Erosion Control Blanket

> Machine produced mat of wood excelsior formed from a web of
> interlocking wood fibers, covered on one side with either knitted
> straw blanket‑like mat construction, covered with biodegradable
> plastic mesh, or interwoven biodegradable thread, plastic netting or
> twisted kraft paper cord netting.

2.7.2 Soil Erosion Control Fabric

> Knitted construction of polypropylene yarn with uniform mesh openings
> 3/4 to 1 inch square with strips of biodegradable paper. Filler paper
> strips shall last 6 to 8 months.

2.7.3 Soil Erosion Control Net

> Heavy, twisted jute mesh weighing approximately 1.22 pounds per linear
> yard and 4 feet wide with mesh openings of approximately 1 inch
> square.

2.7.4 Soil Erosion Control Chemicals

> High‑polymer synthetic resin.

2.7.5 Hydrophilic Colloids

> Hydrophilic colloids shall be physiologically harmless to plant and
> animal life, without phytotoxic agents. Colloids shall be naturally
> occurring, silicate powder based, and shall form a water insoluble
> membrane after curing. Colloids must resist mold growth.

2.7.6 Anchors

> Erosion control anchor material shall be as recommended by the
> manufacturer.

**PART 3 EXECUTION**

3.1 SEEDING TIMES AND CONDITIONS

3.1.1 Seeding Time

> Seed shall be sown from March 1st to May 15th for spring planting and
> from September 1st to October 30th for fall planting.

3.1.2 Turfing Conditions

> Turf operations shall be performed only during periods when beneficial
> results can be obtained. When drought, excessive moisture or other
> unsatisfactory conditions prevail, the work shall be stopped when
> directed. When special conditions warrant a variance to the turf
> operations, proposed times shall be submitted to and approved by the
> Resident Engineer (RE).

3.2 SITE PREPARATION

3.2.1 Grading

> The RE shall verify that finished grades are as indicated on drawings,
> and the placing of topsoil has been completed in accordance with
> Section 02225, "Excavation, Backfilling, and Compacting\".

3.2.2 Subgrade

> After areas to be seeded have been brought to the required subgrade,
> thoroughly till to minimum depth of 6 inches by scarifying, disking,
> harrowing, or other approved methods. After tillage, remove debris and
> stones larger than 1.0 inch remaining on the surface.

3.2.3 Final Grade

> Immediately prior to placing topsoil, scarify subgrade to a 2-inch
> depth for bonding of topsoil with subsoil. Spread topsoil evenly to a
> minimum depth of 4 inches. Do not spread topsoil when frozen or
> excessively wet or dry.

3.2.3.1 If there is insufficient on-site topsoil meeting specified
requirements for topsoil, then provide topsoil from offsite sources
meeting the requirements of paragraph 2.3 of this section.

3.2.3.2 Correct irregularities in finished surfaces to eliminate
depressions. Protect finished topsoil areas from damage by vehicular or
pedestrian traffic.

3.2.4 Application of Soil Amendments

3.2.4.1 Lime

> Lime shall be applied at the rate of 3000 pounds per acre or 70 pounds
> per 1000 square feet. Lime shall be incorporated into the soil to a
> minimum depth of 4 inches or may be incorporated as part of the
> tillage operation.

3.2.4.2 Fertilizer

> Fertilizer shall be applied at the rate of 1000 pounds per acre or 23
> pounds per 1000 square feet. Fertilizer shall be incorporated into the
> soil to a minimum depth of 4 inches and may be incorporated as part of
> the tillage or hydroseeding operation.

3.3 SEEDING

3.3.1 General

> Prior to seeding, any previously prepared seedbed areas compacted or
> damaged by interim rain, traffic or other cause, shall be reworked to
> restore the ground condition previously specified. Seeding operations
> shall not take place when the wind velocity will prevent uniform seed
> distribution.

3.3.2 Equipment Calibration

> The equipment to be used and the methods of turfing shall be subject
> to the inspection and approval of the RE prior to commencement of
> turfing operations. Immediately prior to the commencement of turfing
> operations, the Contractor shall conduct turfing equipment calibration
> tests in the presence of the RE.

3.3.3 Applying Seed

> Apply seed within 24 hours after seedbed preparation. Sow seed with
> approved sowing equipment using one or a combination of the following
> methods at a rate of 240 pounds per acre. Sow one-half the seed in one
> direction, and sow the remainder at right angles to the first sowing.

3.3.3.1 Broadcast Seeding

> Seed shall be uniformly broadcast using broadcast or drop seeders.
> Seed shall be covered uniformly to a maximum depth of 1/4 inch in
> clayey soils and ½ inch in sandy soils. Cover seed by spike tooth
> harrow, raking, or other approved devices.

3.3.3.2 Drill Seeding

> Use cultipacker seeders or grass seed drills or other approved
> methods. Drill seed uniformly to maximum depth of 1/4 inch in clayey
> soils and ½ inch in sandy soils. Cover seed by spike tooth harrow,
> cultipacker, or other approved devices.

3.3.3.3 Rolling

> Immediately after seeding, except for slopes 3‑horizontal‑to‑1
> vertical and greater, the entire area shall be firmed with a roller
> not exceeding 90 pounds for each foot of roller width. Areas seeded
> with seed drills equipped with rollers shall not be rolled.

3.3.4 Hydroseeding

> Seed and fertilizer shall be added to water and thoroughly mixed at
> the rates specified. Wood cellulose fiber mulch shall be added at the
> rates recommended by the manufacturer after the seed, fertilizer and
> water have been thoroughly mixed, to produce a homogeneous slurry.
> Seed shall not remain in water containing fertilizer for more than 1
> hour prior to application, unless otherwise approved. Keep liquid
> fertilizer agitated during application. Slurry shall be uniformly
> applied under pressure over the entire area. Immediately following
> application of slurry mix, make separate application of wood cellulose
> mulch at the rate of 1000 pounds (dry weight) per acre. When
> hydraulically sprayed on the ground, material shall form a
> blotter-like cover impregnated uniformly with the grass seed. Cover
> shall allow rainfall or applied water to percolate to underlying soil.
> The hydroseeded area shall not be rolled.

3.3.5 Mulch

3.3.5.1 Straw or Hay Mulch

> Straw or hay mulch shall be spread uniformly at the rate of 1.5 tons
> per acre. Mulch shall be spread by hand, blower‑type mulch spreader or
> other approved method. Mulching shall be started on the windward side
> of relatively flat areas or on the upper part of a steep slope and
> continued uniformly until the area is covered. The mulch shall not be
> bunched. All seeded areas shall be mulched on the same day as the
> seeding.

3.3.5.2 Mechanically Anchoring

> Immediately following spreading, the mulch shall be anchored to the
> soil by a V‑type‑wheel land packer, a scalloped‑disk land packer
> designed to force mulch into the soil surface, or other suitable
> equipment.

3.3.5.3 Non‑Asphaltic Tackifier

> Hydrophilic colloid shall be applied at rate recommended by
> manufacturer. Apply with hydraulic equipment suitable for mixing and
> applying uniform mixture of tackifier.

3.3.5.4 Spreading Asphalt Adhesive Coated Mulch

> Spreading asphalt adhesive coated mulch will not be allowed.

3.3.5.5 Wood Cellulose Fiber

> Wood cellulose fiber mulch for use with the hydraulic application of
> seed and fertilizer shall be applied as part of the hydroseeding
> operation.

3.3.6 Water

> Watering shall be started within 7 days after completing the seeded
> area. Water shall be applied at a rate sufficient to ensure moist soil
> conditions to a minimum depth of 1 inch. Run‑off and puddling shall be
> prevented.

3.4 EROSION CONTROL

3.4.1 Erosion Control Material

> Erosion control material, where indicated or required, shall be
> installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Placement of
> the erosion control material shall be accomplished without damage to
> installed material or without deviation to finished grade.

5.  TOPSOIL TESTING

> Topsoil shall be tested in accordance with the following laboratory
> analytical methods: Gradation - ASTM D 422, Priority Pollutant
> Semivolatile Organic Compounds (SVOCs) - EPA Method 8270, Priority
> Pollutant Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs) - EPA Method 8260,
> Priority Pollutant Metals - EPA Method 6010 (HG Method), Pesticides -
> EPA Method 8081, PCBs - EPA Method 8082, Herbicides - EPA Method 8151,
> and Soil pH - EPA Method 9045D.
>
> The services of a qualified testing laboratory shall be engaged by the
> Contractor to make tests and determine acceptability of the material
> as listed below. The laboratory shall be New Jersey certified for the
> applicable tests.
>
> Tests for Topsoil material from off-site shall be performed at a
> frequency of 1 per 3,000 cubic yards if from a natural borrow source
> or 1 per source, whichever is more stringent. Material that is not
> from a natural borrow source shall be tested at a frequency of 1 per
> 1,000 cubic yards or 1 per source, whichever is more stringent. The RE
> shall make the final determination if a source is natural or not.
>
> Topsoil shall be acceptable if environmental test results show that
> all contaminant levels are below the lowest (most restrictive) soil
> cleanup criteria established by the NJDEP.

3.6 RESTORATION AND CLEAN UP

3.6.1 Restoration

> Existing turf areas, pavements and facilities that have been damaged
> from the turfing operation shall be restored to original condition at
> Contractor's expense.

3.6.2 Clean Up

> Excess (other than surplus topsoil, if applicable) and waste material
> shall be removed from the planting operation and shall be disposed of
> off the site in accordance with applicable regulations. Adjacent paved
> areas shall be cleaned.

3.7 PROTECTION OF TURFED AREAS

> Immediately after turfing, the area shall be protected against traffic
> or other use by erecting barricades and providing signage as required,
> or as directed by the RE.

3.8 TURF ESTABLISHMENT PERIOD

3.8.1 Commencement

> The Turf Establishment Period for establishing a healthy stand of turf
> shall begin on the first day of work under this section and shall end
> three (3) months after the last day of turfing operations required by
> this contract. Written calendar time period shall be furnished to the
> RE for the Turf Establishment Period. When there is more than one turf
> establishment period, describe the boundaries of the turfed area
> covered for each period.

3.8.2 Satisfactory Stand of Turf

3.8.2.1 Seeded Area

> A satisfactory stand of turf from the seeding operation for a field
> area is defined as a minimum of 10 grass plants per square foot. The
> total bare spots shall not exceed 2 percent of the total seeded area.

3.8.3 Maintenance During Establishment Period

3.8.3.1 General

> Maintenance of the turfed areas shall include eradicating weeds,
> eradicating insects and diseases, protecting embankments and ditches
> from erosion, maintaining erosion control materials and mulch,
> protecting turfed areas from traffic, mowing, and watering.

3.8.3.2 Mowing

> Lawn areas shall be mowed to a minimum height of 2 inches when the
> average height of the turf becomes 4 inches. Clippings shall be
> removed when the amount of cut turf is heavy enough to damage the
> turfed areas.

3.8.3.3 Watering

> Watering shall be at intervals to obtain a moist soil condition to a
> minimum depth of 1 inch. Frequency of watering and quantity of water
> shall be adjusted in accordance with the growth of the turf. Run‑off,
> puddling and wilting shall be prevented.

3.8.3.4 Repair

> The Contractor shall re‑establish as specified herein, eroded, damaged
> or barren areas. Mulch shall also be repaired or replaced as required.

3.8.3.5 Maintenance Report

> A written record shall be furnished to the RE of the maintenance work
> performed.

3.9 FINAL ACCEPTANCE

3.9.1 Preliminary Inspection

> Prior to the completion of the Turf Establishment Period, a
> preliminary inspection shall be held by the RE. Time for the
> inspection shall be established in writing. The acceptability of the
> turf in accordance with the Turf Establishment Period shall be
> determined. An unacceptable stand of turf shall be repaired as soon as
> turfing conditions permit.

3.9.2 Final Inspection

> A final inspection shall be held by the RE to determine that
> deficiencies noted in the preliminary inspection have been corrected.
> Time for the inspection shall be established in writing.

END OF SECTION

**SECTION 03410**

**PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE**

**PART 1 GENERAL**

1.1 SUMMARY

1.2 REFERENCES

> The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
> extent referenced.  The publications are referred to in the text by
> the basic designation only.

AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL INSTITUTE (AISI) PUBLICATION

Stainless and Heat Resisting Steels ‑ 1974

AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE (ACI) PUBLICATIONS

> ACI 211.1‑74(75) Selecting Proportions for Normal and Heavy‑ Weight
> Concrete
>
> ACI 2ll.2‑69(77) Selecting Proportions for Structural Light‑ Weight
> Concrete
>
> ACI 2l4‑65 Evaluation of Compression Test Results of Field Concrete
>
> ACI 304‑73 Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete
>
> ACI 305‑72 Hot Weather Concreting
>
> ACI 306‑66(72) Cold Weather Concreting
>
> ACI 308‑71 Curing Concrete
>
> ACI 315‑92 Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures
>
> ACI 318‑95 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete
>
> ACI 517‑70(76) Atmospheric Pressure Steam Curing of Concrete
>
> AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS (ASTM) PUBLICATIONS
>
> A82‑76 Cold‑Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement
>
> A123‑73 Zinc (Hot Galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated from
> Rolled, Pressed, and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars, and Strip

A185‑73 Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement

> A615‑76a Deformed and Plain Billet‑Steel Bars for Concrete
> Reinforcement
>
> A616‑76 Rail‑Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
>
> A6l7‑76 Axle‑Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
>
> C33‑77 Concrete Aggregates
>
> C42‑68(74) Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of
> Concrete
>
> C143‑74 Slump of Portland Cement Concrete
>
> C150‑77 Portland Cement
>
> C173‑75 Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method
>
> C231‑75 Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method
>
> C260‑74 Air Entraining Admixtures for Concrete
>
> C330‑77 Lightweight Aggregates for Structural Concrete
>
> C494‑77 Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
>
> C567‑71 Unit Weight of Structural Lightweight Concrete
>
> C595‑76 Blended Hydraulic Cements
>
> C618‑77 Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as a
> Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete

AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS) PUBLICATIONS

> AWS D1.1‑96 Structural Welding Code
>
> AWS D12.1‑75 Welding Reinforcing Steel

PRESTRESSED CONCRETE INSTITUTE (PCI) PUBLICATION:

> MNL‑116‑77 Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of
> Precast Prestressed Concrete Products

UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES, INC. (UL)

> Fire Resistance Index

U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS REGULATIONS

Engineer Regulation (ER) 1110‑1‑2002

1.2.1 General Requirements

> All work shall be as specified herein.  Where conflicts between
> referenced publications exist, ACI 3l8 shall govern. Precast units
> shall be the product of a manufacturer specializing in the production
> of precast concrete units. 

1.3 SUBMITTALS

1.3.1 SD-04 SHOP DRAWINGS; GA

> Shop drawings indicating details of construction and erection shall be
> submitted to the Resident Engineer (RE) for record in accordance with
> the requirements of Division l.  Drawings shall show dimensions,
> details of bonding, inserts, cutouts, sleeves, pickup points, and
> accessories, and the relationship of all pieces to adjacent materials.
> Reinforcing steel shall be detailed in accordance with ACI 315.  Any
> revision to the design as shown on the engineering drawings, in order
> to adapt them to the manufacturer\'s method of operation, including
> handling, shall be shown on the shop drawings, and appropriate design
> calculations shall be submitted to the RE for approval.

1.3.2 SD-10 CERTIFIED TEST REPORTS; GA

> Before delivery of materials and equipment, four certified copies of
> the tests reports specified herein shall be submitted to the RE for
> approval, along with manufacturer's certification that the tested
> material and equipment are of the same type, quality, and manufacture
> as that proposed to be supplied.

1.3.3 SD-09, Contractor Furnished Mix Design

> The Contractor shall prepare, and submit for approval, a concrete mix
> design for each type of concrete required.  The strength of concrete
> at 28 days shall be at least 4,000 PSI. The design shall be prepared
> in accordance with ACI 3l8.  The concrete may be proportioned from
> additional data derived from ACI 211.1, ACI 211.2 and ACI 214 for an
> assumed coefficient of variation of 15 percent and a probability of
> one test in ten falling below the specified strength, f\'c, provided
> that the mix design reflects actual concrete plant standard deviations
> and the resulting production concrete conforms to the specified
> requirements.  The mix‑design shall be based on current materials
> previously evaluated by the concrete producer whose established
> methods of statistical quality control is in conformance with ACI
> 318.  In the absence of such data, the Contractor shall sample and
> test the aggregates for the design of concrete.

**PART 2 PRODUCTS**

> Materials shall conform to the specifications and to the other
> requirements specified herein.

2.1 PORTLAND CEMENT

> ASTM C150.  Cement used shall be obtained from a single mill.  Type
> III cement may be used, when approved, at no increase in cost to the
> Government. 

2.2 WATER

> Water shall be clean and free from injurious amounts of oils, acids,
> alkalis, salts, organic materials, or other substances that may be
> harmful to concrete or steel.  Water shall not contain harmful amounts
> of chloride ion.

2.3 AGGREGATES

> Aggregates shall be free from any materials which could react with the
> alkalies in the cement in a deleterious manner.

2.3.1 Aggregates for Normal Weight Concrete

> ASTM C33.

2.3.2 Aggregates for Lightweight Concrete

> Coarse aggregates, ASTM C330; fine aggregates, ASTM C33 or C330.

2.3.3 Aggregate Maximum Size

> The maximum size of aggregate shall not exceed one inch.

2.3.4 All Aggregates

> All aggregates of each size, used for exposed concrete, shall be
> obtained from a single source.

2.4 ADMIXTURES, INCLUDING AIR ENTRAINING (IF USED)

> ASTM C260 (air entraining); ASTM C494 (chemical).  All admixtures
> shall have prior approval of the Resident Engineer (RE), shall be from
> one manufacturer, and shall be certified by the manufacturer to be
> free of chlorides.  All admixtures shall be added at the mixer.

2.5 REINFORCING

2.5.1 Welded Wire Fabric Reinforcing

> ASTM A185, sized as indicated.

2.5.2 Reinforcing Bars

> ASTM A615, A616, and A617, Grade 60.  Welded splices shall be in
> accordance with AWS D12.1.

2.6 ATTACHMENT ACCESSORIES

> Bolts, shims, washers and nuts, dowels, and clamps shall be corrosion
> resisting steel conforming to AISI Type 304 or 316. Anchors, setting
> loops, lifting hooks, and like accessories set in castings shall be
> steel, hot‑dipped zinc‑coated in accordance with ASTM Al23, malleable
> iron, or plated ferrous metal as best suited to prevent rust staining
> of members and to meet structural requirements.

2.7 ELASTOMERIC BEARING PADS (IF APPLICABLE)

> Elastomeric bearing pads shall conform to the following:

2.7.1 Pads l/2‑inch and less in thickness shall be all elastomer.  The
total out‑to‑out thickness of a pad shall not be less than the thickness
indicated nor more than l/4‑inch greater than the thickness.  Variation
of total thickness within an individual pad shall not exceed l/8inch.

2.7.2 The length and width of a pad shall not vary more than l/8‑inch
from the dimensions indicated.  Pads of all elastomer may be cut from
large sheets.  Cutting shall be performed in such a manner as to avoid
heating of the material, to produce a smooth edge with no tears or other
jagged areas, and to cause as little damage to the material as
possible.  Corners and edges of molded pads may be rounded at the option
of the Contractor.  Radius at corners shall not exceed 3/8‑inch and
radius of edges shall not exceed 1/8‑inch.

2.7.3 The sole polymer in the elastomeric compound shall be neoprene and
shall not be less than 60 percent by volume of the total compound.

2.8 CAULKING AND SEALANTS

> See Sections 07920 "Sealants" and 02420, "Manhole Structures".

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS CONNECTIONS

> Anchors, dowels, bolts, steel welding inserts, and connecting plates
> indicated and/or necessary in connection with the fabrication and
> erection of precast concrete members shall be in position rigidly to
> prevent displacement while concrete is being placed.  On‑site and
> off‑site welding shall be in accordance with AWS Dl.l and Dl2.l, as
> applicable.

**PART 3 EXECUTION**

3.1 FABRICATION

> Fabrication of the members shall be for the design load conditions
> indicated and shall make structural provision for all required
> openings.  Each precast member shall be marked to indicate its
> location in the structure, its top surface, and date of fabrication. 
> Identification marks shall correspond to the placing plans.

3.1.1 Forms

> Forms shall be well braced and stiffened against deformation, and
> shall be accurately constructed.  The forms shall be such as to
> produce a smooth dense surface.  A bond‑breaking substance may be
> applied to the forms. Exposed edges shall be chamfered to a 3/4‑inch
> radius. Form ties shall be either the threaded or snap‑off type, so
> that no form wires or metal pieces will be left at the surface of the
> finished concrete.

3.1.2 Tolerances

> The dimensions of the finished product shall be as noted on the
> drawings. 

3.1.3 Cast-in Items

> Groups of inserts or cast‑in items which must be located in close
> tolerance to each other shall not be separated into two panels by a
> joint.

3.1.4 REINFORCING

> Steel reinforcing shall be fabricated as indicated and placed in
> position in the forms within the tolerances specified in ACI 318.
> Reinforcement shall be adequately secured so as to remain in the
> proper position during placement of the concrete.  Where cover over
> reinforcing steel is not indicated, it shall be in accordance with ACI
> 318.

3.1.5 CONCRETE

3.1.5.1 Concrete Mixing

> Mixing operations shall be such as to produce batch‑to‑batch
> uniformity.

3.1.5.2 Concrete Placing

> Concrete placing shall be in accordance with ACI 304 and ACI 305 and
> 306.

3.1.5.3 Concrete Curing

> Curing shall be commenced immediately following the initial set or
> completion of surface finishing and shall conform to ACI 308. The
> application of heat at a controlled rate, combined with an effective
> method of supplying or retaining moisture in order to accelerate the
> curing process, shall be accomplished as described below.

3.1.5.3.1 Steam Curing

> Steam curing shall conform to ACI 517.

3.1.5.3.2 Curing with Radiant Heat and Moisture

> The application of radiant heat to beds, whether by means of pipes
> circulating steam, hot oil or hot water, or by electric blankets or
> heating elements, shall be accomplished without pipes, blankets, or
> elements making contact with concrete, form surfaces, or test
> cylinders.  Effective means shall be provided to prevent rapid loss of
> moisture in any part of the member.  The ambient curing temperature
> shall not exceed l75 degrees F at any time.  The curing procedures
> shall be carefully controlled.

3.1.6 Finishing

> Honeycombed sections shall be inspected by a qualified structural
> engineer.  If any unit is found to be structurally impaired, it shall
> be rejected.  Where accepted, honeycombed sections shall be repaired
> unless the repair is specifically waived by the Resident Engineer
> (RE).  The repair shall be as follows: 
>
> All loose material shall be removed and the areas cut back until the
> coarse aggregate breaks under chipping instead of falling out.  The
> area shall be saturated, allowed to approach a condition of surface
> dryness, coated with a thin layer of neat cement slurry, and
> hammer‑packed with stiff dry mortar.  A proven bonding material shall
> be used, as per manufacturer\'s recommendations, for bonding the
> patching mortar.

3.1.6.1 Structural members will be accepted with form finished
appearance but with leakage fins removed.  All faces shall have true,
well‑defined surfaces. Exposed ragged edges shall be corrected by
rubbing or grinding.

3.1.6.2 Standard Finish

> Small surface holes caused by air bubbles, normal form joint marks,
> and minor chips and spalls will be tolerated, but no major or
> unsightly imperfections, honeycomb, or structural defects will be
> accepted.  However, the RE may accept such defects subject to approved
> corrective measures.

3.1.6.3 Grade B Finish

> All air pockets and holes over 1/4‑inch in diameter shall be filled
> with a sand‑cement paste.  All form offsets or fins over 1/8‑inch
> shall be ground smooth. 

3.2 ERECTION

> Members shall be erected in accordance with approved shop drawings and
> erection schedules.  The proposed sequence of operations shall be
> approved before erection begins.  The work shall be supported, braced,
> guyed, and otherwise maintained in proper position pending completion
> of necessary structural connections.  All temporary supports shall be
> maintained until the steel has been welded and the grout or fill at
> the base of rigid frames and interior columns has attained a strength
> equal to 70 percent of the design strength.  Welding shall conform to
> AWS D1.1.

3.2.1 Bearing Surfaces

> Units shall be installed on bearing surfaces which are level and free
> of irregularities.  The Contractor shall correct bearing surface
> irregularities by leveling with a stiff cement mortar.  The units
> shall be installed at right angles to bearing surfaces, drawn up tight
> without forcing or distortion, and with sides plumb.

3.2.3 Grouting

Except where indicated otherwise, keyways between units and other spaces
shall be cleaned and filled solidly with grout.  Grout seeping through
to surfaces in spaces below shall be removed before hardening.

Grout shall consist of a mixture of cementatious materials and aggregate
as specified hereinafter; water shall be added in sufficient quantity to
produce a stiff fluid mixture.  Fine grout shall be provided in grout
spaces less than 2 inches in any horizontal dimension or in which
clearance between reinforcing and masonry is less than 3/4‑inch.  Coarse
grout shall be provided in grout spaces 2 inches or greater in any
horizontal dimensions or in which clearance between members is not less
than 3/4inch.

Fine grout shall be mixed in proportions of one part Portland cement,
1/4 part lime paste, and 3 parts sand.

Coarse grout shall be mixed in proportions of one part Portland cement,
1/4 part lime paste, 3 parts sand, and 3 parts coarse aggregate passing
a 3/8‑inch sieve.

3.2.4 Caulking and Sealants

> Seals, gaskets, sealant, and sealant backup shall be placed in
> vertical and horizontal joints between units in accordance with
> drawing details and as specified in Sections 07920, "Sealants", and
> 02420, "Manhole Structures".

3.3 SAMPLING AND TESTING

> Samples and tests required below shall be made at the Contractor's
> expense.  The tests shall be performed by an independent commercial
> testing laboratory, or, if approved by the RE, at the precaster's
> quality control laboratory. Certified test reports shall include all
> test data and results.

3.3.1 Concrete Testing

> Plastic concrete, as delivered to the casting site, shall be sampled
> and tested as indicated below and in the paragraph entitled
> "Evaluation and Acceptance of Concrete" of ACI 318.  A minimum of four
> cylinders shall be made during each concreting cycle of the same mix.
> Statistical evaluation of compressive test results shall be in
> accordance with ACI 214.

3.3.2 Slump

> In accordance with ASTM C143.

3.3.3 Air Content

> Tests shall be made at the same time that specimens for compression
> tests are made.  Tests shall be made in accordance with ASTM C173 or
> ASTM C231.

3.3.4 Lightweight Concrete

> Unit weight of lightweight concrete shall be tested in accordance with
> ASTM C567.

3.3.5 Slump and Air Content Test Results

> If the measured slump or air content falls outside the limits
> specified, a check test shall be made.  In the event of a second
> failure, the load of concrete represented shall be rejected.

3.3.6 Compressive Strength Test Results

> If the compressive strength tests fail to meet the above requirements,
> core testing shall be made in accordance with ASTM C42.  If the core
> tests prove unsatisfactory, load tests shall be made in accordance
> with ACI 3l8. Precast units failing to meet the requirements of the
> load tests shall not be used.  Core tests and load tests shall be
> performed at the expense of the Contractor.

3.3.7 Mill Certificates

> The Contractor shall furnish mill certificates attesting to the
> quality of the cement. Cement shall be provided by a qualified source
> in accordance with the Corps of Engineers Cement Quality Management
> System.
>
> Plant and specialist qualifications shall be in accordance with the
> following options:

3.3.7.1 Contractor's Option

> Precast structural concrete shall be the product of a manufacturer
> having capacity and facilities for producing materials of the quality
> and finish specified herein, and of the quantity indicated without
> delay to progress of work.  The manufacturer shall have an established
> quality assurance program in effective operation at his plant,
> attested to by a current certification of the plant in the PCI
> "Certification Program for Quality Control".

3.3.7.2 Contractor's Option

> Performance tests shall be executed on members selected at random by
> the RE for plants or specialists not currently enrolled in the PCI
> "Certification Program for Quality Control" or for precast concrete
> jobs cast by specialists.

END OF SECTION

**SECTION 07920**

**SEALANTS**

**PART 1 GENERAL**

1.1 SUMMARY

1.2 REFERENCES

> The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
> extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the
> basic designation only.
>
> AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
>
> ASTM C834 Latex Sealing Compounds
>
> ASTM C920 Elastomeric Joint Sealants

1.3 SUBMITTALS

> Submit to the Resident Engineer (RE) the following:

1.3.1 SD-02 Manufacturer\'s Catalog Data; GA

> a\. Sealants
>
> b\. Primers
>
> c\. Backstop materials

d\. Bond Breakers

e\. Concrete Waterproofing

> Data for the sealants shall include shelf life and recommended
> cleaning solvents.

1.3.2 SD-03 Manufacturer's Standard Color Charts; GA

> a\. Sealants
>
> Where colors are not indicated, submit not less than 3 different
> colors for selection by the RE.

1.3.3 SD-06 Manufacturer's Instructions; GA

> a\. Sealants

b\. Concrete Waterproofing

> Submit application instructions, precautions and mixing instructions
> for multicomponent sealants and concrete waterproofing.

1.3.4 SD-14 Samples; GA

> a\. Sealants
>
> Submit one sample of each color for each sealant type to verify that
> products match the colors indicated.

1.3.5 SD-10 Test Reports; GA

> a\. Sealants
>
> Indicate sealant compatibility with commonly used substrates.

1.3.6 SD-13 Certificates of Compliance; GA

> a\. Sealants
>
> b\. Primers
>
> c\. Backstops

d\. Bond Breakers

e\. Concrete Waterproofing

> Submit certificates from the manufacturers attesting that materials
> meet the specified requirements.

1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

> The ambient temperature shall be within the limits of 40 and 100
> degrees F when sealant is applied.

1.5 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

> Deliver materials to the job site is unopened in manufacturers'
> external shipping containers, with brand names, date of manufacture,
> color, and material designation clearly marked thereon. Elastomeric
> sealant containers shall be labeled to identify type, class, grade,
> and use. Carefully handle and store materials to prevent inclusion of
> foreign materials or subjection to sustained temperatures exceeding
> 100 F degrees or less than 40 degrees F.

**PART 2 PRODUCTS**

2.1 SEALANTS

> Provide sealant that has been tested and found suitable for the
> substrates to which it will be applied.

2.1.1 Interior Sealant

Not used.

2.1.2 Exterior Sealant

> Except where specified otherwise: For Joints in vertical surfaces,
> provide ASTM C920, Type S or M, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. For joints
> in horizontal surfaces, provide ASTM C920, Type S or M, Grade P, Class
> 25, Use T. Location(s) of sealant shall be as follows:
>
> Location:
>
> a\. Voids where items pass through exterior walls.
>
> b\. Metal‑to‑Metal joints where sealant is indicated or specified.
>
> c\. Interior face of expansion joints in exterior walls where metal
> expansion joint covers are not required.

2.1.3 Floor Joint Sealant

> Not used.

2.2 PRIMER FOR SEALANT

> Provide a nonstaining, quick‑drying type and consistency recommended
> by the sealant manufacturer for the particular application.

2.3 BOND BREAKERS

> Provide the type and consistency recommended by the sealant
> manufacturer for the particular application.

2.4 BACKSTOPS

> Provide glass fiber roving or neoprene, butyl, polyurethane, or
> polyethylene foams free from oil or other staining elements as
> recommended by sealant manufacturer. Backstop material shall be
> compatible with sealant. Do not use oakum and other types of
> absorptive materials as backstops.

2.5 CLEANING SOLVENTS

> Provide type(s) recommended by the sealant manufacturer.

2.6 CONCRETE WATERPROOFING

> Provide a bitumastic waterproof coating on all exterior concrete
> surfaces, including manholes.

**PART 3 EXECUTION**

3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION

> Surfaces shall be clean, dry to the touch, and free from dirt frost,
> moisture, grease, oil, wax, lacquer, paint, or other foreign matter
> that would tend to destroy or impair adhesion. When resealing an
> existing joint, remove existing caulk or sealant prior to applying new
> sealant.

3.1.1 Steel Surfaces

> Remove loose mill scale by sandblasting or, if sandblasting is
> impractical or would damage finish work, scraping and wire brushing.
> Remove protective coatings by sandblasting or using a residue‑free
> solvent.

3.1.2 Aluminum or Bronze Surfaces

> Remove temporary protective coatings from surfaces that will be in
> contact with sealant. When masking tape is used as a protective
> coating, remove tape and any residual adhesive just prior to sealant
> application. For removing protective coatings and final cleaning, use
> nonstaining solvents recommended by the manufacturer of the item(s)
> containing aluminum or bronze surfaces.

3.1.3 Concrete Surfaces

3.2 SEALANT PREPARATION

> Do not add liquids, solvents, or powders to the sealant. Mix
> multicomponent elastomeric sealants in accordance with manufacturer\'s
> instructions.

3.3 APPLICATION

3.3.1 Joint Width‑to‑Depth Ratios

> a\. Acceptable Ratios:

[Joint Width]{.underline} [Joint Depth]{.underline}

[Minimum]{.underline} [Maximum]{.underline}

For metal, glass, or other

nonporous surfaces:

1/4 inch (minimum) 1/4 inch 1/4 inch

> over 1/4 inch of width 1/2 inch Equal to width

For wood, concrete, masonry

or stone:

1/4 inch (minimum) 1/4 inch 1/4 inch

Over 1/4 inch to 1/4 inch Equal to

1/2 inch width

Over 1/2 inch to 2 inches 1/2 inch 5/8 inch

Over 2 inches (As recommended by sealant manufacturer)

> b\. Unacceptable Ratios: Where joints of acceptable width‑to‑depth
> ratios have not been provided, clean out joints to acceptable depths
> and grind or cut to acceptable widths without damage to the adjoining
> work. Grinding shall not be required on metal surfaces.

3.3.2 Backstops

> Install backstops dry and free of tears or holes. Tightly pack the
> back or bottom of joint cavities with backstop material to provide a
> joint of the depth specified. Install backstops in the following
> locations.
>
> a\. Where indicated.
>
> b\. Where backstop is not indicated but joint cavities exceed the
> acceptable maximum depths specified in paragraph entitled, "Joint
> Width‑to‑Depth Ratios".

3.3.3 Primer

> Immediately prior to application of the sealant, clean out loose
> particles from joints. Where recommended by sealant manufacturer,
> apply primer to joints in porous surfaces in accordance with sealant
> manufacturer\'s instructions. Do not apply primer to exposed finish
> surfaces.

3.3.4 Bond Breaker

> Provide bond breakers to the back or bottom of joint cavities, as
> recommended by the sealant manufacturer for each type of joint and
> sealant used, to prevent sealant from adhering to these surfaces.
> Carefully apply the bond breaker to avoid contamination of adjoining
> surfaces or breaking bond with surfaces other than those covered by
> the bond breaker.

3.3.5 Sealants

> Provide a sealant compatible with the material (s) to which it is
> applied. Do not use a sealant that has exceeded shelf life or has
> jelled and can not be discharged in a continuous flow from the gun.
> Apply the sealant in accordance with the manufacturer\'s instructions
> with a gun having a nozzle that fits the joint width. Force sealant
> into joints to fill the joints solidly without air pockets. Tool
> sealant after application to ensure adhesion. Sealant shall be
> uniformly smooth and free of wrinkles. Upon completion of sealant
> application, roughen partially filled or unfilled joints, apply
> sealant, and tool smooth as specified.

3.3.6 Concrete Waterproofing

> Apply bitumastic concrete waterproofing to all exterior surfaces in
> accordance with manufacturer\'s recommendations.

3.4 PROTECTION AND CLEANING

3.4.1 Protection

> Protect areas adjacent to joints from sealant smears. Masking tape may
> be used for this purpose if removed 5 to 10 minutes after the joint is
> filled.

3.4.2 Final Cleaning

> Upon completion of sealant application, remove remaining smears and
> stains and leave the work in a clean and neat condition.
>
> a\. Porous Surfaces: Immediately scrape off fresh sealant that has
> been smeared and rub clean with a solvent as recommended by the
> sealant manufacturer. Allow excess sealant to cure for 24 hour then
> remove by wire brushing or sanding.
>
> b\. Metal and Other Non‑Porous Surfaces: Remove excess sealant with a
> solvent‑moistened cloth.

END OF SECTION

**SECTION 13999**

**OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS**

**PART 1 GENERAL**

1.1 SUMMARY

> This section describes the overall operation and maintenance
> requirements for the expansion of the discharge system during
> construction and before the Recharge Bed system shakedown, testing,
> and initial operation and maintenance. Some notable requirements to
> this section are: Operation & Maintenance Data, Maintenance Schedule,
> Pollution Liability Insurance, Sampling & Analysis Plan, Checkout
> Plan, and Operation & Maintenance Manual. Present information in
> sufficient detail to clearly explain user Operation & Maintenance
> (O&M) requirements at the system equipment, component, and subassembly
> level. Submit in accordance with Section 01330, "Submittal
> Procedures". The O&M requirements for the Recharge Bed will be
> incorporated into the current O&M Manual for the ground water
> treatment system of Areas B, D, 41, and E at the FAA facility.

1.2 REFERENCES

> The publication listed below forms a part of this specification to the
> extent referenced. The publication is referred to in the text by the
> basic designation only.

DEFENSE LOGISTICS AGENCY (DLA)

DLA H4/H8 Federal Cataloging Handbook Commercial and Government Entity
(CAGE), Sections A and B, United States and Canada, Sections C and D,
NATO, Supply Code for Manufacturers

> ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA)
>
> EPA SW-846 (Rev 0; Updated I, II, IIA, IIB and III) Test Methods for
> Evaluating Solid Waste (Vol IA, IB, IC and II)
>
> NEW JERSEY DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION (NJDEP)
>
> NJDEP Field Sampling Procedures Manual
>
> NJDEP NJAC 7:26E Technical Requirements for Site Remediation

1.3 DEFINITIONS

> NJPDES-DGW Permit
>
> New Jersey Pollution Discharge Elimination System Discharge to Ground
> Water Permit. The existing NJPDES-DGW Permit for this site requires
> analysis of ground water and treatment system effluent for VOCs, SVOCs
> and Priority Pollutant Metals.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

1.4.1 SD-08, Statements, GA

a\. Pollution Liability Insurance

1.4.1.1 Submission of Pollution Liability Insurance

> Three (3) copies of proof of pollution liability insurance in the
> amount of \$2,000,000.00 and show coverage by the insurance carrier
> that the FAA is additional named insured. The submittal shall occur
> thirty (30) days prior to the start‑up or annual renewal date.

1.4.2 SD-09, Reports, GA

a\. Operation and Maintenance Data

b\. Maintenance Schedule

c\. Ground Water Sampling and Analysis Plan

d\. Checkout Plan

1.4.2.1 Submission of Operation & Maintenance Data

> Submit operation and maintenance (O&M) data which is specifically
> applicable to this contract and a complete and concise depiction of
> the provided equipment or product. Data shall include items such as:
> manufacturer's manuals, equipment specifications, and drawings. Data
> containing extraneous information to be sorted through to find
> applicable instructions will not be accepted. See paragraph 1.5. The
> data will be incorporated into the current O&M data for the ground
> water treatment system.

1.4.2.2 Submission of Maintenance Schedule

> Submit a maintenance schedule which specifically and clearly
> identifies procedures, recommended requirements and techniques for
> preventative and scheduled maintenance to minimize corrective
> maintenance and repair. See paragraph 1.6.
>
> Once the recharge system is in operation, submittal of completed
> reports, "Monthly Scheduled Maintenance Checklist" to the FAA will be
> required. Three (3) copies of these monthly scheduled maintenance
> checklists with items checked that were performed, are required. Where
> parts or components are worn, damaged and replaced, they shall be
> noted on the checklist. Copies of all receipts for parts, supplies and
> labor shall be furnished with the checklist. Notes on continually used
> supplies such as oils and lubricants shall be kept with the list. The
> checklist for the Recharge Bed shall be coordinated with the existing
> requirements for the ground water treatment system. The checklist
> shall be signed by the system operator and the system manager.

1.4.2.3 Submission of Ground Water Sampling & Analysis Plan

> Within 30 days after the effective date of this contract, the
> Contractor shall submit to the FAA a Ground Water Sampling and
> Analysis Plan which specifically and clearly identifies procedures and
> techniques for ground water sampling at the SITE. The plan shall be
> consistent with existing NJPDES-DGW Permit requirements for the ground
> water treatment system. The sampling plan shall be site specific and
> address the following items:

a\. sample locations and sample collection;

b\. ground water elevation data collection;

c\. equipment decontamination procedures;

d\. sample preservation and shipment;

e\. sample chain of custody;

f\. sample analytical methods; and

g\. analytical deliverable packages.

> The sampling plan shall address the expanded discharge system at the
> Recharge Bed and shall be incorporated into the current Sampling and
> Analysis Plan for the ground water treatment system. The sampling plan
> shall be developed in accordance with the methods and procedures as
> specified in the latest edition of the [NJDEP's Field Sampling
> Procedures Manual.]{.underline}

1.4.2.4 Submission of Checkout Plan

> Thirty (30) days prior to system checkout, the Contractor shall
> prepare a Checkout Plan that describes how all equipment and controls
> will be tested. Describe criteria that will be utilized to determine
> acceptability of test results for equipment or controls. Include all
> applicable manufacturer's requirements. Describe methodology that will
> be used to calibrate all instrumentation. Describe methodology that
> will be used to ensure that all components function within the full
> required operating range and that all energized components function
> within acceptable manufacturer's operating parameters.

1.4.3 SD-19, Operation & Maintenance Manuals GA

> Operation and Maintenance Manuals described within paragraph entitled
> "Operation and Maintenance Manuals" in Part 3 of this section. The
> Manuals will be incorporated into the existing documents for the
> ground water treatment system.

1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA REQUIREMENTS

1.5.1 General

1.5.1.1 Quantity

> Submit five copies of the manufacturers' information specified herein
> for the components, assemblies, subassemblies, attachments, and
> accessories. The items for which O&M data is required are listed in
> the technical sections which specify that particular item.

1.5.1.2 Package Content

> For each product, system, or piece of equipment requiring submission
> of O&M data, submit the package required in the individual technical
> section for the specific item referenced. Package content shall be as
> required in the paragraph entitled, \"Schedule of Operations and
> Maintenance Data Packages."

1.5.1.3 Delivery

> Submit O&M data to the Resident Engineer (RE) for review and
> acceptance; submit data specified for a given item 30 calendar days
> prior to delivery of the item to the contract site.

1.5.1.4 Changes to Submittals

> Manufacturer‑originated changes or revisions to submitted data shall
> be furnished by the Contractor if a component of an item is so
> affected subsequent to acceptance of the O&M data. Changes, additions,
> or revisions required by the RE for final acceptance of submitted
> data, shall be submitted by the Contractor within 30 calendar days of
> the notification of this change requirement.

1.5.2 Operating Instructions

> Include specific instructions, procedures, and illustrations for the
> following phases of operation:

a\. Safety Precautions

b\. Operator Prestart

c\. Startup, Shutdown, and Post-shutdown Procedures

d\. Normal Operations

e\. Emergency Operations

f\. Operator Service Requirements

g\. Environmental Conditions

1.5.2.1 Safety Precautions

> List personnel hazards and equipment or product safety precautions for
> all operating conditions.

1.5.2.2 Operator Prestart

Include requirements to set up and prepare each system for use.

1.5.2.3 Startup, Shutdown, and Post-shutdown Procedures

> Include a control sequence for each of these operations.

1.5.2.4 Normal Operations

> Include control diagrams with data to explain operation and control of
> systems and specific equipment.

1.5.2.5 Emergency Operations

> Include emergency procedures for equipment malfunctions to permit a
> short period of continued operation or to shut down the equipment to
> prevent further damage to systems and equipment. Include emergency
> shutdown instructions for fire, explosion, spills, or other
> foreseeable contingencies. Provide guidance on emergency operations of
> all utility systems including valve locations and portions of systems
> controlled.

1.5.2.6 Operator Service Requirements

> Include instructions for services to be performed by the operator such
> as lubrication, adjustments, and inspection.

1.5.2.7 Environmental Conditions

> Include a list of environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and
> other relevant data) which are best suited for each product or piece
> of equipment and describe conditions under which equipment should not
> be allowed to run.

1.5.3 Schedule of Operation and Maintenance Data Packages

> Furnish the O&M data packages specified in individual technical
> sections. The required information for each O&M data package is as
> follows:

1.5.3.1 Data Package 1

> Data package #1 would be used for a simple item requiring only simple
> maintenance and replacement.
>
> a\. Safety precautions
>
> b\. Maintenance and repair procedures
>
> c\. Warranty information
>
> d\. Contractor information

1.5.3.2 Data Package 2

> Data package #2 would be used for an item that is less simple; having
> a motor or simple sequence of operation.
>
> a\. Safety precautions
>
> b\. Normal operations
>
> c\. Environmental conditions

d\. Lubrication data

e\. Preventive maintenance plan and schedule

f\. Maintenance and repair procedures

g\. Removal and replacement instructions

h\. Spare parts and supply list

> i\. Parts identification
>
> j\. Warranty information
>
> k\. Contractor information

1.5.3.3 Data Package 3

> Data package #3 would be used for a complex piece of equipment; having
> a complex troubleshooting method or sequence of operation.
>
> a\. Safety precautions
>
> b\. Normal operations
>
> c\. Emergency operations
>
> d\. Environmental conditions
>
> e\. Lubrication data
>
> f\. Preventive maintenance plan and schedule
>
> g\. Troubleshooting guides and diagnostic techniques
>
> h\. Wiring diagrams and control diagrams
>
> i\. Maintenance and repair procedures
>
> j\. Removal and replacement instructions
>
> k\. Spare parts and supply list
>
> l\. Parts identification
>
> m\. Warranty information
>
> n\. Testing equipment and special tool information
>
> o\. Contractor information

1.5.3.4 Data Package 4

> Data package #4 would be used for an extremely complex piece of
> equipment, or complex troubleshooting sequence, and require frequent
> operator attention.
>
> a\. Safety precautions
>
> b\. Operator prestart
>
> c\. Startup, shutdown, and post-shutdown procedures
>
> d\. Normal operations
>
> e\. Emergency operations
>
> f\. Operator service requirements
>
> g\. Environmental conditions
>
> h\. Lubrication data
>
> i\. Preventive maintenance plan and schedule
>
> j\. Troubleshooting guides and diagnostic techniques
>
> k\. Wiring diagrams and control diagrams
>
> l\. Maintenance and repair procedures
>
> m\. Removal and replacement instructions
>
> n\. Spare parts and supply list
>
> o\. Corrective maintenance man‑hours
>
> p\. Parts identification
>
> q\. Warranty information
>
> r\. Personnel training requirements
>
> s\. Testing equipment and special tool information
>
> t\. Contractor information

1.5.3.5 Data Package 5

> Data package #5 is similar to data package #2, but requires slightly
> less information.
>
> a\. Safety precautions
>
> b\. Environmental conditions
>
> c\. Preventive maintenance plan and schedule
>
> d\. Troubleshooting guides and diagnostic techniques
>
> e\. Wiring and control diagrams
>
> f\. Maintenance and repair procedures
>
> g\. Spare parts and supply list
>
> h\. Warranty information

1.6 SUBMISSION OF MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

> Include the following information for preventive and scheduled
> maintenance to minimize corrective maintenance and repair.

1.6.1 Lubrication Data

> Include lubrication data, other than instructions for lubrication in
> accordance with paragraph entitled "Operator Service Requirements":
>
> a\. A table showing recommended lubricants for specific temperature
> ranges and applications;
>
> b\. Charts with a schematic diagram of the equipment showing
> lubrication points, recommended types and grades of lubricants, and
> capacities; and
>
> c\. A lubrication schedule showing service interval frequency.

1.6.2 Preventive Maintenance Plan and Schedule

> Include manufacturer's schedule for routine preventive maintenance,
> inspections, tests and adjustments required to ensure proper and
> economical operation and to minimize corrective maintenance and
> repair. Provide manufacturer's projection of preventive maintenance
> man‑hours on a daily, weekly, monthly, and annual basis.

1.6.3 Corrective Maintenance

> Include manufacturer's recommendations on procedures and instructions
> for correcting problems and making repairs.

1.6.3.1 Troubleshooting Guides and Diagnostic Techniques

> Include step‑by‑step procedures to promptly isolate the cause of
> typical malfunctions. Describe clearly why the checkout is performed
> and what conditions are to be sought. Identify tests or inspections
> and test equipment required to determine whether parts and equipment
> may be reused or require replacement.

1.6.3.2 Wiring Diagrams and Control Diagrams

> Wiring diagrams and control diagrams shall be point‑to‑point drawings
> of wiring and control circuits including factory‑field interfaces.
> Provide a complete and accurate depiction of the actual job specific
> wiring and control work. On diagrams number electrical and electronic
> wiring and pneumatic control tubing and the terminals for each type
> identically to actual installation numbering.

1.6.3.3 Maintenance and Repair Procedures

> Include instructions and list tools required to restore product or
> equipment to proper condition or operating standards.

1.6.3.4 Removal and Replacement Instructions

> Include step‑by‑step procedures and list required tools and supplies
> for removal, replacement, disassembly, and assembly of components,
> assemblies, subassemblies, accessories, and attachments. Provide
> tolerances, dimensions, settings and adjustments required.
> Instructions shall include a combination of text and illustrations.

1.6.3.5 Spare Parts and Supply Lists

> Include lists of spare parts and supplies required for maintenance and
> repair to ensure continued service or operation without unreasonable
> delays. Special consideration is required for facilities at remote
> locations. List spare parts and supplies that have a long lead time to
> obtain.

1.6.3.6 Corrective Maintenance Man‑Hours

> Include manufacturer's projection of corrective maintenance man‑hours.
> Corrective maintenance that requires participation of the equipment
> manufacturer shall be identified and tabulated separately.

1.6.4 Appendices

> Provide information required below and information not specified in
> the preceding paragraphs but pertinent to the maintenance or operation
> of the product or equipment. Include the following:

1.6.4.1 Parts Identification

> Provide identification and coverage for all parts of each component,
> assembly, subassembly, and accessory of the end items subject to
> replacement. Include special hardware requirements, such as
> requirement to use high‑strength bolts and nuts. Identify parts by
> make, model, serial number, and source of supply to allow reordering
> without further identification. Provide clear and legible
> illustrations, drawings, and exploded views to enable easy
> identification of the items. When illustrations omit the part numbers
> and description, both the illustrations and separate listing shall
> show the index, reference, or key number which will cross‑reference
> the illustrated part to the listed part. Parts shown in the listings
> shall be grouped by components, assemblies, and subassemblies.
>
> a\. Manufacturer's standard commercial practice: The parts data may
> cover more than one model or series of equipment, components,
> assemblies, subassemblies, attachments, or accessories, such as a
> master parts catalog, in accordance with the manufacturer\'s standard
> commercial practice.
>
> b\. Other than manufacturer's standard commercial practice: End item
> manufacturer may add a cross‑reference to implement components'
> assemblies and parts requirements when implementation in manual form
> varies significantly from the style, format, and method of
> manufacturer\'s standard commercial practice. Use the format in the
> following example:
>
> End Item Actual
>
> Manufacturer's Manufacturer's Name Actual Manufacturer
>
> [Alphanumeric Sequence]{.underline} [and FSCM]{.underline} [Part
> No.]{.underline}
>
> 100001 John Doe & Co. 00000 2000002

List FSCM in accordance with DLA H4/H8.

1.6.4.2 Warranty Information

> List and explain the various warranties and include the servicing and
> technical precautions prescribed by the manufacturers or contract
> documents to keep warranties in force.

1.6.4.3 Personnel Training Requirements

> Provide information available from the manufacturers to use in
> training designated personnel to operate and maintain the equipment
> and systems properly.

1.6.4.4 Testing Equipment and Special Tool Information

> Include information on test equipment required to perform specified
> tests and on special tools needed for the operation, maintenance, and
> repair of components.

1.6.4.5 Contractor Information

> Provide a list that includes the name, address, and telephone number
> of the General Contractor and each subcontractor installing the
> product or equipment. Include local representatives and service
> organizations most convenient to the project site. Provide the name,
> address, and telephone number of the product or equipment
> manufacturers.

1.7 SUBMISSION OF O&M MANUALS

1.7.1 Requirements

1.7.1.1 Quantity

> Submit five copies of the Operation and Maintenance Manual for the
> Recharge Bed to be incorporated into the current O&M Manual for the
> entire treatment facility.

1.7.1.2 Delivery

> Submit O&M manual to the RE for review or acceptance according to the
> following schedule:

a\. Outline: 90 days before System Checkout.

b\. Initial O&M Manual: 30 days before System Checkout.

1.8.2 System Startup, Shakedown, and Initial Operation and

Maintenance

> The management and operation of the recharge bed system (i.e. all
> management, maintenance, testing, and adjustments necessary to provide
> startup, shakedown and operation of the system) and the monitoring of
> ground water (both contaminants and level) after the system checkout
> is completed is **not part of this contract**.

**PART 2 PRODUCTS**

**PART 3 EXECUTION**

3.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

> Develop and implement an Operation and Maintenance Manual for the
> Recharge Bed, expanded sprinkler system, conveyance piping, and
> controls. The manual shall also include a periodic maintenance
> schedule and maintenance procedure, troubleshooting methods, MSDS, and
> safety issues. The O&M Manual for the Recharge Bed will be
> incorporated into the current O&M Manual for the ground water
> treatment system.

3.1.1 Initial Operation and Maintenance Manual

> Prepare an Initial Operation and Maintenance Manual which shall be
> used as a guide to plan startup during the shakedown period. Submit
> Initial O&M manual 30 days before System Checkout. Submit outline 90
> days before System Startup Checkout.

3.1.1.1 Manual contents:

> The Initial Operation and Maintenance Manual is subject to RE approval
> and shall contain the following information:
>
> a\. Description of normal operation and maintenance
>
> 1\. Description of operating conditions
>
> 2\. Description of tasks for operation
>
> 3\. Description of tasks for maintenance

4\. Frequency of each operation and maintenance task

b\. Description of potential operating problems

1\. Description and analysis of potential operating problems

2\. Sources of information regarding the problem

3\. Common remedies

> c\. Description of routine and existing NJDPES-DGW permit requirements
> and monitoring and laboratory testing
>
> 1\. Description of monitoring tasks
>
> 2\. Description of required laboratory tests and their implementation
>
> 3\. Required quality assurance/quality control (QA/QC)
>
> 4\. Schedule monitoring and testing frequency

5\. Additional monitoring and testing requirements

d\. Description of alternative operation and maintenance

> 1\. Alternative procedures to prevent undue hazard

2\. Analysis of vulnerability and additional resources

> 3\. Requirements should a failure occur
>
> e\. Safety plan
>
> 1\. Description of general precautions and equipment for site
> personnel

2\. Safety plans required in emergencies

> f\. Equipment maintenance
>
> 1\. General maintenance requirements and frequency
>
> 2\. Equipment record system
>
> 3\. Site and equipment maintenance

g\. Annual operation and maintenance budget

3.2 SYSTEM CHECKOUT

> Furnish a qualified system checkout team responsible for demonstrating
> proper operation of all system components.
>
> During checkout, test the function of all equipment and controls and
> perform any necessary instrument calibrations.
>
> Once Recharge Bed checkout has been accomplished and all systems are
> working to the satisfaction of the RE, petition the RE to accept the
> system and begin System Startup and Shakedown.

END OF SECTION

**SECTION 15011**

**MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS**

**PART 1 GENERAL**

1.1 REFERENCES

> The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
> extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the
> basic designation only.

AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)

> ASTM B 117 (1997) Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus
>
> U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)

29 CFR 1910.147 Control of Hazardous Energy (Lock Out/Tag Out)

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1.2.1 Material and Equipment Qualifications

> Provide materials and equipment that are standard products of
> manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products,
> which are of a similar material, design and workmanship. Standard
> products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use
> for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2‑year use shall include
> applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances
> and of similar size. The product shall have been for sale on the
> commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or
> brochures during the 2 year period.

1.2.2 Alternative Qualifications

> Products having less than a two‑year field service record will be
> acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for
> not less than 6000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturer's factory or
> laboratory tests, can be shown.

1.2.3 Service Support

> The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations.
> Submit a certified list of qualified permanent service organizations
> for support of the equipment which includes their addresses and
> qualifications. These service organizations shall be reasonably
> convenient to the equipment installation and able to render
> satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis
> during the warranty period of the contract.

1.2.4 Manufacturer's Nameplate

> Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the
> manufacturer\'s name, address, model number, and serial number
> securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the nameplate of the
> distributing agent will not be acceptable.

1.2.5 Modification of References

> In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory
> provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been
> substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in
> these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction," or words of
> similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer (CO) or Resident
> Engineer (RE).

1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

> Handle, store, and protect equipment and materials to prevent damage
> before and during installation in accordance with the manufacturer's
> recommendations, and as approved by the RE. Replace damaged or
> defective items.

1.4 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

1.4.1 Equipment Safety

> Provide positive means of locking out equipment so that equipment
> cannot be accidentally energized during maintenance procedures.
> Provide catwalks, maintenance platforms, and guardrails where required
> for safe operation and maintenance of equipment. Provide ladders or
> stairways to reach catwalks and maintenance platforms. Ensure that
> access openings leading to equipment are large enough to carry through
> routine maintenance items such as filters and tools.

1.4.2 Warning Sign

> Provide a permanent placard or sign at the entrance to confined spaces
> contained in the equipment. The sign shall warn personnel not to enter
> the space until the atmosphere inside has been tested and systems have
> been de‑energized.

1.4.3 Lockout of Energy Sources

> Provide appropriate lockout devices for energy isolating valves and
> for machines or other equipment to prevent unexpected start‑up or
> release of stored electrical, mechanical, hydraulic, pneumatic,
> thermal, chemical, or other energy in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.147.
> Lockout devices for valves shall provide a means of attachment to
> which, or through which, a lock can be affixed or shall have a locking
> mechanism built into it so that the valve cannot be moved from the
> lockout position until the lock is removed.

1.5 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

> Furnish motors, controllers, disconnects and contactors with their
> respective pieces of equipment. Motors, controllers, disconnects and
> contactors shall conform to and have electrical connections provided
> under DIVISION 16, "ELECTRICAL." Furnish internal wiring for
> components of packaged equipment as an integral part of the equipment.
> Extended voltage range motors will not be permitted. Controllers and
> contactors shall have a maximum of 120 volt control circuits, and
> shall have auxiliary contacts for use with the controls furnished.
> When motors and equipment furnished are larger than sizes indicated,
> the cost of additional electrical service and related work shall be
> included under the section that specified that motor or equipment.
> Power wiring and conduit for field installed equipment shall be
> provided under and conform to the requirements of DIVISION 16.

1.6 INSTRUCTION TO GOVERNMENT PERSONNEL

> When specified in other sections, furnish the services of competent
> instructors to give full instruction to the designated Government
> personnel in the adjustment, operation, and maintenance, including
> pertinent safety requirements, of the specified equipment or system.
> Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the
> installation and shall be trained in operating theory as well as
> practical operation and maintenance work. Instruction shall be given
> during the first regular work week after the equipment or system has
> been accepted and turned over to the Government for regular operation.
> The number of man‑days (8 hours per day) of instruction furnished
> shall be as specified in the individual section. When more than 4
> man‑days of instruction are specified, use approximately half of the
> time for classroom instruction. Use other half of the time for
> instruction with the equipment or system. When significant changes or
> modifications in the equipment or system are made under the terms of
> the contract, provide additional instruction to acquaint the operating
> personnel with the changes or modifications.

1.7 ACCESSIBILITY

> Install all work so that parts requiring periodic inspection,
> operation, maintenance, and repairs, are readily accessible.

1.8 VERIFICATION OF DIMENSIONS

> Coordinate the proper relation of the work to the building structure
> and to the work of all trades. Visit the premises and become familiar
> with the dimensions in the field, and advise the RE of any discrepancy
> before performing any work.

**PART 2 PRODUCTS**

> Not used.

**PART 3 EXECUTION**

Not used.

END OF SECTION

**SECTION 15060**

**VALVES AND PIPING APPURTENANCES**

**PART 1 GENERAL**

1.1 DESCRIPTION

> All materials supplied and the installation shall conform to the
> applicable standards referenced in paragraph 1.3 below.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

> All materials supplied and the installation shall conform to the
> applicable standards referenced. All materials provided shall be new.
>
> Provide materials and equipment that are standard products of
> manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products,
> which are of similar material design and workmanship. Standard
> products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use
> for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2 year use shall include
> applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances
> and of similar size.

1.3 REFERENCES

> The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
> extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the test by the
> basic designation only.
>
> AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)
>
> ANSI B31 Code for Pressure Piping
>
> ANSI B31.3 Process Piping
>
> ASME/ANSI B31.9 Building Service Piping
>
> AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
>
> ASTM A 126 Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings
>
> ASTM A 240 Standard Specification for Heat Resisting Chromium and
> Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure
> Vessels
>
> ASTM D 1784 Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride)
> (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds
>
> ASTM D 1785 Standard Specifications for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
> Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120.
>
> ASTM D 2464 Standard Specifications for Threaded Poly (Vinyl Chloride)
> (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80
>
> ASTM D 2466 Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
> Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40
>
> ASTM D 2657 Heat Fusion Joining Polyolefin Pipe and Fittings
>
> ASTM D 2564 Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl
> Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems
>
> ASTM D 3035 Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe
> (PR) Based on Controlled Outside Diameter
>
> ASTM D 3212 Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible
> Elastomeric Seals
>
> ASTM D3350 Polyethylene Plastic Pipe and Fittings Materials
>
> AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)
>
> AWWA C800 Underground Service Line Valves and Fittings
>
> AWWA C901 Polyethylene (PE) Pressure Pipe and Tubing, ½ Inch Through 3
> Inch, for Water Services

BUILDING OFFICIALS AND CODE ADMINISTRATORS INTERNATIONAL (BOCA)

> BOCA National Building Code (1996 or latest version in effect at time
> of construction).
>
> BOCA National Plumbing Code (1996 or latest version in effect at time
> of construction).
>
> BOCA National Mechanical Code (1996 or latest version in effect at
> time of construction).
>
> BOCA National Building Code (1996 or latest version in effect at time
> of construction).
>
> BOCA National Plumbing Code (1996 or latest version in effect at time
> of construction).
>
> BOCA National Mechanical Code (1996 or latest version in effect at
> time of construction).

THE PLASTIC PIPE INSTITUTE (PPI)

> TR-31 Underground Installation of Polyolefin Piping

1.4 SUBMITTALS

> Submit the following in accordance with section 01330, "Submittal
> Procedures".

1.  SD-01, Manufacturer's Catalog Data; GA

```{=html}
<!-- -->
```
a.  Combination Vacuum and Air Relief Valves

b.  Flow Control Valves

c.  Sprinkler System Components

d.  Gaskets not submitted with other component information

    2.  SD-04, Drawings; GA

```{=html}
<!-- -->
```
a.  Submit copies of manufacturer\'s literature and shop drawings for
    items in Article 1.4.1 and appurtenances not specifically listed in
    Article 1.4.1, which are not part of or integral to other pieces of
    equipment.

b.  Submit a plan showing the proposed location of all sprinkler heads
    for the Area B sprinkler system expansion.

1.4.3 SD-19, Addenda to Operation and Maintenance Instructions; GA

> The Contractor shall provide 6 copies of operation and maintenance
> instruction listing routine maintenance procedures, possible
> breakdowns and repairs, and trouble shooting guides for all items
> addressed in Sections 1.4.1 and 1.4.2. The instructions will be
> included as an addenda to the existing Operation and Maintenance Plan
> for the ground water treatment system. Refer to section 13999,
> "Operations and Maintenance Requirements".

1.5 EQUIPMENT TAGGING

All piping, valves and components shall be tagged.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINE

> Inspect materials delivered to site for damage; unload and store with
> minimum handling. Store materials on-site in enclosures or under
> adequate cover to prevent damage, protect materials not suitable for
> outdoor storage to prevent damage during periods of inclement weather,
> such as subfreezing temperatures, precipitation, and high winds. Store
> materials susceptible to deterioration by direct sunlight under cover
> and avoid damage due to high temperatures. Do not store materials
> directly on ground. If special precautions are required, prominently
> and legibly stencil instructions for such precautions on outside of
> equipment or its crating.

**PART 2 PRODUCTS**

2.1 VALVES

> Contractor shall furnish and install valves as indicated on drawings.
> All valves furnished under these specifications shall be product of a
> manufacturer who has had long experience in design of valves and whose
> products have proven reliable in service in similar installations over
> a reasonable period of years. Unless specified otherwise, all valves
> shall be of the same size as the line in which they are installed.

Piping shall be installed principally as shown on the drawings. Refer to
the drawings to ensure all required valves and instruments are provided.
In addition, provide whatever piping and fittings are necessary, whether
shown on the drawings or not, for a complete and working system. Provide
flanged connectors for all process valves, instruments, and sensors to
facilitate removal (except those items with end connections of 2 inches
or less may be threaded or provided with a threaded or socket union).

2.1.1 Combination Vacuum and Air Relief Valves

> Combination vacuum and air relief valves shall be standard single
> body, double orifice combination air valves and conforming to ASTM
> A126, with Buta-N seals and have threaded connections. Floats shall be
> constructed of heavy stainless steel, hermetically sealed, designed to
> withstand 1000 psi, and shall conform to ASTM A240.
>
> The larger orifice shall allow large volumes of air to discharge or
> enter during pipeline during filling and drainage, respectively. The
> smaller orifice shall be capable of continuously venting air pockets
> as they accumulate in the piping. The body inlet shall be baffled to
> protect the lower float from direct forces of rushing air and water to
> prevent premature valve shut-off. The top large orifice plug or float
> shall be protected in a similar manner for the same purpose. The
> Buna-N seat shall be fastened to the valve cover, without distortion,
> for drop tight shut-off. The top plug or float shall be center guided
> through hex bushings for positive shut-off. The valve shall be APCO
> (manufactured by APCO Williamette Valve and Primer Corporation)
> combination air valve Model 143C.

2.1.2 Control Valves

2.1.2.1 Flow Control/Isolation Valve

> Cast Iron body butterfly valve. Stainless steel shaft. Elastomeric
> body seat. Nylon Bearings. Valve disc shall be ASTM A -- 126 Class B
> cast iron with a 316 stainless steel edge. Fully open, the valve shall
> create no more friction than a 45 degree elbow. Minimum 150 psig
> working service. Provide curb box and valve turning handle with valve.

2.1.2.2 Throttle Valve (larger than 4\")

> The throttle valves shall be PVC butterfly valves sized the same size
> as the pipe. All solid thermoplastic butterfly valves sizes \> 4"
> through 16\" shall be constructed from PVC type I cell classification
> 12454. All valve seats and O-rings shall be Viton. Seat shall be a
> non-lenear type interlocked to valve body. Bolt hole patterns shall
> conform to ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 150. Disc shall be offset design with
> fully isolated Type 316L stainless steel stem and Type 316 stainless
> steel hardware. Valve bodies shall accept field installable lug
> inserts or shall be factory installed true lug type. Lugs shall be
> stainless steel or zinc plated steel. Valves shall be pressure rated
> at 150 psig for water at 73°F. Gear operators shall be worm gear
> design, self locking with diecast aluminum body.
>
> The throttle valve shall include an electric operator. The electric
> operator shall be provided complete with actuators, speed controls and
> accessories. The actuators shall operate on 120 VAC, 60 Hz with a 75
> percent duty cycle and shall be equipped with an AC thermal overload
> protector with automatic rest, reversing (bi-directional) operation
> for use with quarter-turn valves, or rotating equipment to full
> rotation. Gearing shall be a two-stage planetary, permanently
> lubricated self locking gear train with self-lubricating bearings;
> connections via male output staff. The startup torque shall be
> 120-foot pounds. The stall torque shall be 150 foot-pounds. Travel
> stop limit switches with cams, internal, independent, adjustable, and
> actuated by cams shall be mounted on the dive shaft. A side mounted
> hand turn wheel shall be provided for a manual override. The actuators
> shall have a NEMA 250 Type 4 enclosure with a corrosion resistant,
> baked epoxy finish as standard. The actuator shall operate in a
> temperature range of --40 to 150 degrees F. Actuators shall fail in
> last position unless otherwise indicated.
>
> Valves shall be capable of modulation based on signals from the valve
> position indicators. The positioners for modulating actuators shall
> control valve positions as a function of the input signals. The
> positioner shall operate on 120 VAC, 60 Hz voltage. Modulating valve
> positioners shall operate on a 4 to 20 mA input signal unless
> otherwise indicated. Corrosion resistant enclosures for positioners
> shall be splash and moisture-proof with gasketed covers.
>
> All actuated valves shall be supplied with a manual operator. The
> force in a manual operator shall not exceed 39.3 pounds under any
> operating condition, including initial breakaway. The operator shall
> be equipped with gear reduction when force exceeds 39.3 pounds. The
> manual operator shall be a self-locking type or shall be equipped with
> a self-locking device. A position indicator shall be supplied on
> quarter-turn valves. Worm and gear operators shall be a one-piece
> design with worm-gears of gear bronze material. Worm shall be hardened
> alloy steel with the threaded ground and polished. Traveling nut type
> operators shall have threaded steel reach rods with an internally
> threaded bronze or ductile iron nut.
>
> Exposed operators shall have galvanized and painted handwheels. Lever
> operators are allowed on quarter-turn valves less than 8 inches.
> Cranks shall be supplied on gear type operators.

2.2 Sprinkler/Irrigation System Components

2.2.1 Sprinkler/Irrigation System Above Grade Piping

> Provide 2" (SDR-17) and 1 ½" (SDR-11) flexible, smooth walled,
> pressure rated polyethylene (PE) piping and fittings manufactured to
> AWWA C901 and ASTM D3035. Pressure class shall be at least 100 psi.
> Provide Driscoplex Series 4100 piping and fittings, or approved
> equivalent.
>
> Piping and fittings shall be resistant to corrosion, aggressive soils,
> biological growth, ultraviolet light, and thermal degradation. The
> pipe shall be homogeneous throughout and free from visible cracks,
> holes, foreign materials, blisters, wrinkles and dents. The pipe shall
> be marked with an easily legible and permanent surface mark
> specifically identifying the manufacturer by name or trademark and the
> size, schedule, and type of pipe.
>
> All PE piping and fittings shall be joined by the heat fusion or
> electro fusion process, producing homogenous sealed, leak-tight joints
> in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and procedures.

2.2.2 Sprinkler/Irrigation System Zone Valves

> Each sprinkler/irrigation system zone valve shall be an electrical
> solenoid actuated, industrial-strength, glass-filled nylon globe valve
> rated for 200 psi, with self-cleaning scrubber, stainless steel
> screen, and nylon-reinforced rubber diaphragm. Valve shall be slow
> closing to prevent water hammer. Solenoid shall be 24V 50/60Hz cycle
> with a captured plunger and spring design for easy servicing. Valves
> shall be Rain Bird Model No. 200-PESB (2 inch size) or approved equal.

2.2.3 Sprinkler/Irrigation System Valve Boxes

> Valve boxes shall be of sufficient size to house the zone valve,
> fittings, and electrical conduit as shown on the Contract Drawings
> with at least two inches of space on all sides. The sides shall be
> corrugated with built in knockouts. Provide Rain Bird Jumbo Valve Box
> (12.1" H x 19.8" W x 26.3" L) or approved equal.

2.2.4 Sprinkler Heads

> Sprinkler heads shall be ¾" male NPT, full circle, heavy duty brass
> impact type, with stainless steel springs and fulcrum pin, chemically
> resistant washers, and dual nozzle ports. Nozzles shall be brass
> straight bore with 3/16" nozzle with vane. Broadcast radius shall be
> 50 feet at a flow rate of 6.40 gpm and 40 psi at the nozzle, with a
> trajectory angle of 27 degrees. Period of warranty shall be at least
> two years. Sprinkler heads shall be Rain Bird A10713-12.

2.2.5 Sprinkler Stands

> Provide portable sprinkler stands for the sprinkler heads to ensure
> adequate clearance of low lying vegetation and proper broadcast of
> spray. Stands shall consist of galvanized steel or aluminum parts,
> including an adjustable telescoping riser, support legs or stand, and
> all parts and fittings necessary to connect the sprinkler system
> piping to the bottom of the riser, and connect the sprinkler head to
> the top of the riser. Quick connect type fittings shall be used to
> allow rapid connection and disconnection of the sprinkler piping from
> the stand. Riser shall be adjustable or telescope to a height ranging
> from approximately 4 feet to 6 feet. The diameter of the riser for
> shall be no less than sprinkler head bearing size and no greater than
> the diameter of the sprinkler system piping to be connected to the
> bottom of the riser.
>
> Sprinkler stand shall remain stable, without tipping, during full 360
> degree rotation of sprinkler head operating at the intended maximum
> pressure and flow rate, and during high winds.
>
> Sprinkler stands shall be either be of the commercially fabricated
> type available from such manufacturers or vendors as Wade
> Manufacturing Co., Larchmont Engineering and Irrigation Supplies, or
> Jain Irrigation Systems Limited, or shall be custom fabricated by the
> contractor to meet the specified requirements. The Contractor should
> be aware that lead times may vary significantly depending on the
> supplier.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS & FITTINGS

2.3.1 Quick Connects

> Quick connects shall be aluminum with Viton gaskets as manufactured by
> Cam-Lok or approved equal. Provide caps for male end connections and
> plugs for female end-connections.

2.3.2 Hose Connections

> Hose connections shall be as manufactured by OPW, or approved equal.

2.4 IDENTIFICATION TAGS AND PLATES

> Provide valves with tags or plates numbered and stamped for their
> usage. Plates and tags shall be of brass or nonferrous materials and
> shall be mounted or attached to the valve.

**PART 3 EXECUTION**

3.1 INSTALLATION

3.1.1 No defective materials shall be used. Any piece discovered to be
defective shall be removed and replaced by a sound and satisfactory
piece.

3.1.2 Any material showing a crack and which has received a severe blow
that may have caused an incipient fracture, even though no such fracture
can be seen, shall be marked as rejected and removed at once from work.

3.1.3 All materials shall be cleaned of all debris and dirt before being
used and shall be kept clean until accepted in completed work.

3.1.4 Materials shall be accurately installed to required lines and
grades. Care shall be taken to preserve a good alignment.

3.1.5 All components shall be installed in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations. All joints shall be made in clean dry
conditions and in strict accordance with manufacturer\'s
recommendations.

3.1.6 All components shall be installed principally as shown on the
drawings. Refer to the drawings to ensure all required valves,
instruments and sensors, as well as associated appurtenances are
provided. In addition, provide whatever piping and fittings are
necessary, whether shown on the drawings or not, for a complete and
working system. Provide flanged connectors for all process valves,
instruments, and sensors to facilitate removal (except those items with
end connections of 2 inches or less may be threaded or provided with a
threaded or socket union).

3.1.7 The Contractor shall use appropriate fittings to prevent kinks or
other restrictions in the pipe. All resulting joints shall be
watertight.

3.1.8 Provide facilities for lowering components into position. Do not
drop or dump fittings, valves, or any other piping material into
manholes. Cut pipe accurately to measurements established at the site
and work into place without springing or forcing. Replace pipe or
fitting that does not allow sufficient space for proper component
installation. Support components at their proper elevation and grade;
ensure firm and uniform support.

END OF SECTION

**SECTION 16010**

**GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK**

**PART 1 GENERAL**

1.0 REFERENCES

A. Refer to the GENERAL REQUIREMENTS and applicable parts of DIVISION 1
for other general requirements.

1\. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS and DIVISION 1 paragraphs may be repeated in
other Specification Sections within this Division for emphasis or for
inclusion of more stringent/additional related requirements. Such
repetition shall NOT be construed to reduce the requirements of those
Divisions NOR to eliminate other requirements under those Divisions.

B. Refer to other Sections of this Division for detailed specifications
on the work of this Division.

1.2 INTENT

A. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to require finished work,
tested and ready for operation.

B. It is not intended that Contract Documents show every pipe, wire,
conduit, fitting and appurtenance; however, such parts as may be
necessary to complete the systems in accordance with best trade practice
and Code requirements and to Resident Engineer's (RE) satisfaction shall
be deemed to be included.

C. Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general arrangement of
systems and work included in the Contract. Contractor shall confirm all
clearances, elevations, equipment layout, equipment sizes, etc., based
on actual Contractor proposed components and installation.

1.3 . EXAMINATION OF SITE AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. Before submitting prices or beginning work, thoroughly examine the
site and the Contract Documents.

B. No claim for extra compensation will be recognized if difficulties
are encountered which would have been revealed by examination of site
conditions and Contract Documents prior to executing Contract.

C. Where discrepancies occur within Contract Documents, notify the RE,
in writing, of discrepancy and request clarification. Until notified of
RE's decision, include item or arrangement of better quality, greater
quantity or higher cost in Contract price.

1\. For material, device and equipment identified on Contract Drawings
by manufacturer and model: check Specification for ancillary
requirements such as pilot lights or alarms, and include same with
furnished item. If Specifications require different model, notify RE of
discrepancy and request clarification.

D. Notify RE, in writing, of materials and apparatus believed to be
omitted, inadequate or unsuitable, or in violation of laws, ordinances,
rules or regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. In absence of
such written notice, it is mutually agreed that bid price for work under
each Section has included the cost of items required for acceptable
satisfactory functioning of entire system.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Where more than one material, item, or grade is listed in same
paragraph, first one named is preferred choice.

B. The following terms are used in this Division and are defined as
follows:

1\. "Indicated", "shown", "noted", "scheduled", "specified": These terms
are a cross‑reference to graphics, notes or schedules on the Drawings,
to other paragraphs or schedules in the Specifications, and to similar
means of recording requirements in Contract Documents. NO limitation of
location is intended except as specifically noted.

2\. "Directed", "requested", "authorized", "selected", "required",
"permitted": Where not otherwise explained, these terms mean "directed
by the RE", "requested by the RE", etc. However, NO such implied meaning
will be interpreted to extend the RE's responsibility into Contractor's
area of construction supervision.

3\. "Provide": To furnish and install, ready for safe and regular
operation the item, material or service indicated.

4\. "Furnish": To purchase, acquire and deliver to the site, complete
with related accessories.

5\. "Install": To erect, mount and connect completely, by acceptable
methods.

6\. "Work": Labor, materials, equipment, apparatus, controls and
accessories required for proper and complete installation.

7\. "Concealed": Embedded in masonry or other construction; or installed
in furred spaces, trenches or crawl spaces; or installed within double
partitions or hung ceilings; or in enclosures.

8\. "Exposed": Visible to building occupants, excluding mechanical room
and utility tunnel locations.

9\. "Acceptable equivalent" or "Equal": Of weight, size, design,
capacity and efficiency to meet requirements specified and shown, and of
acceptable manufacture, as determined in the opinion of the RE.

10\. "Acceptable": Acceptable, as determined in the opinion of the RE.

11 "Contractor": General Contractor.

12 "Named" Product: Manufacturer's name for product, as recorded in
published documents of latest issue as of date of Contract Documents.
Obtain RE's permission before using products of later or earlier model.

C. Standards, specifications and tests of following technical societies,
organizations and governmental bodies, as referenced in Contract
Documents, are hereby made part of Contract Documents.

1\. IES: Illuminating Engineering Society.

2\. ANSI: American National Standards Institute

3\. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials

4\. EPA: Environmental Protection Agency

5\. FSSC: Federal Specification

6\. IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

7\. IRI: Industrial Risk Insurers

8\. ISO: Insurance Services Office

9\. NBS: National Bureau of Standards

10\. NEC: National Electrical Code.

11 NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturers Association

12 NFPA: National Fire Protection Association

13\. NSC: National Safety Council

14\. OSHA: Occupational Safety and Health Administration

15\. UL: Underwriters Laboratories

16\. FAA: US Federal Aviation Administration

17\. FED. SPECS.: Federal Specifications

18\. CODE: Codes and regulations of the Federal, State and local
governments and of utility companies having jurisdiction, as
appropriate.

D. Use of singular or plural reference form in these Specifications
shall not be construed to limit number of units required. Specifications
are intended to define quality and performance characteristics; quantity
of units supplied shall be as needed to meet requirements as specified
and as shown on Contract Documents.

1.5 PERMITS, LAWS, ORDINANCES AND CODES

A. Contractor shall obtain and pay for all permits, inspections,
licenses and certificates required for work under this Division.

B. Complete Utility connections as indicated or needed, extension to
Project, metering as required, and connection to building systems,
including:

1\. Apply for all services and pay for all fees, assessments and charges
of the Utility for each connection, all in a timely manner and according
to the Project Schedule.

2\. Provide and install all metering equipment and accessories as
required by Utility. Install entire service in accordance with the
Utility's requirements or other applicable regulation.

3\. Coordinate with Utility to determine scope of work provided by
Utility and the part provided by Contractor so that a complete Utility
connection is made.

4\. Schedule all work required by utility companies in order to maintain
project schedule.

C. Contractor shall pay utility company charges associated with work of
this Division.

D. Contractor shall comply with laws, ordinances, rules and regulations
of local, state and federal authorities having jurisdiction; and shall
comply with rules and regulations of National Board of Fire
Underwriters, National Electrical Code and local utility companies.

E. Contract Documents shall govern whenever they are more stringent than
Code requirements.

1.6 SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTALS

A. Prepare and submit Shop Drawings through the Contractor to the RE for
review.

B. The selection and intention to use a product specified by name shall
NOT excuse the need for timely submission of shop drawings for that
product.

C. Prior to submitting shop drawings, submit for review preliminary list
of intended or proposed manufacturers for all items for which shop
drawings are required.

D. Submission of shop drawings of an unnamed manufacture or shop
drawings at variance with the Contract Documents is NOT a proper request
for substitution.

E. Samples that are submitted in lieu of shop drawings shall be clearly
identified and shall be submitted in duplicate. Only one sample will be
returned and that accepted sample shall be kept available at appropriate
job site office. Accepted sample retained by RE will be kept available
at RE's home office.

F. Submittals shall include the following information:

1\. Descriptive and product data necessary to verify compliance with
Contract Documents.

2\. Manufacturer's specifications including materials of construction,
metal gauge, thickness and finish.

3\. Certified dimensional drawings including clearances required for
maintenance or access.

4\. Performance data, ratings, operating characteristics, and operating
limits.

5\. Electrical ratings and characteristics.

6\. Wiring and control diagrams, where applicable.

7\. Certifications requested, including UL label or listing.

8\. List of accessories which are required but are NOT being provided by
the product manufacturer or are NOT being furnished under this Section.
Identify the Section(s) under which the accessories are being furnished.

G. In addition, submittals shall be clearly marked for the following:

1\. Specification Section and Paragraph, or Drawing
Schedule/Note/Detail/etc., where equipment is specified.

2\. Equipment or fixture identification corresponding to that used in
Contract Documents.

3\. Accessories and special or non‑standard features and materials which
are being furnished.

1.7 PRODUCT SELECTION

A. Contractor's options for selecting products are limited by Contract
Document requirements and governing regulations and are NOT controlled
by industry traditions or procedures experienced by Contractor on
previous construction projects. Required procedures include, but are NOT
necessarily limited to, following various methods of specifying:

1\. Single Product Manufacturer Named: Provide product indicated.

2\. Two or More Manufacturers' Products Named: Provide one of the named
products, at Contractor's option, but excluding products which do NOT
comply with requirements.

3\. "Acceptable equivalent" or "Or Equal": Where named products are
accompanied by this term or words of similar effect, provide one of
named products or proposed substitute products. Substitute products must
meet all the requirements of the named produce. The Contractor is
responsible for ensuring the substitute product is acceptable in
accordance with this requirement prior to submitting the product for
approval.

4\. Standards, Codes and Regulations: Where specification requires only
compliance with a standard, code or regulation, Contractor may select
any product which complies with requirements of that standard, code or
regulation.

5\. Performance Requirements: Provide products which comply with
specific performances indicated and which are recommended by
manufacturer (in published product literature or by individual
certification) for application intended. Overall performance of product
is implied where product is specified with only certain specific
performance requirements.

6\. Prescriptive Requirements: Provide products which have been produced
in accordance with prescriptive requirements using specified materials
and components, and complying with specified requirements for
fabricating, finishing, testing and other manufacturing processes.

7\. Visual Matching: Where matching with an established material is
required, RE's judgement of whether proposed product matches established
material shall be final.

8\. "Color as Selected by RE": Unless otherwise noted, where specified
product requirements include "color as selected by RE" or words of
similar effect, the selection of manufacturer and basic product
complying with Contract Documents is Contractor's option and subsequent
selection of color is RE's option.

B. Inclusion by name, of more than one manufacturer or fabricator, does
NOT necessarily imply acceptability of standard products of those named.
All manufacturers, named or proposed, shall conform, with modification
as necessary, to criteria established by Contract Documents for
performance, efficiency, materials and special accessories.

1.8 ADDITIONAL SUBMITTALS REQUIREMENT

A. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01330,
"Submittal Procedures".

B. SD‑01, Manufacturer's Data

1\. Submittals for each manufactured item shall be current
manufacturer's descriptive literature of cataloged products, equipment
drawings, diagrams, performance and characteristic curves, and catalog
cuts.

C. SD‑13 Certificates

1\. Certificates of Compliance

Submit manufacturer's certifications as required on products, materials,
finish, and equipment indicated in the technical sections.
Certifications shall be documents prepared specifically for this
contract. Preprinted certifications and copies of previously submitted
documents will not be acceptable. The manufacturer's certifications
shall name the appropriate products, equipment, or materials and the
publication specified as controlling the quality of that item.
Certification shall not contain statements to imply that the item does
not meet requirements specified, such as "as good as"; "achieve the same
end use and results as materials formulated in accordance with the
referenced publications"; or "equal or exceed the service and
performance of the specified material." Certifications shall simply
state that the item conforms to the requirements specified. Certificates
shall be printed on the manufacturer\'s letterhead and shall be signed
by the manufacturer's official authorized to sign certificates of
compliance.

2\. Publication Compliance

Where equipment or materials are specified to conform to industry and
technical society publications of organizations such as American
National Standards Institute (ANSI), American Society for Testing and
Materials (ASTM), and Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL), submit proof
of such compliance. The label or listing by the specified organization
will be acceptable evidence of compliance. In each of the publications
referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory, as
though the word "shall" had been substituted for "should" wherever it
appears. Interpret references in these publications to the "authority
having jurisdiction," or words of similar meaning, to mean the RE. In
lieu of the label or listing, submit a certificate from an approved
independent testing organization, adequately equipped and competent to
perform such services, stating that the item has been tested in
accordance with the specified organization's test methods and that the
item conforms to the specified organization's publication.

1.9 INSTRUCTION TO GOVERNMENT PERSONNEL

A. Where indicated in the technical sections, furnish the services of
competent instructors to give full instruction to Government personnel
in the adjustment, operation, and maintenance of systems and equipment,
including pertinent safety requirements as required. Each instructor
shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation and
shall be trained in operating theory as well as practical operation and
maintenance work. Instruction shall be given during the first regular
work week after the equipment or system has been accepted and turned
over to the Government for regular operation. The number of man-days (8
hours) of instruction furnished shall be as specified in each individual
section.

1.10 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Furnish and keep on the job at all times, one complete and separate
set of Contract Documents of the Electrical work.

B. As work progresses, record changes, revisions and additions to
Architectural and Electrical work clearly, neatly, accurately and
promptly. Items to be indicated include but are not limited to:

1.  Dimensional change

2.  Revision to Drawing detail

3.  Location and depth of underground utility

4.  Revision to conduit routing

5.  Revision to electrical circuitry

6.  Actual equipment location

7.  Duct size and routing

8.  Location of concealed internal utility

9.  Changes made by Change Order

10. Details not on original Contract Drawing

11. Information on concealed elements which would be difficult to
    identify or measure later

C. Indicate daily progress on these prints by coloring in the various
lines, fixtures, apparatus and associated appurtenances as they are
erected.

D. Approval of requisition for payment for work installed will NOT be
given unless supported by record prints as required above.

E. At the conclusion of work, prepare record CAD drawings with
accompanying electronic files. Submit record drawings for review by RE.
Refer to Division 1, General Requirements for further requirements.

1.11 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Submit for review operating and maintenance manuals for each system
or piece of equipment, at least two weeks prior to request for
acceptance of same. Upon acceptance, furnish six copies of each manual
(or greater quantity if otherwise specified under Division 1) to
Resident Engineer (RE). Operating and maintenance manual shall include:

1\. Description of Unit (System) and Component Parts, including
function, normal operating characteristics and limiting conditions,
performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete
nomenclature and manufacturer's number for replaceable parts.

2\. Operating Procedures, including start‑up, break‑in, routine and
normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown
and emergency instructions; summer and winter operating instructions;
and any special operating instructions.

3\. Maintenance Procedures, including routine operations, guide to
trouble‑shooting; disassembly, repair and reassembly; alignment,
adjusting and checking; servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of
lubricants; manufacturer\'s installation and maintenance bulletins and
related information.

4\. Sequence of Operation and Control Diagrams, corrected for as‑built
conditions.

5\. Parts List, including illustrations, assembly drawings and diagrams
required for maintenance, predicted life of parts subject to wear, and
recommendations for stocking spare parts.

6\. Copies of accepted shop drawings, charts and diagrams.

7\. Names, addresses and telephone numbers of manufacturer's
representative and service company.

8\. Other data, as required under pertinent Sections of these
Specifications.

9\. Letters from each manufacturer certifying that his equipment was
properly installed and is operating in accordance with manufacturer's
intent.

1.12 GUARANTEE

A. Furnish standard manufacturers' guarantees for work under this
Division. Such guarantees shall be in addition to, and NOT in lieu of,
other liabilities under the law or by other provisions of the Contract
Documents.

B. Materials, equipment and workmanship shall carry the standard
warranty against defects in material and workmanship. Failure which may
develop due to defective or improper material, equipment, workmanship or
design shall be made good, forthwith, by and at the expense of the
Contractor, including damage done to areas, materials and other systems
resulting from this failure.

C. Guarantee that all elements of the systems are of sufficient capacity
to meet the specified performance requirements as set forth in Contract
Documents.

D. Upon receipt of notice from RE of a failure of system(s) or
component(s) during the guarantee period, replace affected components
within reasonable time period at no additional cost.

E. Guarantee period shall extend for one year from Date of Substantial
Completion.

F. Before final request for payment, furnish written guarantee covering
above requirements.

**PART 2 PRODUCTS**

2.1 GENERAL PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

A. Products shall be undamaged and unused at time of installation and
shall be complete with accessories, trim, finish, safety guards and
other devices and details needed for complete installation and for
intended use.

B. Where available, products shall be standard products of types which
have been produced and used previously and successfully on other
projects and in similar applications.

C. Labels and stamps which are required for observation after
installation shall be located on accessible surfaces which, in occupied
spaces, are NOT conspicuous. Other labels and stamps shall be located on
concealed surfaces.

**PART 3 EXECUTION**

3.1 . ARRANGEMENT OF WORK

A. Consult Architectural Contract Drawings and Details for proposed
locations of fixtures and equipment. If proposed location is not given,
obtain information from RE. Verify measurements in field. Base
measurements on established benchmarks.

B. Install work as closely as possible to layouts shown on Contract
Drawings. Modify work as necessary to:

1\. Provide maximum possible headroom and space clearance on each side.

2\. Provide adequate clearance and ready access to all parts of the
work, for inspection, operation, safe maintenance and repair, and code
conformance.

3\. Coordinate and arrange work to avoid conflicts with work of other
trades, to avoid unnecessary cutting and patching, and as needed for
satisfactory space conditions shown on coordination drawing submittals.

4\. Where space appears inadequate, consult RE before proceeding with
installation.

C. Work shall present a neat coordinated appearance.

3.2 COORDINATION

A. Examine Contract Documents and coordinate with Contractor and other
trades as necessary to facilitate the progress of the work.

B. Each trade shall keep Contractor and other trades fully informed as
to shape, size, and locations of openings, chases, equipment, panels,
access doors, sleeves, inserts and anchor bolts required; whether
temporary or permanent. Coordinate sizes, depths, fill and bedding
requirements with excavation trades. Give sufficient advance notice so
that coordination may be completed in advance. If information is not
furnished in proper and timely fashion, the trade involved shall do own
cutting and patching or have same done by Contractor, without additional
cost to FAA.

C. Particular emphasis is placed on timely installation of major
apparatus and furnishing of other trades and Contractor with relevant
information.

D. Do NOT install a system until critical components of system and
related systems have been coordinated and applicable shop drawings have
been accepted.

3.3 WORKMANSHIP

A. Work covered under this Division shall be constructed and finished in
every respect in a workmanlike and substantial manner.

B. Equipment and materials shall be new, of first quality, selected and
arranged to fit properly into spaces indicated.

C. Obtain detailed information from manufacturer as to proper methods
for installation and connections. This includes such tests as equipment
manufacturer recommends. Where documentation regarding installation is
NOT obtainable, work shall be installed in accordance with best trade
practice.

1\. Unless specifically indicated otherwise on Contract Documents,
equipment and materials shall be installed in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations.

2\. Notify RE of conflicts between manufacturer's recommendations and
Contract Documents requirements, and request clarification before
proceeding with installation.

D. Where equipment, piping, ductwork, conduit, etc. is exposed, color of
finish or paint shall be as selected by RE.

3.4 OPERATION OF SERVICES AND UTILITIES

A. During the construction period and until finally inspected, tested
and accepted, maintain new services and utilities.

B. Shutdown of existing services and utilities shall, without exception,
be coordinated with the proper utility and with the RE as to date, time
of day, and duration.

1\. Notify RE of estimated duration of shutdown period at least ten days
in advance of date when shutdown is proposed. Approval of shutdown shall
be obtained from proper utility and RE, before any service is
interrupted.

2\. Work during shutdown period shall be arranged for continuous
performance, including overtime if required, to ensure that existing
operating services will be shut down only for time actually necessary to
complete connections.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Contractor shall be responsible for work and equipment until fully
inspected, tested and accepted. Carefully store materials and equipment
which are not immediately installed after delivery to site. Close open
ends of work with temporary covers or plugs during construction to
prevent entry of obstructing material or damaging water.

B. Protect work and material of other trades from damage that might be
caused by electrical work and make good damage thus caused.

3.6 IDENTIFICATION

A. Basic materials such as piping, tubing, sheet metal, insulation,
etc., shall have following information clearly printed on the material:
manufacturer's name, material grade, gauge, thickness, type, and data to
identify required methods of attachment; as applicable. Unmarked
material shall NOT be used.

B. Permanent nameplates shall be provided on each piece of
service‑connected or power‑operated equipment, on easily accessible
surface. Nameplate shall include product name, model number, serial
number, capacity, speed, ratings, and similar essential operating data.

1\. Manufacturer's nameplate, name, trademark and address shall be
attached permanently to equipment and material furnished. Nameplate
showing only distributor or Contractor will NOT be permitted.

2\. Unless otherwise specified or requested, letters and numbers shall
be ½- inch high.

3\. Attach nameplates with screws or rivets. Wherever covers of adjacent
units are interchangeable, attach nameplates to wall or backboard rather
than covers.

C. Identification labels shall be provided to number equipment according
to designations used in Contract Documents. Label shall be plastic
nameplate with letters and numbers 1-1/2-inches high. Furnish directory
indicating number, location and use of each item. After finish painting
is completed, apply identification label where it will be readily
visible from normal operating position on floor.

3.7 LUBRICATION

A. Equipment shall be furnished and installed so that lubrication points
are conveniently and readily accessible for maintenance. Make these
provisions by whatever means is appropriate: extended fittings, access
doors, equipment location, etc.

B. No equipment shall be operated for temporary service or for testing
purposes without proper lubrication. Items requiring lubrication shall
be left freshly and fully lubricated at time of substantial completion.

C. Prior to substantial completion, deliver to RE, along with itemized
list: one complete new set of special lubrication devices required for
servicing, such as grease guns, fittings and adapters.

3.8 ATTACHMENT OF SUPPORTS TO STRUCTURES

A. Equipment shall be securely attached to building or manhole structure
in acceptable manner. Attachments shall be of strong and durable nature.

B. Attachment of supports to roof decking is NOT permitted. Pipes,
ducts, boxes, etc. must be supported from bar joists or steel
construction or additional members spanning roof steel as determined by
structural engineer.

3.9 TESTS

A. Make final adjustments to equipment before testing. Manufacturer's
authorized representative shall verify proper installation and
adjustment prior to startup of major equipment; refer to paragraph
1.11.A.9.

B. Furnish labor, materials, instruments, supplies and services
necessary for testing required under this Division. Correct defects
appearing during tests, and repeat tests until no defects are disclosed.
Final tests shall be made in RE's presence.

C. Use true RMS ammeter to measure current, for equipment that may have
harmonic (non-linear) load component.

D. Notify RE of testing schedule at least 48 hours in advance of tests.

E. Perform specified tests and tests required by legal authorities and
by agencies having jurisdiction over this Work. Tests shall be performed
to the satisfaction of legal authorities, agencies having jurisdiction,
and RE.

F. Each piece of equipment, including motors and controls, shall be
operated continuously for minimum test period of one hour.

G. If manufacturer's startup services are specified under other Sections
in this Division, furnish services of factory-trained service
engineering representative to provide following. If manufacturer\'s
startup services are not required, Contractor shall furnish following
services.

1\. Inspection of equipment/system installation.

2\. Assistance in initial startup and adjustment of equipment; including
necessary time to achieve proper installation and adjustments.

3\. Instruction of FAA's staff; see paragraph 3.10, Instructions.

H. Upon completion of tests, demonstrate the following:

1\. Equipment and systems are installed and operating in accordance with
manufacturer's specifications and instructions and with Contract
Documents.

2\. Proper adjustment of equipment and systems.

3\. Systems are properly cleaned and free of contaminants.

4\. Systems are properly phase balanced.

5\. Circuits and motorized equipment are equipped with proper overload
protection and are not operating under overload.

6\. Instruments are recording properly.

3.10 INSTRUCTIONS

A. Arrange for each installer of work requiring continuing maintenance
or operation, to meet with FAA's personnel at project site and instruct
them in the operation and maintenance. Include instruction by
manufacturer's representatives where installers are not expert in the
required procedures. Instruction periods for all trades shall be minimum
of 8 hours total; refer to individual SECTIONS for further requirements.

B. Instruction shall include review of maintenance manuals, record
documentation, tools, spare parts and materials, lubricants, fuels,
identification system, control sequences, hazards, cleaning and similar
procedures and facilities.

C. Start‑up, shut down, emergency operations, noise and vibration
adjustment, safety, economy/efficiency adjustments, and similar
operations shall be demonstrated.

D. Applicable warranties shall be reviewed.

E. Procedures for routine maintenance shall be demonstrated at the
equipment involved, to ensure accessibility to components involved.

3.11 QUIET OPERATION

A. Unless shown otherwise, equipment and material provided as part of
the Work shall NOT produce sound level greater than 55 decibels (or
level required by Code, if more stringent) in adjacent occupied areas.
Sound level shall be as measured on A-weighting scale of sound level
meter or sound survey meter.

B. Methods described in ASHRAE guide and data books may be used to
determine sound level of equipment when total of background sound and
equipment sound exceeds the required minimum.

C. Contractor shall ensure that equipment and materials provided as part
of the Work do NOT produce excessive noise/vibration and do NOT transmit
excessive noise/vibration to occupied spaces. If objectionable
noise/vibration occurs, Contractor shall provide systems, devices, and
equipment necessary to eliminate objectionable noise/vibration at no
additional cost to FAA.

3.12 FINAL CLEANING

A. Clean each surface of each unit of work, to normal "clean" condition
expected for a first‑class building cleaning and maintenance program.
Comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning operations. The
following are examples, but not limitations, of cleaning required:

1\. Remove labels which are not required as permanent labels.

2\. Clean transparent materials, removing substances which are
noticeable as vision‑obscuring.

3\. Clean exposed hard‑surfaced finishes, until free of dust, stains,
films and similar noticeable substances.

4\. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment clean, remove
excess lubrication and other substances.

5\. Remove debris and surface dust from limited‑access spaces such as
plenums, shafts, and ceiling spaces.

6\. Clean lighting fixtures and lamps; removing dust, smudge marks and
protective wraps; so as to function with full efficiency.

END OF SECTION

**SECTION 16011**

**ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS**

**PART 1 GENERAL**

1.1 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS

> The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
> extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the
> basic designation only.
>
> FEDERAL SPECIFICATION (FED. SPEC.)
>
> L‑P‑387A & Int Am 2 Plastic Sheet, Laminated, Thermosetting (for
> Design Plates)
>
> AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)
>
> C501- 1 & C52.1 Selection Installation and Use of Electric Motors
>
> NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)
>
> ICS 6‑93 (R83) Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems
>
> ICS 2-322 MCC Wiring Class and Type
>
> NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
>
> 70B‑94 Electrical Equipment Maintenance; and
>
> 70- 99 National Electrical Code

1.2 APPLICATION

> This section applies to all sections of Division 16, "Electrical," of
> this project except as specified otherwise in each individual section.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

> The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01330,
> "Submittal Procedures".

1.3.1 SD-02, Manufacturer's Data

> Submittals for each manufactured item shall be current manufacturer's
> descriptive literature of cataloged products, equipment drawings,
> diagrams, performance and characteristic curves, and catalog cuts.

1.3.2 SD-04 Shop Drawings

> In addition to the requirements of the Contract Clauses, shop drawings
> shall meet the following requirements. Drawings shall be a minimum of
> 8.5 inches by 11 inches in size, except as specified otherwise.
> Drawings shall include and installation details of equipment
> indicating proposed location, layout and arrangement, accessories,
> piping, ductwork, and other items that must be shown to assure a
> coordinated installation. Drawings shall indicate adequate clearance
> for operation, maintenance, and replacement of operating equipment
> devices. If equipment is disapproved, revise drawings to show
> acceptable equipment and resubmit.

1.3.3 SD-13 Certificates

a\. Certificates of Compliance

> Submit manufacturer's certifications as required on products,
> materials, finish, and equipment indicated in the technical sections.
> Certifications shall be documents prepared specifically for this
> contract. Preprinted certifications and copies of previously submitted
> documents will not be acceptable. The manufacturer's certifications
> shall name the appropriate products, equipment, or materials and the
> publication specified as controlling the quality of that item.
> Certification shall not contain statements to imply that the item does
> not meet requirements specified, such as "as good as"; "achieve the
> same end use and results as materials formulated in accordance with
> the referenced publications"; or "equal or exceed the service and
> performance of the specified material." Certifications shall simply
> state that the item conforms to the requirements specified.
> Certificates shall be printed on the manufacturer's letterhead and
> shall be signed by the manufacturer's official authorized to sign
> certificates of compliance.

b\. Publication Compliance

> Where equipment or materials are specified to conform to industry and
> technical society publications of organizations such as American
> National Standards Institute (ANSI), American Society for Testing and
> Materials (ASTM), and Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL), submit
> proof of such compliance. The label or listing by the specified
> organization will be acceptable evidence of compliance. In each of the
> publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to
> be mandatory, as though the word "shall" had been substituted for
> "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in these
> publications to the "authority having jurisdiction," or words of
> similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer's Technical
> Representative (COTR). In lieu of the label or listing, submit a
> certificate from an approved independent testing organization,
> adequately equipped and competent to perform such services, stating
> that the item has been tested in accordance with the specified
> organization's test methods and that the item conforms to the
> specified organization\'s publication.

1.3.4 SD-19, Addenda to Operation and Maintenance Manuals

The Contractor shall submit operation and maintenance data. This data
will be included as an addenda to the current Operation and Maintenance
(O&M) manual for the existing ground water treatment system at Areas B,
41, D, and E at the FAA facility. The instructions shall include the
manufacturer's name, model number, number, service manual, parts list,
and brief description of all equipment and their basic operating
features. Six complete copies of maintenance instructions listing
routine maintenance procedures, possible breakdowns and repairs, and
trouble‑shooting guides. The instructions shall include as‑built
drawings of the piping layout, as installed. Include in the manual the
names, addresses, and telephone numbers of each subcontractor installing
the system or equipment and the local representatives for the system or
equipment. The manual shall include:

> a\. Internal and interconnecting wiring and control diagrams with data
> to explain detailed operation and control of the system or equipment.
>
> b\. Description of the function of each principal item of equipment.
>
> c\. Installation and maintenance instructions.
>
> d\. Safety precautions.
>
> e Diagrams and illustrations.
>
> f\. Testing methods.
>
> g\. Performance data.
>
> h\. Parts list. The list shall indicate sources of supply, recommended
> spare parts, and name of servicing organization.
>
> i\. Appendix: List qualified permanent servicing organizations for
> support of the equipment, including addresses and certified
> qualifications.

1.4 INSTRUCTION TO GOVERNMENT PERSONNEL

> Where indicated in the technical sections, furnish the services of
> competent instructors to give full instruction to Government personnel
> in the adjustment, operation, and maintenance of systems and
> equipment, including pertinent safety requirements as required. Each
> instructor shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the
> installation and shall be trained in operating theory as well as
> practical operation and maintenance work. Instruction shall be given
> during the first regular work week after the equipment or system has
> been accepted and turned over to the Government for regular operation.
> The number of man‑days (8 hours) of instruction furnished shall be as
> specified in each individual section.

1.5 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

> Handle, store, and protect equipment and materials in accordance with
> the manufacturer's recommendations and with the requirements of NFPA
> 70B, Appendix I, titled "Equipment Storage and Maintenance During
> Construction." Replace damaged or defective items with new items.

1.6 CATALOGED PRODUCTS/SERVICE AVAILABILITY

> Materials and equipment shall be current products by manufacturers
> regularly engaged in the production of such products. Products shall
> have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years
> prior to bid opening. The 2‑year period shall include applications of
> equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar
> size. The 2‑year period shall be satisfactorily completed by a product
> for sale on the commercial market through advertisements,
> manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures. Products having less than a
> 2‑year field service record will be acceptable if a certified record
> of satisfactory field operation for not less than 6000 hours,
> exclusive of the manufacturers' factory or laboratory tests, is
> furnished. The equipment items shall be supported by service
> organizations which are reasonably convenient to the equipment
> installation in order to render satisfactory service to the equipment
> on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the
> contract.

1.7 MANUFACTURER\'S RECOMMENDATIONS

> Where installation procedures or any part thereof are required to be
> in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, furnish printed
> copies of the recommendations prior to installation. Installation of
> the item shall not proceed until recommendations are received. Failure
> to furnish recommendations shall be cause for rejection of the
> equipment or material.

**PART 2 PRODUCTS**

Not Used

**PART 3 EXECUTION**

Not Used

**SECTION 16050**

**BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS - ELECTRICAL**

**PART 1 GENERAL**

This Section covers the specification of basic materials and methods for
electrical work.

1.1 SCOPE

A. Provide labor, materials, services, equipment and transportation
necessary for complete and operational electrical systems as indicated
on Contract Drawings and specified herein, including but not limited to
following:

1\. Complete secondary distribution system, including:

a.  Panel boards and motor control centers

b.  Conduits, wires and cables

c.  Feeders and branch circuits

d.  Switches, boxes and motors

e.  Power and control wiring

f.  Wiring devices

g.  Variable Frequency Drives

h.  Control Panels

2\. Disconnects, controls and starters not integral with or specialized
for mechanical equipment provided under DIVISION 11, EQUIPMENT or
DIVISION 15, MECHANICAL.

3\. Installation of, and power wiring to and from: disconnects, controls
and starters furnished under DIVISION 11, EQUIPMENT or DIVISION 15,
MECHANICAL.

5\. Hangers and supports

6\. System identification

7\. Record drawings

8\. Operating and maintenance manuals

1.2. STANDARDS

A. All work of this Division shall conform to following standards:

1\. IES: Lighting Handbook.

2\. NEMA Standards.

3\. ANSI Standard CI: National Electrical Code (NFPA 70).

4\. ANSI Standard C50: Rotating Electrical Machinery.

5\. ANSI Standard C501-1: Construction and guide for selection,
installation and use of electric motors.

6\. ANSI Standard C52.1: Motors and generators (NEMA MG1).

7\. ADA: Americans With Disabilities Act

8\. IEEE: Standards 81, C62.41, C57.105 and C37.13.

9\. GSA: US General Services Administration Standards

3.  SUBMITTALS

> The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01330,
> "Submittal Procedures".

1.  SD-01 Data; GA

> Submit manufacturer's published data indicating complete compliance
> with all referenced standards, these Technical Specifications and the
> Contract Drawings. Submit data for all items listed under Article
> 1.3.3 below.
>
> The label or listing of the Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Inc.,
> shall be accepted as evidence that the materials or equipment conform
> to the UL agency standards. In lieu of this label or listing, a
> statement for a nationally recognized, adequately equipped testing
> agency indicating that the items have been tested in accordance with
> required procedures and that the materials and equipment comply with
> all contract requirements will be accepted. However, materials and
> equipment installed in hazardous locations must bear the UL label
> unless the data submitted from other testing agency is specifically
> approved by the Resident Engineer (RE).

2.  SD-04 Drawings; GA

> Detail drawings for all material and equipment specified. Drawings
> shall show applicable schematic diagrams; equipment layout and
> anchorage; and conduit and cable tray runs, anchorage, and support.
> Telephone system drawings showing actual layout, including locations,
> type and gauge of cables, and terminal assignment of wiring.

3.  SD-07 Schedules; GA

> The electrical component schedule shall consist of a complete list of
> equipment and materials to be used on the project including but not
> limited to: cables, wiring, messenger wires and clamps, conduit,
> wire-ways, cables, raceways, cable ladders, pull boxes, junction
> boxes, hangers and supports, switches, handholes, utility poles,
> electrical boxes, and electrical cabinets.

4.  SD-09 Reports; GA

> Submit Reports for testing conducted in accordance with articles 3.13,
> 3.14, 3.15, and 3.16.

5.  SD-06 Instructions; GA

> Include any special installation instruction that may be required for
> a specific component.

4.  UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES LABELS

A. Equipment, materials and components, for which there are listings in
UL Product Directories, shall bear UL labels.

1.5 GENERAL

A. The installation shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 70 and
NFPA 101, unless more stringent requirements are indicated herein or
shown.

B. The drawings indicate the extent and the general location and
arrangement of equipment, conduit, and wiring. The Contractor shall
become familiar with all details of the work and verify all dimensions
in the field so that the equipment shall be properly located and readily
accessible. Equipment and materials shall be located to avoid
interference with mechanical or structural features. Components shall
not be supported from sheet metal roof decks. If any conflicts occur
necessitating departures from the drawings, details of and reasons for
departures shall be submitted and approved prior to implementing any
change. The Electrical Contractor shall coordinate the electrical work
with the electrical drawings and provide all power related wiring even
if they are not shown on electrical drawings.

**PART 2 PRODUCTS**

2.1 CONDUIT, CABLE AND FITTINGS

A. Rigid metallic conduit (RMC) shall be UL listed, hot dipped
galvanized steel with full cut hot dipped galvanized NPT threads. RMC
shall be chromated on all surfaces for corrosion and abrasion
protection. Connectors and couplings shall be galvanized steel threaded
type listed for RMC use.

B. Intermediate metal conduit (IMC) shall be UL listed, hot galvanized
steel with full cut hot galvanized NPT threads and factory-applied
interior coating or lining for ease in pulling wires. Connectors and
couplings shall be galvanized steel threaded type listed for IMC use.

C. Electric metallic tubing (EMT) shall be UL listed, hot galvanized
steel with factory-applied interior coating or lining for ease in
pulling wires. Connectors and couplings shall be galvanized steel,
either compression type or heavy-duty set screw-type, listed for EMT
use. Indent or crimp-type connectors are NOT allowed.

D. Flexible metal conduit (FMC) shall be UL listed, single strip,
spirally wound, corrosion-resistant, galvanized steel acceptable
equivalent to Liquatite "Type BR". Use galvanized steel fittings and
clamps listed for FMC use.

E. Wireways shall be steel, UL listed, with hinged or screwed covers by
Lee Products, Keystone or acceptable equivalent.

F. Surface raceways shall be UL labeled, steel with standard buff
finish, acceptable equivalent to Wiremold. Sizes and types shall be as
shown on Contract Drawings or as required by RE.

G. Type MC cable shall be UL listed, 600 V, 90 deg. C rated, flexible
metal encased multi-conductor assembly; with cable sheath of interlocked
galvanized steel strip, copper conductors with Code gauge THHN
insulation, and internal green insulated ground: acceptable equivalent
to AFC 'Type MC". Connectors and fittings shall be galvanized steel,
listed for MC cable use.

H. Non-metallic conduit (NMC) shall be rigid PVC, heavy-wall Schedule
40, UL rated, acceptable equivalent to Carlon "Type 40".

I. Cable Ladder

1\. Cable tray support system shall be minimum 12-inches wide aluminum
type, with rungs on 6-inch centers, minimum load depth of 3-inches and
supports at 10-feet maximum intervals; meeting NEMA Standard VE‑1‑1991.
Tray shall be by Cope, Mono Systems, Chalfant, B-Line, or acceptable
equivalent.

2\. Provide necessary hangers, fittings and supports to complete system.

3.  Cable tray shall be center support type.

# J. Cable Tray

1\. Provide continuous, rigid, welded steel mesh cable tray system as
manufactured by Cablofil: EZ Tray system. Tray shall be welded at all
intersections and shall have continuous safety edge T-welded wire lip.

2\. Provide straight sections 2 inches deep by 12 inches wide.

3\. Tray material shall be carbon steel wire, ASTM A510, Grade 1008.
Wire shall be welded, bent and surface treated after manufacture. Wire
shall be electro-plated zinc galvanized after welding and bending of
mesh.

4\. Provide FAS support system, hardware and accessories as manufactured
by Cablofil.

K. Minimum Sizes shall be as follows:

1\. Conduit and EMT: ¾-inch unless otherwise noted.

2\. Flexible metal conduit: ½-inch.

3\. Wireway: 4-inches x 4-inches.

4\. Cable tray: 12-inches.

L. Special Fittings

1\. Where conduit is installed in hazardous (classified) locations:
provide sealing fittings acceptable equivalent to Crouse-Hinds "EYS
Series".

2\. Where conduit penetrates waterproof foundation, floor or roof:
provide through-wall seals acceptable equivalent to O.Z./Gedney "Type
CSMI" on each side of existing walls and O.Z./Gedney "Type FSK" on new
walls.

3\. Where conduit from underground distribution system enters building,
provide cable terminators acceptable equivalent to O.Z./Gedney "Type
CR". Fill the compound chamber with insulating compound acceptable
equivalent to O.Z./Gedney "Dozseal #220".

M. Applications shall be as follows:

1\. RMC: underground or below grade, buried in or below floor slabs, in
concrete walls, concealed in exterior masonry walls, wiring in fire pump
rooms.

2 IMC: as specified for rigid conduit, except not in hazardous
locations, fire pump rooms or applications over 600 V.

3\. EMT: unless otherwise noted:

a.  Feeders

b.  Power wiring in mechanical rooms

c.  Wiring for fire alarm systems

d.  Wiring for emergency and exit lighting

e.  Wiring for emergency communication, security and alarm systems

f.  Branch circuits

g.  Control wiring, including work done under Division 15 and/or 16

h.  Wiring above non-accessible ceilings

i.  Light fixture branch wiring

4\. FMC: final connections to motors and equipment-mounted controls from
a minimum of 18 inches to maximum of 6 feet in length.

5\. NMC: underground duct bank concrete encased, sleeves and elsewhere
where designated.

6\. Wiremold, cable tray: as shown on Contract Drawings.

7\. In any case not specifically covered, rigid conduit shall be used
unless otherwise approved by RE.

8 EMT is NOT permitted as a substitute for rigid conduit; MC cable is
NOT permitted as a substitute for flexible metal conduit.

9 AC (BX) cable shall NOT be used.

2.2 PULL BOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES

A. Boxes shall be heavy, stamped steel with covers attached by screws.
Provide locknuts for conduit size to which boxes are connected. In
finished areas, boxes shall have neatly mitered frame and flush steel
cover screwed to the frame.

B. Boxes shall be sized according to NEC.

C. Boxes shall be flush mounted where installed with concealed conduit,
and surface mounted elsewhere.

2.3 BACKBOARDS & EQUIPMENT CABINETS

A. Backboards shall be ¾-inch plywood painted on all sides before
installa­tion. Paint shall be one coat primer and two coats latex
fire-retardant gray paint equivalent to Benjamin-Moore "Retardo 220".
Backboards shall be used for mounting grouped switches, starters and
other equipment where shown on Contract Drawings.

B. Telephone and equipment cabinets shall be UL listed, sheet steel
cabinet with hinged door with catch and lock; mounted on backboard.
Cabinets shall be flush or surface-mounted, sized as shown on Contract
Drawings.

2.4 CONDUIT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hangers, clips and accessories supporting conduit shall be UL listed.

B. Individual large conduits shall be supported by means of adjustable,
malleable hangers of acceptable design placed on maximum 8-foot centers.
Individual small conduits may be held in place by one hole malleable
clips.

C. MC cable shall be supported by hangers of acceptable design placed on
maximum 4-foot centers. MC cable shall be supported within 12 inches of
each fitting.

2.5 WIRES AND CABLES

A. Secondary conductors shall be new copper with 600 V code gauge
insulation, conforming to NEC requirements, and shall be Type THWN or
THHN, except as follows:

1\. Type XF or SFF 150 deg C shall be used for fixture wiring.

2\. Type XHHW shall be used for conductors #3 AWG and larger.

3\. Type TFE shall be used for high temperature applications.

B. When wire sizes are not shown on Contract Drawings, sizes shall be in
accordance with NEC but no smaller than following:

1\. Light and power wiring: #12 AWG.

2\. Control wiring: #14 AWG.

3\. Wiring and cable for alarm and signal systems: as recommended by
equipment manufacturer.

C. All multi-purpose feeders and circuits shall include a full size
neutral and separate insulated ground conductor.

1\. All 277/120 VAC circuits shall include separate full sized neutral
and insulated ground conductors. Shared neutrals or ground conductors
are not permitted.

2.6 SPLICES

A.  Splices for #10 or smaller wires shall be made with UL approved
    solderless connectors: spring type acceptable equivalent to
    Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company "Scotchlock'; or
    crimp-type acceptable equivalent to Thomas & Betts "Sta-Kon".

B.  Splices, cable taps and terminals for #8 and larger shall be made
    with UL approved compression connectors: compression taps acceptable
    equivalent to Thomas & Betts "Colored Keyed" "C" taps applied with
    special tools according to manufacturer's recommendations; or bolted
    pressure connectors, bronze or copper construction, by Thomas &
    Betts, Burndy or acceptable equivalent.

C.  Splices for M.I. cable shall comply with the manufacturer's
    recommendations.

    2.7 MANUAL TIME SWITCHES

Not used.

2.8 SOLID STATE, DIGITAL TIME SWITCHES

Not used.

2.9 SAFETY SWITCHES AND FUSES

A. Work of this Division shall include:

1\. Furnishing and installing an appropriate safety switch for each
motor, unless otherwise noted.

2\. Installation of safety switches furnished under DIVISION 15,
MECHANICAL.

3\. Fuses for safety switches.

4\. Power wiring to and from safety switches.

B. Disconnect Switches for Motor Starters

1\. Provide disconnect switch ahead of each magnetic motor starter. The
disconnect switch shall be located in the MCC and receive direction from
the PLC.

2\. Where more than one motor is connected to single branch feeder,
provide fused disconnect switch for each motor, even if within sight of
feeder branch breaker.

3\. Supply each motor with an additional disconnecting means using a
fused switch, as close as possible to the motor.

C. Unless otherwise noted, switches shall have rejection clips for RK
fuses where applicable and NEMA 1 enclosure. Safety switches shall be
NEMA Type HD (heavy-duty), manufacturer's specification grade switches
by Square D, General Electric, or Westinghouse, acceptable equivalent to
following:

1\. Switches for use on 120/208 V system: rated for 240 V.

2\. Switches for use on 480 V system: rated for 600 V.

3\. Fused disconnect 2-pole and 3-pole: Square D "Type H".

4\. Switches that are used in conjunction with variable frequency drives
(VFDs) and elevators shall have auxiliary contacts that open before
switch blades to interrupt control circuits. Auxiliary contacts shall be
120 VAC; 5 Ampere rated.

5\. Switches for use with 6 lead motors: 600 VAC, NEMA 4X enclosure.

a\. Fused: Square D "Type H"

D. Fuses for safety switches shall be non-renewable dual element
cartridge type, Class RK5, UL listed. Fuses shall be Bussmann #FRN for
208 V usage, and Bussmann #FRS for 460 V usage; or acceptable equivalent
by Shawmut or Littelfuse. Install fuse so that size is readily visible.
Special types and classes are indicated on Contract Drawings.

E. Provide one spare set of fuses for each type and size used with
switches and other equipment.

2.10 MOTOR STARTERS

A. Unless otherwise noted, provide an appropriate motor starter for each
motor. Installation of, and power wiring to and from, the starters
furnished under Division 11, Equipment or Division 15, "Mechanical",
shall be done as part of the work of this Division. Unless otherwise
noted, control wiring shall be provided as specified under Section
16901.

B. Motor starters shall meet NEC, NEMA, UL, CSA and ANSI and shall be
suitable for required load, duty, voltage, phase, frequency, service and
location.

C. Starters shall be by Allen-Bradley, Cutler-Hammer/Westinghouse,
Square D, General Electric, or acceptable equivalent to following:

1\. Manual motor starters for 115 V or 200 V, single-phase motors less
than 2 HP: Square D "Class 2510" #FG-1P or #FG-2P.

2\. Manual motor starters for three-phase motors: Square D "Class 2510".

3\. Magnetic across-the-line starters, for single-phase motors 2 HP and
larger and for three-phase motors: Square D "Class 8536".

4\. Combination motor starters, with fused disconnect switch (fuse class
RK-5): Square D "Class 8538".

5\. Combination motor starters, with thermal-magnetic circuit breaker
(with interrupting rating as specified elsewhere): Square D "Class
8539".

6\. Reduced Voltage starters, solid state (Electronic): Square D "Class
8660".

7\. Combination motor starters with fused disconnect switch (fuse class
RK-5) or with thermal-magnetic circuit breakers; for two-speed, two
winding motors: Square D "Class 8810".

D. For 208V systems, provide 120 V control power by tapping one power
phase leg with single-pole fuse in fuse clip and running one #12 AWG
neutral to starter.

E. For 208V or 277/480 VAC systems, provide integral 120 VAC fused
control power transformer in each starter, unless otherwise noted.

F. Unless otherwise noted, motor starter shall have NEMA 1 enclosure.

G. Magnetic starters shall have the following features:

1\. Two extra N.O. and two extra N.C. auxiliary contacts, for each
speed.

2\. "HAND-OFF-AUTOMATIC" switches mounted in cover.

3\. Red "ON" pilot light equipped with neon lamp and mounted in starter
cover.

4\. Red and yellow "ON" pilot lights for high and low speeds, on
two-speed motors.

5\. Terminal strip for field wiring connections to control circuits.

6\. Cover-mounted reset button.

7\. Three thermal overload relays, with appropriate heaters to provide
protection on all motor phase legs. Relays shall be bimetallic or
melting alloy type.

8\. High-Low selector switch that is functional only in "HAND" position
on two-speed motors.

9\. Reverse phase and phase failure relay, for motors 100 HP and larger.

10\. Other features specified in motor starter schedule.

H. For control of HVAC starters, refer to Division 15, Mechanical.

2.11 TERMINAL STRIPS

A. Terminal strips shall be Buchanan or acceptable equivalent, with a
numbering strip for identification of individual punchings.

**PART 3 EXECUTION**

3.1 SUPERVISION

A. Furnish services of experienced electrical Superintendent who shall
be constantly in charge of electrical work, together with skilled
laborers required to unload, transfer, erect, connect, adjust, start,
operate and test each system.

B. Particular emphasis is placed on timely installation of major
apparatus and furnishing of other trades and Contractor with relevant
information.

3.2 MOTOR AND CONTROL CIRCUIT WIRING

A. Provide wiring required for electrical equipment furnished under
other Divisions of this Specification. Provide disconnects, starting
switches and motor protection ahead of each piece of equipment, unless
specified otherwise.

B. Check all protective and control equipment furnished or installed
under this Division. Ensure that such equipment is properly sized for
motor or other electrical equipment that it serves. Replace any material
or equipment damaged due to improperly-sized protective control
mechanisms.

C. Electrical controls and starters integral with or specialized for
mechanical equipment are specified with equipment in Division 11,
Equipment or Division 15, Mechanical. Disconnects and other controls and
starters are specified in this Division.

D. Output power wiring from variable frequency drive (VFD) to motor
shall be run in metallic conduit; other wiring shall NOT be run in this
conduit. VFD shall have separate equipment conductor back to ground bus
of source panel or switchboard and shall NOT depend on metallic conduit
for grounding. Power shall NOT be applied to VFD until VFD manufacturer
has checked and approved VFD installation.

E. Control cable to VFD speed input shall be shielded and shall be
installed without excess cable so that electrical noise shall be
minimized.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Distribution Equipment

1\. All distribution equipment and associated electrical elements of
mechanical equipment shall be identified according to the designations
used in the Contract Documents or established in cooperation with the RE
as part of the as-built record drawings. Furnish directory indicating
number, location and use of each item. Equipment requiring such
numbering includes, but is not limited to the following:

a.  High voltage switches and equipment

b.  Substations

c.  Switchboards/switchgear

d.  Switchboard/switchgear individual overcurrent protection devices

e.  Motor control centers

f.  Motor control center individual motor starter devices

g.  Overcurrent protection device enclosures

h.  Disconnect switches

i.  Panelboards

j.  Transformers

k.  Equipment control panels and enclosures

2\. Nameplates/Labeling: Center on device, coverplate or enclosure.
Place on non-removable surface.

a\. Use abbreviations defined in the contract documents whenever
possible. Use plan designations for labeling, unless indicated
otherwise. Indicate loads served using designating from electrical
schedules and designations from the trade furnishing the equipment
served.

b\. Label the panel boards with engraved lamicoid nameplates.

c\. Install nameplates inside covers in finished areas and outside
covers in unfinished areas including mechanical, electrical and building
maintenance areas.

3\. Manufacturer's nameplate, name, trademark and address shall be
attached permanently to equipment and material furnished under this
division. Nameplate showing distributor or contractor will not be
permitted.

4\. Equipment designation nameplates shall be engraved lamicoid, sized
as follows:

a\. Nameplates on panelboards, distribution panels and service switches:
minimum of 1-1/2-inches by 2-1/2-inches size with name letters not less
than ½-inche high and voltage, phase and number of wires not less than
¼-inch high.

b\. Nameplates on starters and other equipment switches and devices:
minimum of ¾-inch by 2-1/2-inches size with letters not less than 3/8\"
high.

5\. Attach nameplates with rivets. Wherever covers of adjacent units are
interchangeable, attach additional nameplates to wall or backboard
adjacent to covers.

6\. Panelboard circuit identification: engraved plastic nameplates for
units without panel cover doors, or plastic covered circuit directory
cards, type written, mounted on the inside of the panel cover doors.

7.  Acceptable manufacturers for nameplates are Lamicoid, Seton, Brady
    or approved equivalent.

B. Distribution Raceway Systems

1\. Distribution raceway systems shall require system identification and
shall include, but is not limited to the following:

a\. Conduit systems

b\. Pull boxes and junction boxes

2\. Marker pen labeling shall be utilized on conduit and cable system
junction boxes. Marker pen labeling methods shall be submitted for
review prior to execution. Spray painting shall not be permitted.
Systems requiring such identification include and shall be limited to
the following:

a\. Junction boxes or portions of junction boxes containing 277/480 volt
or 120/208 volt wiring.

b\. Communication and special system pull and junction boxes

c\. Pull boxes and junction boxes installed for future use.

3\. Marker pen labeling shall be on outside of junction and pull box
coverplates and on the box itself in unfinished areas including
mechanical, electrical and building maintenance areas and inside covers
in finished areas.

4\. Marking pen where used shall be permanent, waterproof and quick
drying.

5\. Conduits that contain essential power system feeders and branch
circuits shall be identified by attaching red vinyl adhesive backed
decal with ½-inch high black letters on 1\" high labels identifying
essential power within 1 foot of each termination or pull box and a
minimum of every 25 feet of conduit run. Referenced labels shall be by
Seton or approved equivalent.

6\. Acceptable manufactures for underground warning tape, identification
decals and vinyl adhesive backed labels are Seton or Brady.

7\. Fire alarm system, junction boxes and recovery couplings shall be
painted red. Provide vinyl label indicating fire alarm every 25 feet and
at terminations.

C. Conductor and Cabling Systems

1\. 480V wiring identification: 480V wiring (including switchboard
wiring) shall have orange adhesive tape strips with continuous
preprinted legend "480 volts" affixed near terminations and in pull
boxes and wireways. Acceptable manufactures: preprinted tape shall be by
Seton, Nameplates; W. H. Brady or acceptable equivalent.

2\. Label tapes: Use for feeder, branch circuit control and special
system conductors throughout. Indicate feeder and branch circuit number
son both feeders and branch circuit conductors and terminal block
termination numbers for control and special system conductors. Label
conductors at origin and destination points and at all junction boxes,
pull boxes and cable branch off points where installed in cable trough,
wireway, monotray, cable ladder, etc.

3\. Label 5 kV and 15 kv systems similar to the above.

D. Conductors size #6 and smaller shall have solid color insulation for
identification.

E. Conductors size #4 and larger shall have color identification, six
inches minimum length near termination and in splice boxes, junction
boxes, panels and manholes. Identification shall be by solid color
insulation, tape or paint.

F. Phase rotation shall be indicated by following color code:

  -----------------------------------------------------------------------
  Phase                    5 KV and 208Y/120V  15 KV and 480Y/277V
  ------------------------ ------------------- --------------------------
  A                        Black               Brown

  B                        Red                 Orange

  C                        Blue                Yellow

  Neutral                  White               White with color stripe,
                                               or natural gray

  Ground                   Green               Green
  -----------------------------------------------------------------------

G. 480 V wiring shall have orange adhesive tape strips with continuous
pre-printed legend "480 Volts" affixed near terminations and in pull
boxes and wireways. Preprinted tape shall be by Seton Nameplate,
W.H.Brady or acceptable equivalent.

H. All neutral conductors shall be identified with their associated
phase conductors at all boxes and panelboards as follows:

1\. Branch circuit wiring in trench headers, panelboard enclosures,
termination boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes, etc., shall be bundled
together into individual circuits. Each bundled circuit shall consist of
1, 2 or 3 phase conductors and associated neutral conductor. Branch
circuit wiring shall be installed with bundled circuits identified by
circuit numbers. Bunching of individual branch circuits shall be done
with nylon straps made of self-extinguishing nylon with a locking hub or
head on one end and a taper on the other end. Nylon straps shall be type
Thomas and Betts "TY-RAP" or acceptable equivalent.

I. Devices

1\. Device plates for light switches, receptacles and miscellaneous
other devices connected to essential branches of the distribution system
shall be stainless steel unless otherwise noted. The required red color
coding shall be integral within the device itself.

2\. Device plates for medical and housekeeping receptacles, light
switches and miscellaneous other devices connected to the "normal
branches" of the distribution system shall be stainless steel unless
otherwise noted.

3\. Wall plates provided for flush-mounted control switches in finished
areas, excluding light switches, shall be engraved, stainless steel with
black-filled letters. Device switches shall be color coded according to
essential or normal power systems, as identified in other sections of
this specification.

4\. Label all electrical outlets including electrical outlets furnished
as an integral part of furniture and fittings with supply panel and
circuit breaker designation, both on cover and tag wiring inside box. In
general identification label shall be affixed to outside of cover plate.
Label shall be engraved lamicoid

5\. Engrave nameplates of receptacles wired to GFI breakers to read
"GFI" adjacent to or above receptacle opening.

6\. Engraved letter characters for device outlet labels shall be a
minimum of 3/16\" high.

7\. Attached device nameplates with rivets only, adhesive backed labels
are not permitted.

8\. Acceptable Manufacturers: Nameplates, wall plates and conductor tape
within device back box: Seton, Brady or approved equivalent.

9\. Low Voltage Cabling Systems Color Code

a\. Cable jacket colors and labeling for the following systems shall be
the following standards:

1.  Intercom - Brown

2.  Fire Alarm - Red

3.  Fiber Optics - Orange

4.  Data cable/matching icon - Green

5.  Telephone cabling - White

6.  Telephone icon -Yellow

7.  Main Frames - Black or Orange

b\. Where the above systems are installed in dedicated raceways color
the junction boxes and conduit couplings to match the cable jacket
color. Provide identification of system on each junction box. In lieu of
painting the conduits provide adhesive labels with 2 inch lettering
every 10 feet identifying the system cabling type installed within.

3.4 ACCESSIBILITY, ACCESS PANELS AND ACCESS DOORS

A. Locate equipment that must be serviced, including motor starters,
switches, panels and junction boxes, in accessible location.

B. Access doors shall be located to conveniently serve intended purpose
and shall be installed so that adjacent piping, equipment and structures
do NOT render doors unusable.

C. Access doors are not required in removable panel ceilings if suitable
identifying markers are provided to indicate access locations.

D. During project closeout, Contractor shall perform walk-through
identifying and demonstrating access to equipment for service and/or
replacement. Walk-through shall be arranged at times convenient for RE
to attend.

1\. Equipment with insufficient access shall be relocated or provided
with additional access panels at no additional cost to FAA.

2\. Trade responsible for access problem shall be responsible for costs
of access modifications. In general, this shall be understood to be the
trade installing the equipment. If access problem was caused by
architectural layout changes which occurred subsequent to equipment
installation, cost of access modifications shall be borne by trade
responsible for architectural changes.

3.5 WATERPROOFING

A. Where work pierces waterproofing, including waterproof concrete and
floor of a wet area, submit method of installation for review by the RE
before work is done.

B. Provide necessary sleeves, caulking and flashing required to make
openings waterproof.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF CONDUIT, BOXES AND FITTINGS

A. Ends of conduits shall be reamed before assembly, and bushings and
locknuts shall be provided where conduits connect to boxes.

B. Boxes shall be set plumb and square with building lines. Exposed
conduit shall run parallel to building lines, unless noted otherwise,
and shall NOT block ceiling inserts.

C. Maintain conduit and outlet boxes in position during construction of
concrete floors, masonry walls, etc.

D. Wiring device boxes shall NOT be installed back-to-back in walls.

E. Conduit shall run to avoid low pockets which might collect water,
and, during installation, open ends shall be capped.

F. RMC or IMC buried in grade or in ductbanks shall have couplings made
up tight. Thread to coupling joint shall be coated heavily with
bitumastic paint, ensuring watertightness.

G. Parallel groups of conduit shall be supported from below, either by
horizontal angle irons or channel systems such as "Unistrut", with
vertical hanger rods at appropriate intervals.

H. Supports for conduit on concrete walls shall be attached to wall
either with all metal expansion shields or explosive-type inserts, as
permitted.

I. Conduits in slabs or in grade shall be swabbed internally prior to
pulling wire or cable.

J. Final connections to motors, control devices mounted on equipment,
vibrating equipment and vibration isolated equipment shall be made
through liquid-tight flexible metal conduit.

K. Use standard radius bends on concealed conduit; on exposed work, use
either standard bends or "L" type fittings acceptable equivalent to
Crouse-Hinds.

L. Wherever MC cable is used, leave sufficient slack for future removal
or withdrawal of boxes or fixtures from finished ceiling or partitions.

M. Exposed wiring shall be kept as close as possible to underside of
roof and floor slabs or bottom of beams, unless noted otherwise. Space
above hung ceilings is extremely critical and coordination with
mechanical trades is essential.

N. Conduit and wiring shall NOT be run in roof fill and shall NOT pierce
roof deck, unless specifically noted to on Contract Drawings.

O. Galvanized electrical conduit of ½-inch nominal diameter may be
embedded within 4‑1/2-inches overall thickness suspended concrete slabs
over permanent metal floor forms; galvanized electrical conduit of
1-inch nominal diameter may be embedded within slabs of 6-inches
thickness overall.

P. Conduits concealed in or beneath slab on grade: Conduits larger than
¾-inch nominal diameter shall be completely buried below vapor barrier
within the porous fill layer, such that surface of vapor barrier is
smooth and level within +/- ¼-inch tolerance. Conduits ¾-inch and
smaller may be:

1\. Completely buried below the vapor barrier within the porous fill, or

2\. Placed above the vapor barrier, within the slab, at mid-height of
slab, or

3\. If within the slab, spaced minimum of 3 diameters away from parallel
conduits.

Q. Field cut IMC and RMC conduits shall be field threaded. Field threads
to be cold galvanized by brush or spray. Cold galvanize to be minimum
95% zinc and shall cure before attaching to threaded fitting. Set screw
and compression fittings shall not be acceptable.

R. Conduit shall not be run directly above generator set exhaust system
including piping, silencer, emission control equipment, heat recovery
exchangers or any other equipment that contains hot exhaust gases.

3.7 CABLE TRAY INSTALLATION

A. Install cable tray system at locations indicated on the drawings and
in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install and support cable management system in accordance with span
load criteria of L/240.

C. Cutting:

1\. Cut wires in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

2\. Cut wires with side action bolt cutters to ensure integrity of
galvanic protective layer.

3\. Cut each wire with one clean cut to eliminate grinding or touch-up.

D. Install cable management system using hardware, splice connectors,
support components, and accessories furnished by manufacturer.

3.8 INSTALLATION OF CABLES

A. Parallel groups of cables shall be supported from below, either by
horizontal angle irons or channel systems such as "Unistrut", with
vertical hanger rods at maximum of three foot intervals.

B. Supports for cables on concrete walls shall be attached to wall
either with all metal expansion shields or explosive-type inserts, as
permitted.

C. Installation of M.I. cable shall follow the manufacturer's
recommendations and as follows:

1\. Examination

a\. Verify that cable and factory temporary seals have remained intact,
that the insulation has not been exposed to air, and that no moisture
has entered cable insulation.

b\. Verify that work of other trades likely to damage cable has been
completed.

2\. Storage

a\. Cable shall be shipped from the manufacturer with ends temporarily
sealed against moisture ingress.

b\. When cables are cut in the field, the end shall be sealed using
standard sealing compound and PVC tape.

c\. Cable shall be stored in a clean dry location.

3\. Handling

a\. Cable shall be uncoiled by rolling and rotating supply reel. Do not
pull from coil periphery or center.

b\. Take precautions necessary to prevent damage to cable from contact
with sharp objects, including pulling over foreign material or sheaves.

4\. Bending:

a\. Not less that five (5) times the cable diameter for cable not more
than 3/4 inch.

b\. Not less than ten (10) times the cable diameter for cable more than
3/4 inch.

5\. Pulling:

a.  For all cables up to and including #1 AWG use ten inch or larger
    sheaves.

b.  For #1.0 through 250 kcmil inclusive, use 18 inch or larger sheaves.

c.  For 350 kcmil and larger cables, use 24 inch or larger sheaves.

d.  On pulls of over 360 degrees, contact manufacturer for assistance.

e.  350 and 500 kcmil cables shall not be pulled more than 360 degrees
    in total.

6\. Splicing:

a.  All fire rated splices shall be made in the factory.

b.  In the event a field splice is necessary, it must be approved by the
    RE and:

    \(1\) made in the field by manufacturer's field technician, or

    \(2\) made in the field by personnel trained by the cable
    manufacturer using manufacturer's components.

7\. Terminations:

a\. Field made terminations shall be made with cable manufacturer's
termination kits only. Stripping tools, crimping and compression tools
available from the manufacturer shall be used for proper cable
termination.

b\. Terminations must be completed immediately once started to avoid
moisture ingress from surrounding air. Prior to completing each
termination, test insulation resistance and follow manufacturer's drying
procedures until insulation resistance reaches an acceptance level.

c\. Connections to ferrous cabinets for single conductor cables shall
incorporate brass plates ¼-inch thick by 4-inch wide by length as
required with ½-inch, ¾-inch, 1-inch per 1-1/4-inch drilled and tapped
holes. Install per manufacturers' drawing.

8\. Sheath induction reduction:

a.  When multi-phase circuits have paralleled single conductors, cables
    shall be run in groups having one of each phase and neutral in each
    group.

b.  Each set of paralleled conductors shall be separated by at least two
    single cable diameters.

c.  Each group of cables shall be fastened tightly together, at least
    once between each support on horizontal runs and twice on vertical
    runs, using ½-inch wide by 0.030-inch thick stainless steel straps.

9\. Exposed or Surface installations:

1\. Cable may be secured directly to fire rated building structure using
an approved method such as one, or any combination, of the following:

\(1\) Straps: ½-inch wide x 1-½ inch long by 0.030 inch thick stainless
steel or copper straps. Each strap shall contain two ¼-inch holes for
securing with 3/16-inch by minimum 1-3/4 inch long steel anchors.

\(2\) Steel struts and cable tray: Use only the steel strut framing
system and support recommended by Pyrotenax. Aluminum or other materials
are not acceptable.

\(3\) Other approved method.

b\. Cable supports shall not exceed three (3) feet on center
horizontally, or six (6) feet vertically.

c\. Cables shall be installed parallel to building lines.

10 Wall or floor penetrations:

a.  Provide sleeve to protect cable and penetration opening during
    pulling.

b.  Provide approved sealing of all penetrations.

11\. Neatly train and lace cable inside boxes, equipment, and
switchboard.

12 Field Quality Control

a.  Inspect cable for physical damage and proper connection.

b.  Measure tightness of bolted connections and compare torque
    measurements with manufacturer's recommended values.

c.  Verify continuity of each conductor.

d.  Prior to energizing cables, measure insulation resistance of each
    cable. Tabulate and submit for approval.

e.  Provide certification from cable manufacturer that installation is
    in accordance with their requirements.

    3.9 MOTOR CONTROL

A. Mount grouped switches, starters and other equipment on backboards.
See Paragraph 2.4, Backboards & Equipment Cabinets.

3.10 SLEEVES, INSERTS AND ANCHOR BOLTS

A. Furnish, set in place, coordinate and be responsible for location of
sleeves, inserts and anchor bolts required for work of this Division. If
work is not completed in coordination with work of other trades, trade
involved shall do cutting and patching required or have same done, at no
additional cost to FAA.

B. Conduits passing through floors, walls or partitions shall be
provided with sleeves which have internal diameter one inch larger than
outside diameter of conduit and insulation, if any.

C. Sleeves through outside walls shall be as shown on the Contract
Drawings.

D. Sleeves through fire-rated concrete floors or interior masonry walls
shall be Schedule 40 steel pipe; sleeves through concrete floors or
interior masonry walls which are not fire-rated shall be Schedule 40
PVC. Sleeves shall be flush with finished wall, flush with finished
ceiling, and extended two inches above finished floor.

E. Sleeves through interior partitions shall be Schedule 40 PVC, set
flush with finished surfaces of partitions.

F. Inserts shall be of pressed steel construction, with accommodation
for removable nuts and threaded rods up to ¾-inch diameter, permitting
lateral adjustment. Inserts shall be by Carpenter and Patterson,
Grinnell or acceptable equivalent.

1\. Individual inserts shall open at top, permitting reinforcing rods up
to ½-inch diameter to pass through insert body.

2\. Strip inserts shall have attached rods with hooked ends.

3.11 BASES AND SUPPORTS

A. Unless noted otherwise, provide necessary supports, rails, framing,
bases and piers required for equipment furnished or installed under this
Division.

B. Unless otherwise indicated: all floor-mounted equipment shall be
mounted on 3,000 psi, 6" high concrete pads.

1\. Pads shall be six-inch thick, unless shown otherwise, and shall NOT
extend more than one inch beyond equipment footprint. Top edge of pads
shall be chamfered.

2\. Furnish dimensional and load information so that shop drawings for
pads may be submitted and reviewed prior to pad installation.

3\. Equipment shall be firmly grouted into concrete pads and anchor
bolted.

C. Where mounted on the floor: Foundations, supports, pads, bases and
piers shall be of the same finish quality as the adjacent flooring
material.

D. Equipment supports shall be designed and constructed so that
equipment will be capable of resisting both vertical and horizontal
movement.

3.12 PAINTING

A. Unless otherwise specified, materials furnished under this Division
shall have prime coat and standard manufacturer's finish.

B. Finish painting of exposed work and equipment is covered under
Division 9.

C. Paint electrical equipment and appurtenances in concealed and
unfinished areas with one coat of rust-inhibiting paint or with an
appropriate bitumastic protective product designed for the intended
application. Asphalt paint is NOT acceptable. Items to be painted shall
include, but not be limited to: non-insulated hangers, supports, piping,
conduit, tanks and other ferrous metal work, which are concealed or
inaccessible but not galvanized.

D. Special care shall be taken to avoid painting or spattering equipment
nameplates.

E. Cooperate in identifying systems for painters. Refer to paragraph
3.3, Identification.

3.13 GENERAL WIRING TESTS

A. Prior to final inspection and tests: Wiring and connections shall be
completed, devices and equipment shall be properly operating, power and
lighting circuit and control wiring shall be clearly identified with
acceptable tags, and lighting fixtures shall be installed, ready for
acceptance.

B. Before devices are installed, test each wiring system for following:

1\. System shall be free from short circuits.

2\. System shall be free from grounds.

3\. Systems at or below 600 V shall have minimum insulation resistance
of 5 megohms when tested with 1000 VDC potential between conductors and
between conductors and ground, for minimum of one minute, at 70 deg. F
ambient temperature and reasonably dry atmosphere.

C. Upon completion, demonstrate that systems are properly phase
balanced.

3.14 MOTOR TESTS

A. After systems are balanced and ready to be turned over to FAA, test
and report motor performance data for motors.

B. Include following information in test report:

1\. Equipment name and/or number.

2\. Manufacturer's nameplate data, including RPM, horsepower, volts,
full-load amperes per phase, service factor, power factor,
manufacturer's name, motor type and model number.

3\. Motor test data, including amperes for each phase, average amperes,
and phase-to-phase voltage at motor, starter or disconnect switch
terminals.

4\. Percentage of: (Average load test amperes) divided by (Nameplate
full-load amperes).

5\. Size, number and ampere rating of overload heaters. Manufacturer's
motor starter heater table.

6\. Breaker and disconnect switch data, including size and manufacturer
of switches and fuses and branch circuit wiring.

3.15 OPERATIONAL TESTS

A. Each piece of electrical equipment, including lighting fixtures,
motors and controls shall be operated continuously for minimum test
period of one hour.

B. Demonstrate by operating equipment that circuits and devices are in
good operating condition. Each item of control equipment shall be
operated minimum of five times. Demonstration shall be performed after
wiring tests.

3.16 MECHANICAL SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT AND TESTING

A. Be present during adjustment period and final testing of mechanical
systems. Take readings necessary to ensure that electrical systems are
operating properly. Tests for mechanical work are detailed under
Division 11, Equipment or Division 15, Mechanical.

B. Take ampere readings at each electrical component, such as motor and
heating coil, to determine proper operation.

C. Record readings and submit them to the RE for review.

3.17 DEMOLITION AND RENOVATION: IMPACT ON EXISTING SYSTEMS

Not used.

END OF SECTION

**SECTION 16301**

**UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL WORK**

**PART 1 GENERAL**

1.1 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS

> The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
> extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the
> basic designation only.
>
> AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)
>
> ANSI C2 National Electrical Safety Code
>
> ANSI/ ICEA S-94-649 Concentric Neutral Cables Rated 5-46
>
> ANSI/ ICEA S-97-682 Utility Shielded Power Cable Rated 5-46 kV
>
> ANSI/ ICEA S-105-692 600 Volt Single Layer Thermoset Insulated Utility
> Underground Distribution Cable
>
> ANSI/ ICEA S-81-570 Direct Burial, 600 Volt, Ruggedized Insulation
>
> AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
>
> ASTM B 1 Hard‑Drawn Copper Wire
>
> ASTM B 8 Concentric‑Lay‑Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium‑Hard,
> or Soft
>
> ASTM D 1556 Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone
> Method
>
> ASTM D 2466 Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedule 40
>
> INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE), INC.
>
> IEEE 48 High‑Voltage Alternating‑Current Cable Terminations
>
> IEEE Std 48 Standard Test Procedures and Requirements for
> Alternating‑Current Cable Terminations 2.5 kV through 765 kV

IEEE Std 386 Separable Insulated Connector Systems for Power
Distribution Systems Above 600 V

IEEE Std 404 Cable Joints for Use with Extruded Dielectric Cable Rated
5000 V through 138 000 V and Cable Joints for Use with Laminated
Dielectric Cable Rated 2500 V Through 500,000V

IEEE Std 592 Exposed Semiconducting Shields on Premolded High Voltage
Cable Joints and Separable Insulated Connectors

> NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURER\'S ASSOCIATION (NEMA)
>
> NEMA RN 1 Polyvinyl‑Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid
> Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit
>
> NEMA TC 2 Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Tubing (EPT) and Conduit
> (EPC‑40 and EPC‑80)
>
> NEMA TC 3 PVC Fittings for Use With Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing
>
> NEMA TC 6 PVC and ABS Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground
> Installation
>
> NEMA TC 9 Fittings for ABS and PVC Plastic Utilities Duct for
> Underground Installation
>
> NEMA WC 70 Nonshielded 0-2kV Cables
>
> NEMA WC 71 Nonshielded 2001-5kV Cables
>
> NEMA WC 74 Shielded Power Cable 5-46 kV
>
> NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
>
> NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC)
>
> UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES INC. (UL)
>
> UL 6 Rigid Metal Conduit
>
> UL 467 Grounding and Bonding Equipment
>
> UL 510 Insulating Tape
>
> UL 514A Metallic Outlet Boxes
>
> UL 514B Fittings for Conduit and Outlet Boxes
>
> UL 854 Service‑Entrance Cables
>
> UL 1242 Intermediate Metal Conduit

1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1.2.1 Underground Service

> Terminate underground service where shown on drawings and projections
> thereof, except that service conductors shall be continuous to the
> terminating point indicated. Protect ends of underground conduit with
> threaded metal caps until connections are made.

1.2.2 Electrical Characteristics

> Electrical characteristics for this project shall be 480/277 AND
> 208/120 volts secondary, three-phase, 4-wire. Final connections to the
> power distribution system shall be as detailed on drawings.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01330,
"Submittal

Procedures".

1.3.1 SD-01, Manufacturer's Data; GA

> a\. Conduit
>
> b\. Splice box
>
> c\. Insulating tape
>
> d\. Terminator
>
> e\. Cable lubricants
>
> f\. Telephone cable and splices
>
> g\. Handholes

1.3.2 SD-04, Drawings; GA

> a\. Splice box
>
> b\. Terminator
>
> c\. Telephone cable and splices
>
> d\. Handholes

1.3.3 SD-06, Manufacturer's Instructions; GA

> a\. Manufacturer's directions for use of ground megger with proposed
> method indicated
>
> b\. Terminator manufacturer\'s installation instructions

1.3.4 SD-13, Certificates; GA

> a\. Certificates of Compliance

**PART 2 PRODUCTS**

2.1 GENERAL

> Provide materials and equipment listed by UL or approved by Factory
> Mutual (FM) System when such equipment is listed or approved.

2.2 CONDUIT

2.2.1 PVC-Coated Sch 40 Gal. Steel

> Rigid galvanized steel conduit and fittings shall conform to the
> requirements of UL 6 and UL 1242, for threaded type, respectively, and
> shall be coated with a polyvinyl chloride (PVC) sheath bonded to the
> galvanized exterior surface, nominal 40 mils thick, conforming to NEMA
> RN 1, Type A40, except that hardness shall be nominal 85 Shore A
> durometer, dielectric strength shall be minimum 400 volts per mil at
> 60 Hz, tensile strength shall be minimum 3500 psi, and aging shall be
> minimum 1000 hours in an Atlas Weatherometer.

2.2.2 Rigid Metallic Conduit -- RMC

> Rigid Metallic Conduit (RMC) shall be UL listed, hot dipped galvanized
> steel with full cut hot dipped galvanized UFT threads. RMC shall be
> chromated on all surface for corrosion and abrasion protection.
> Connector and couplings shall be galvanized steel threaded type for
> RMC use.

2.2.3 Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit - PVC

> Rigid nonmetallic PVC conduit shall conform to UL listed Schedule 40
> meeting ASTM standard F512 type EB designed to be encased in concrete.

2.2.4 Outlet boxes for use with rigid steel conduit shall be cast‑metal
cadmium or zinc‑coated if of ferrous metal with gasketed closures and
shall conform to UL 514A. Fittings for steel conduit and outlet boxes
shall conform to UL 514B.

2.3 PLASTIC INSULATING TAPE

Provide UL 510.

2.4 WIRE AND CABLE

2.4.1 Wire and cable conductor sizes are designated by American Wire
Gauge (AWG) and Thousands of Circular Mils (MCM). Conductor and conduit
sizes indicated are for copper conductors, unless otherwise noted.
Insulated conductors shall bear the date of manufacture imprinted on the
wire insulation with other identification. Wire and cable manufactured
more than 24 months before delivery to the job site shall not be used.

2.4.2 Conductors rated 600 volts and less, including service entrances,
shall conform to UL 854, Type USE, THW, THHW, THWN. Conductor size and
number of conductors in each cable shall be as indicated. Cable shall be
color coded. Conductor identification shall be provided within each
enclosure where a tap, splice, or termination is made. Conductor
identification shall be by color‑coded insulated conductors,
plastic‑coated self‑sticking printed markers, colored nylon cable ties
and plates, or heat shrink type sleeves. Control circuit terminations
shall be properly identified. Conductors No. 10 AWG and smaller shall be
solid copper. Conductors No. 8 AWG and larger shall be stranded copper.

> a\. Colors for coding conductors shall be:
>
> 208‑VOLT SYSTEM
>
> Neutral ‑ White
>
> Phase A ‑ Black
>
> Phase B ‑ Red
>
> Phase C ‑ Blue
>
> Grounding Conductor ‑ Green

2.5. GROUNDING AND BONDING EQUIPMENT

> UL 467. Ground rods shall be copperweld type copper clad steel with
> diameter adequate to permit driving to full length of the rod, but not
> less than 3/4 inch in diameter and 10 feet long unless otherwise
> indicated.

**PART 3 EXECUTION**

3.1 INSTALLATION

> Underground installation shall conform to ANSI C2 and NFPA 70 except
> as otherwise specified or indicated.

3.1.1 Contractor Damage

> The Contractor shall promptly repair any utility lines or systems
> damaged by Contractor operations. Damage to lines or systems
> previously located or "marked out", which are caused by Contractor
> operations, shall be repaired at no expense to the government. If the
> Contractor is advised in writing of the location of a line or system,
> such notice shall provide that portion of the line or system with
> "previously located" status in determining liability for damages. In
> any event, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Resident
> Engineer (RE) of any such damage. Underground utility line sensor
> shall be utilized prior to digging any trenches.

3.1.2 Cables

3.1.2.1 Cables shall be in one piece without splices between connections
except where the distance exceeds the lengths in which the cable is
furnished.

3.1.2.2 Bends in cables shall be not less than those specified in NFPA
70 for the type of cable specified.

3.1.2.3 Horizontal slack of approximately 3 feet shall be left in the
ground on each end of cable runs, on each side of connection boxes, and
at all points where connections are brought above ground. Where cable is
brought above ground, leave additional slack to make necessary
connections. Splices in lead‑sheathed or armored cables shall be
enclosed in split‑type cast‑iron splice boxes; after completion of the
connection, tightly clamp the box and fill with insulating filler
compound.

3.1.2.4 Identification Slabs Markers

> Provide a slab at each change of direction of the cable, over the ends
> of ducts or conduits which are installed under paved areas and
> roadways, and over each splice. Identification slabs shall be
> concrete, approximately 20-inches by 20-inches by 6 inches thick, and
> shall be set flat in the ground so that the top surface projects not
> less than 3/4 inch, nor more than 1‑1/4 inches above ground. The
> concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength of 3000 psi and
> shall have a smooth, troweled finish on exposed surface. Inscribe an
> identifying legend such as "cable", "duct", "splice", or other
> applicable designation on the top surface of slab before the concrete
> hardens. Inscribe circuit identification symbols on slabs as directed.
> The letters or figures shall be approximately 2 inches high and the
> grooves shall be approximately 1/4 inch in width and depth. Install
> the slabs so that the side nearest the inscription on the top shall
> include an arrow indicating the side nearest the cable.

3.1.3 Conduit Installation

3.1.3.1 Underground Duct Without Concrete Encasement

> Conduits shall be PVC-coated galvanized steel or Schedule 40 PVC.

3.1.3.2 Conduits above ground

Conduits shall be rigid threaded heavy wall galvanized steel conduit.

3.1.3.3 Conduit below ground

> Electrical primary, tie to point to pad mounted transformer: PVC
> Concrete encased, size as shown on Contract Drawings.

3.1.3.4 Electrical secondary

> Pad mounted Transformer to Buildings: 4 inch galvanized steel rigid
> threaded heavy wall PVC coated.

3.1.3.5 The top of the conduit shall be not less than 24 inches below
grade, shall slope away from buildings and toward manholes and other
necessary drainage points, and shall run in straight lines except where
a change of direction is necessary. As each conduit run is completed, a
testing mandrel not less than 12 inches long with a diameter 1/4 inch
less than the inside diameter of the conduit shall be drawn through each
conduit, after which a stiff‑bristled brush shall be drawn through until
the conduit is clear of earth, sand, or gravel particles. Conduit plugs
shall then immediately be installed. Ensure a minimum 3‑inch clearance
from the conduit to each side of the trench. Grade the bottom of the
trenches smooth; where rock, soft spots, or sharp‑edged materials are
encountered, excavate the bottom for an additional 6 inches; fill with
sand or earth, free from particles that would be retained on a 1/4‑inch
sieve; and tamp level with the original bottom.

3.1.3.6 Under roads, paved areas, and railroad tracks, install conduits
in concrete encasement of rectangular cross‑section providing a minimum
of 3‑inch concrete cover around ducts. The concrete encasement shall
extend at least 5 feet beyond the edges of paved areas and roads.

3.1.3.7 Separate multiple conduits with a minimum concrete thickness of
2 inches, except that light and power conduits shall be separated from
control, signal, and telephone conduits by a minimum distance of 3
inches. Stagger the joints of the conduits by rows and layers to
strengthen the conduit assembly. Provide plastic duct spacers that
interlock vertically and horizontally. Spacer assembly shall consist of
base spacers, intermediate spacers, and top spacers to provide a
completely enclosed and locked‑in conduit assembly. Install spacers per
manufacturer's instructions, but provide a minimum of two spacer
assemblies per 10 feet of conduit assembly.

3.1.4 Buried Utility Warning and Identification Tape

Provide detectable aluminum foil plastic‑backed tape or detectable
magnetic plastic tape manufactured specifically for warning and
identification of buried cable and conduit. Tape shall be detectable by
an electronic detection instrument. Provide tape in rolls, 3 inches
minimum width, color coded for the utility involved with warning and
identification imprinted in bold black letters continuously and
repeatedly over entire tape length. Warning and identification shall be
"CAUTION-BURIED ELECTRIC CABLE BELOW" or similar. Use permanent code and
letter coloring unaffected by moisture and other substances contained in
trench backfill material. Bury tape with the printed side up at a depth
of 12 inches below the top surface of earth or the top surface of the
subgrade under pavements.

3.1.5 Cable Pulling

> Test existing ducts with a mandrel and thoroughly swab out to remove
> foreign material before the pulling of cables. Cables shall be pulled
> down grade with the feed‑in point at the manhole or buildings of the
> highest elevation. Flexible cable feeds shall be used to convey cables
> through the manhole opening and into the ducts. Cable lubricants shall
> be used and use only the cable manufacturer specifically recommended
> lubricants. Cable‑pulling tensions shall not exceed the maximum
> pulling tension recommended by the cable manufacturer. Do not exceed
> the specified cable bending radii when installing cable under any
> conditions, including turn-ups into switches, transformers,
> switchgear, switchboards, and other enclosures. Cable with tape shield
> shall have a bending radius not less than 12 times the overall
> diameter of the completed cable. Cable with wire shield shall have a
> bending radius not less than eight times the overall diameter of the
> completed cable. If basket‑grip type cable‑pulling devices are used to
> pull cable in place, cut off the section of cable under the grip
> before splicing and terminating.

3.1.5.1 Secondary cable runs, 600 volts and less, shall include an
insulated copper equipment grounding conductor sized as required by the
rating of the over current device supplying the phase conductors.

3.1.5.2 Installation of Cables in Handholes

> Route cables along walls providing the longest route and the maximum
> spare cable lengths. Form cables to closely parallel walls without
> interference to duct entrances. Support cables on brackets and cable
> insulators at a maximum of 4 feet. Identify each cable by
> corrosion‑resistant embossed metal tags attached in each underground
> structure in accordance with the cable schedule and as approved by the
> RE. Example: 208V cable, Circuit 4‑Sub. NB ‑ to SP. Identify each
> phase of the MV cable.

3.1.6 Cable Terminating

> Protect terminations of insulated power and lighting cables from
> accidental contact, deterioration of coverings, and moisture by the
> use of terminating devices and materials. Make terminations by using
> materials and methods indicated or specified herein or as designated
> by the written instruction of the cable manufacturer and termination
> kit manufacturer. Termination for high‑voltage cables shall be rated,
> and be capable of withstanding test voltages, in accordance with IEEE
> 48. Terminations of single and multiconductor cables shall include the
> securing and sealing of the sheath and insulation of the cable
> conductors, stress relief and grounding of cable shields of shielded
> cable, and grounding of neutral conductors, metallic sheaths, and
> armor. Adequately support cables and cable terminations to avoid any
> excessive strain on the termination and the conductor connection.

3.1.7 Splices for 600‑Volt Class Cables

> Splices in underground systems shall be made only in accessible
> locations such as manholes and handholes, using a compression
> connector on the conductor and by insulating and waterproofing by one
> of the following methods suitable for continuous submersion in water.

3.1.7.1 Cast‑type splice insulation shall be provided by means of a
molded casting process employing a thermosetting epoxy resin insulating
material that shall be applied by a gravity‑poured method or by a
pressure‑injected method. The component materials of the resin
insulation shall be in a packaged form ready for convenient mixing
without removing from the package. Do not allow the cables to be moved
until after the splicing material has completely set.

3.1.7.2 Gravity‑poured method shall employ materials and equipment
contained in an approved commercial splicing kit which includes a mold
suitable for the cables to be spliced. When the mold is in place around
the joined conductors, prepare and pour the resin mix into the mold. Do
not allow cables to be moved until after the splicing materials have
completely set.

3.1.8 Grounding

> Noncurrent‑carrying metallic parts associated with electrical
> equipment shall have a maximum resistance to solid earth ground not
> exceeding the following values:
>
> 500 kVA or less 10 ohms
>
> Grounded secondary distribution system neutral and
>
> noncurrent‑carrying metal parts associated with
>
> distribution systems and grounds not otherwise covered 25 ohms

3.1.8.1 Grounding electrodes shall be cone‑pointed ground rods, driven
full depth plus 6 inches, installed when indicated to provide an earth
ground of the appropriate value for the equipment being grounded.

3.1.8.2 Grounding connections which are buried or otherwise normally
inaccessible, and excepting specifically those connections for which
access for periodic testing is required, shall be made by exothermic
weld or compression connector. Exothermic welds shall be made strictly
in accordance with the weld manufacturer\'s written recommendations.
Welds which are "puffed up" or which show convex surfaces, indicating
improper cleaning, are not acceptable. Mechanical connectors are not
required at exothermic weldments. Compression connector shall be the
type which uses a hydraulic compression tool to provide the correct
circumferential pressure. Tools and dies shall be as recommended by the
manufacturer. An embossing die code or other standard method shall
provide visible indication that a connector has been adequately
compressed on the ground wire.

3.1.8.3 Grounding conductors shall be stranded‑bare copper conforming to
ASTM B 8, Class B, for sizes No. 6 AWG and larger, and shall be
solid‑bare copper conforming to ASTM B 1 for sizes No. 8 and smaller.
Cable sheaths, cable shields, conduit, and equipment shall be grounded
with No. 6 AWG. Surge arresters shall be grounded to ground rods with
No. 4 AWG.

3.1.8.4 Ground Cable Crossing Expansion Joints

> Protect ground cables crossing expansion joints or similar separations
> in structures and pavements by use of approved devices or methods of
> installation which provide the necessary slack in the cable across the
> joint to permit movement. Use stranded or other approved flexible
> copper cable run or jumper across such separations.

3.1.9 Special Conditions

> During the construction of duct banks and underground structures
> located in streets, the streets shall remain open to traffic. Plan and
> execute the work to meet this condition. At locations where duct banks
> cross railroad tracks and the work requires closing of the tracks,
> secure permission from the RE for each track closure.

3.2 FIELD TESTS

> As an exception to requirements that may be stated elsewhere in the
> contract, notify the RE in writing at least 5 working days prior to
> each test. Furnish labor, equipment, and incidentals required for
> testing, except that the Government will provide electric power
> required for the tests. Correct defects in the work provided by the
> Contractor and repeat tests until the work is in compliance with
> contract requirements. Show by demonstration in service that circuits
> and devices are in good operating condition. Tests shall be such that
> each item of control equipment will function not less than five times.

3.2.1 Distribution Conductors 600‑Volt Class

> After wiring is completed and connected ready for operation, but prior
> to placing systems in service and before any branch circuit breakers
> are closed, perform insulation resistance tests in all circuits.
> Measure the insulation resistance between conductors and between each
> conductor and ground. Use an instrument capable of making measurements
> at an applied potential of 500 volts. Take readings after the voltage
> has been applied for a minimum of 1 minute. The minimum insulation
> resistance for circuits of No. 12 AWG conductors shall be 1,000,000
> ohms.

3.2.2 Ground Rods

> Test ground rods for ground resistance value before any wire is
> connected. Perform ground resistance measurements in normally dry
> weather, not less than 48 hours after rainfall. Ground resistance
> shall also be measured for each piece of equipment to the ground
> electrode. Use a portable ground testing megger to test each ground or
> group of grounds. The instrument shall be equipped with a meter
> reading directly in ohms or fractions thereof to indicate the ground
> value of the ground electrode under test. Provide one copy of the
> ground megger manufacturer's directions, indicating the method to be
> used.

3.2.3 Excavation, Trenching, Backfilling, and Compaction

> Except where specified otherwise, provide in accordance with Section
> 02225, "Excavation, Backfilling, and Compaction".

3.2.4 Test Report

> a\. 600‑Volt Cables: Identify each cable and test result.
>
> b\. Grounding Electrodes and Systems: Identify electrodes and systems
> for each test, as well as the resistance and soil conditions at the
> time the measurements were made.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 16400

SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION

**PART 1 GENERAL**

> This Section covers the specification of secondary electrical service
> and distribution systems.

1.  SCOPE

Provide labor, materials, services, equipment and transportation
necessary for complete and operational secondary electrical service and
distribution systems as indicated on Contract Drawings and specified
herein.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

1.  SD-01, Manufacturer\'s Catalog Data; GA

Submit all necessary information to demonstrate conformance with the
Specifications for:

a\. Fuses

b\. Circuit breaker and TCC curves

c.  Panel boards

    1.  SD-04, Drawings; GA

A. Submit for review shop drawings on the following:

1.  Panel board

2.  Circuit breakers

3.  Fuses

```{=html}
<!-- -->
```
A.  Submit coordination curves for breakers and fuses with shop drawing
    submittals for review. Acceptance of system components will be
    contingent upon achievement of reasonable coordination of system.
    Final sizing of fuses and selection of trip settings shown on
    Contract Drawings are subject to this coordination review by RE and
    manufacturer's representative.

    1.2.3 SD-09, Reports; GA

    A. Submit reports for all testing required in Paragraph 3.3.

    1.3 STANDARDS

A. Work of this Division shall conform to following standards, as
applicable:

1\. NEMA Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation, and Maintenance
of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or less.

2\. NEMA Instructions for Safe Handling, Installation, Operation and
Maintenance of Deadfront Distribution Switchboards Rated 600 Volts or
less.

3\. NEMA Instructions for Safe Handling, Installation, Operation and
Maintenance of Busway and Associated Fittings.

**PART 2 PRODUCTS**

2.1 PANELBOARDS FOR GENERAL USE

A. Panelboards shall be by Square D, General Electric, or Cutler Hammer/
Westinghouse. Refer to Contract Drawings for requirements on special
ratings and auxiliary devices such as relays, contactors and time
switches. Panelboards shall be UL listed and circuit breaker-equipped.
Design shall be such that individual breakers can be removed without
disturbing adjacent units or without loosening or removing supplemental
insulation supplied as means of obtaining clearances as required by UL.
Where "space only" is indicated, make provisions for future installation
of breaker sized as indicated.

B. Panelboards shall conform to standards of NEMA PB‑1. Panelboards
shall have distributed phase bussing throughout. Support bus bars on
bases independent of circuit breakers. Main buses and back pans shall be
designed so that breakers may be changed without machining, drilling, or
tapping. Provide isolated neutral bus in each panel for connection of
circuit neutral conductors. Provide separate ground bus identified as
equipment grounding bus for connecting grounding conductors; bond to
steel cabinet. In addition to equipment grounding bus, provide second
isolated ground bus, where indicated.

C. Panelboards shall have copper bussing.

D. Multiple section panelboards shall have same height boxes.

E. Each cabinet shall have hinged locking metal door and card holder for
directory. All locks shall be fitted to same key. Panelboard card
directories shall be completely filled out (typewritten) upon completion
of project and shall include source of service. Revise existing
directories when new breakers are added. Cover trims for panelboards
shall be hinged to box with full height, semi‑concealed piano hinges,
fastened to box lip with screws, not trim clamps. Door shall be hinged.
Trims shall be UL labeled.

F. Provide oversize gutters for gutter taps where wiring runs through to
floor above. Through‑feed lugs will NOT be accepted.

G. 208Y/120 V Panelboards: Panelboard shall have main, lugs, branches,
and circuit breakers as scheduled. Panelboards shall have a minimum
rating of 22,000 A RMS symmetrical interrupting capacity unless
scheduled otherwise. Series ratings are NOT acceptable.

1\. Lighting and small power panelboards shall be Square D #NQOD with
bolt‑on breakers or acceptable equivalent.

2\. Power panelboards shall be Square D "I‑Line" or acceptable
equivalent.

H. 480Y/277 V and 480 V DELTA panelboards: Panelboards shall have main,
lugs, branches and circuit breakers as scheduled. Panelboards shall have
a minimum rating of 42,000 A symmetrical interrupting capacity unless
scheduled otherwise. Series ratings are NOT acceptable.

1\. Lighting panelboards fed from a 480Y/277 V source shall be Square D,
Type NF with bolt‑on breakers or acceptable equivalent.

2\. Lighting or power panelboards fed from a 480 V DELTA source shall be
Square D "I‑Line" or acceptable equivalent.

I. Provide bolt-on thermal magnetic-type circuit breakers with
interrupting capacity to match panelboard rating. Breaker terminals
shall be UL listed as suitable for the type of conductor provided.
Multiple circuit breaker shall be a common trip-type with single
operating handle. Breaker design shall be such that overload in one pole
automatically causes all poles to open. Maintain phase sequence
throughout each panel so that any three adjacent breaker poles are
connected to Phase A, B, C, respectively.

**PART 3 EXECUTION**

3.1 SPECIAL CLEANING

A. Perform vacuum cleaning and wiping down of bus bars, bus bracing and
supports in panelboards, internal enclosure base in motor control
centers, and electrical equipment enclosures.

B. Check bus connections and tighten bolts in panels within work areas,
in accordance with manufacturer's torque requirements.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Provide nameplates and general identification as required under
Section 1610, "General Requirements for Electrical Work", Section 16050,
"Basic Materials and Methods -- Electrical", and under Division 1, and
as follows.

B. Panelboard nameplate shall include following information:

1\. Panelboard reference number.

2\. Source panel reference, including circuit breaker supplying
panelboard.

3\. Location of source panel by building, floor level and room number.

3.3 TESTING

A. Acceptance testing for electrical equipment and cable, specified
herein, shall be performed by independent testing firm with minimum ten
years experience in testing the specified items. Firm shall be member of
International Electrical Testing Association (INETA).

B. Testing procedures shall be as described in INETA "Acceptance Testing
Specifications".

C. Obtain circuit breaker and relay characteristic curves from
manufacturer, prior to testing, and furnish copies to Resident Engineer
(RE).

D. Testing firm shall notify switchgear manufacturer in advance of dates
on which acceptance tests will be performed so that manufacturer's
representative may be present.

E. Testing firm shall immediately notify Contractor and RE, of any
deficiencies requiring correction before switchboard is placed in
service and shall confirm information in writing within five days.

F. Discrepancies found shall be corrected by firm which installed
switchboard. However, testing firm shall make minor field adjustments
that may be found necessary.

G. Test report shall include written test results on firm's standard
test forms. Refer to paragraph 1.2.3.

3.4 CIRCUIT BREAKER SETTINGS

A.  Verify final trip settings for adjustable circuit breaker elements.
    Instantaneous magnetic settings shall be minimum, unless otherwise
    noted.

# END OF SECTION 

**SECTION 16901**

**PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS**

**PART 1 GENERAL**

1.1 DESCRIPTION

1.1.1 The work of this Section includes all labor, materials and
equipment required to modify the existing control system in accordance
with this specification, and the treatment process and controls
description on the Project Plans. This work shall include providing
instruments; control panel modification, programming changes;
installation and field wiring; system calibration, checkout and control
loop tuning. The work of this Section as herein specified includes, but
is not limited to, the following:

a.  Pressure Instrumentation

b.  Flow Instrumentation

c.  Programming of Controllers

d.  Control Panels

1.1.2. All design, equipment, calibration, checkout and control loop
tuning described in this section shall be the responsibility of a single
supplier, referred herein as the Control System Supplier. The Control
System Supplier shall provide whatever equipment and field adjustments
are necessary for the system to function as specified in the Contract
Documents. The Control System Supplier shall provide equipment, devices,
software, programming or calibration services necessary to meet these
requirements whether or not the specific equipment, devices software,
programming or calibration service, are specifically identified in this
specification or shown on the drawings.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1.2.1 Prior to commencing work, submit data showing that the Control
System Supplier has successfully completed work on systems of the same
type and design as specified herein, or that he has a firm contractual
agreement with a subcontractor having the required experience. Include
the names and locations of at least two installations where the
Contractor, or the subcontractor referred to above, has
installed/modified such systems. Indicate the type and design of each
system and certify that the system has performed satisfactorily for a
period of at least 18 months. Previous satisfactory work has been
completed at the site by Kruse Controls Inc. of Baltimore, Md.

1.2.2 All materials and equipment supplied and installed shall conform
to the applicable standards referenced in paragraph 1.3 below. All
materials provided shall be new and unused, shall be of the type and
materials specified herein and shall meet the intent and requirements
specified. All materials found during the progress of work to have
cracks, flaws or other defects shall be rejected by the Resident
Engineer (RE). All defective materials shall be promptly removed from
the work site and replaced.

1.2.3 The Contractor shall use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who
are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who
are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods
needed for proper performance of the work in this section.

1.2.4 Equipment and component parts thereof shall bear manufacturer's
nameplate, giving manufacturer's name, size, type, model number or
serial number, and electrical characteristics to facilitate maintenance
and replacements. Nameplates of distributors or contractors are not
acceptable.

1.2.5 Electrical equipment shall be UL listed and approved, and conform
to the latest edition of NEC and NEMA; materials and accessories shall
be constructed in accordance with latest ASTM standards.

1.2.6 Unless otherwise specified, materials and equipment shall be
essentially the standard cataloged products of manufacturers regularly
engaged in the production of such equipment and shall be the
manufacturer's latest design that complies with the specifications.
Unless otherwise specified, where two units of the same class of
equipment are required, these units shall be products of a single
manufacturer.

1.2.7 Provide the services of a representative or technician from the
Control System Supplier, experienced in the installation and operation
of the type of system being provided, to supervise installation,
adjustment, preliminary testing, and final testing of the system and to
provide instruction to Government personnel.

1.3 REFERENCES

> The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
> extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the
> basic designation only.
>
> NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURER\'S ASSOCIATION (NEMA)
>
> NEMA ICS 1 Industrial Control & Systems

NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)

> NFPA 70 National Electrical Code

UNDERWRITERS LABORATORY (UL)

> UL 854 Service Entrance Cables

1.4 SUBMITTALS

> Government approval is required for submittals with a "GA"
> designation. The following shall be submitted in accordance with
> Section 01300, "Submittal Procedures".

1.4.1 SD-04, Shop Drawings; GA

> Shop drawings consisting of a complete list of equipment and
> materials, including manufacturer's descriptive and technical
> literature; performance charts and curves; catalog cuts; and
> installation instructions. Shop drawings shall also contain complete
> wiring and schematic diagrams; equipment layout and anchorage; and any
> other details required to demonstrate that the system has been
> coordinated and will properly function as a unit.

a\. Product information for sensors/transducers and field instruments.

b\. Programmable Logic Control and Network Communications Information

\(1\) System Description

\(2\) Hardware Description

\(3\) Software Description

c\. Panels, Consoles, and Cabinets Information

\(1\) Layout Drawings

> \(2\) Panel schematic and internal point‑to‑point wiring interconnect
> and/or piping diagrams
>
> \(3\) Electrical control schematics in accordance with JIC standards
> for all circuits indicated in the specifications or on the Contract
> Drawings. No "typical" wiring diagrams will be acceptable and no
> tables or charts to describe wire numbers will be acceptable. Wires
> shall be labeled and shown on the submittal drawings.

\(4\) Plan showing equipment layout.

> \(5\) Stock lists or Bill of Materials for each panel including tag
> number, functional name, manufacturer's name, manufacturer's model
> number, and quantity for components mounted in and on the panel,
> console, or cabinet.
>
> d\. Field wiring and piping diagrams and point‑to‑point wiring
> diagrams including interconnections between field devices, panels,
> control stations, and motor starters.
>
> e\. Instrument loop diagrams for analog display, control and I/O loops
> prepared using ISA standard symbols.
>
> f\. System Software Documentation shall include the following as a
> minimum:
>
> \(1\) Complete list and description of control panel operation
> interface.
>
> \(2\) Complete hard copies of ladder diagram programming for the
> recharge bed related components.
>
> \(3\) Complete listing of external and internal I/O address
> assignments, register assignments, and preset constant values along
> with functional point descriptions for the recharge bed related
> components.
>
> \(4\) Complete hard copies of program documentation for all types of
> programs.
>
> \(5\) Softcopy electronic deliverables that are properly formatted as
> appropriate for each subject component. This deliverable shall
> include, but not be limited to, all source code, electronic files,
> configuration files, database files and any other softcopy data used
> in the project formatted for use/reuse in the HMI/SCADA systems and
> support systems. Each softcopy document and file shall be properly
> documented with metadata in appropriate detail to enable complete
> understanding of the code and function of each system and code
> component to allow for future troubleshooting and modification. This
> shall include, but not be limited to, code line documentation and
> functional descriptions, detailed database design Metadata, including
> field, definitions descriptions, compiler versions, manufacturer
> software make model and version, detailed system design schema in UML,
> etc.
>
> \(6\) User's manual describing procedures and providing examples for
> use of programming terminal, accessories, and system utility routines
> to perform control, program modification, program verification,
> diagnostics, program documentation, loading and backup, and other
> required system support functions.
>
> g\. Instrument Index

1.4.2 SD-01, Design Data

> a\. Control System Components; GA
>
> b\. Spare Parts, GA

1.4.2.1 Control System Components

> Detailed description of the proposed control system and components.
> The description shall include, but not be limited to, the following
> items:

a.  Wire and cable

b.  Enclosures

c.  Pressure-sensor instruments

d.  Flow instrumentation

e.  Valve position indicators

1.4.2.2 Spare Parts

> After approval of the shop drawings, and not later then 30 days prior
> to the start of operation, spare parts data for each different item of
> material and equipment specified. The data shall include a complete
> list of parts and supplies, with current unit prices and source of
> supply.

1.4.3 SD-06, Posting Framed Instructions; GA

> Proposed diagrams and instruction shall be submitted prior to posting.

1.4.4 SD-13, Certificates

a\. Guarantee GA

1.4.4.1 The Contractor and the Control System Supplier shall guarantee
all work under this division, in writing, to be free of defective work,
materials or parts for a period as required by Section 15011,
"Mechanical General Requirements" and Section 16010, "General
Requirements for Electrical Work".

1.4.5 SD-18, Records

a\. Qualifications, GA

1.4.5.1 Qualifications of the Control System Supplier; GA

1.4.6 SD‑19 Operation and Maintenance Manual Addenda, GA

> The Contractor shall prepare the required instructions including the
> manufacturer's name, model number, service manual, parts list, and
> brief description of equipment and their basic operating features. The
> information will be added as an addenda to the site's Operation and
> Maintenance Manual. Six complete copies of instructions listing
> routine maintenance procedures, possible breakdowns and repairs, and
> trouble shooting guides shall be included in the Addenda. The
> instructions shall include simplified diagrams for the system as
> installed. Each set shall be permanently bound and shall have a hard
> cover. The following identification shall be inscribed on the covers:
> the words "ADDENDA TO OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS," name
> and location of the facility, name of the Contractor, and contract
> number. These instructions shall include, but not be limited to the
> following:
>
> a\. System layout showing instrumentation and controls and
> installation requirements.
>
> b\. Approved wiring, logic, and control diagrams prepared in
> accordance with ISMC S5.1 including a drawing index, legend and
> symbols list, and abbreviations and identifiers.
>
> d\. Operating and maintenance instructions for each piece of
> equipment, including checkout, troubleshooting, and servicing.
>
> e\. Manufacturer's bulletins, cut sheets and descriptive data, parts
> list, and recommended spare parts.

1.5 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

1.5.1 The Drawings and these Specifications are complementary each to
the other, and any labor, or material called for by either, whether or
not by both, shall be furnished and installed.

1.6 EQUIPMENT TAGGING

1.6.1 All instrumentation shall be tagged in accordance with Section
15011, "Mechanical General Requirements".

**PART 2 PRODUCTS**

2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT - GENERAL

2.1.1 Provide materials and equipment in accordance with Section 16010,
"General Requirements for Electrical Work" and Section 16050, "Basic
Materials and Methods -- Electrical". All equipment and installations
shall comply with the requirements of area classification as defined in
Article 500 of the National Electric Code.

2.1.2. Provide all necessary components, power supplies, input and
output modules and racks and all cables and accessories necessary to
implement the functional requirements described herein and shown on the
Process & Instrumentation Diagrams.

2.1.3. Conduit

> Provide materials for this section as specified in accordance with
> Section 16050, "Basic Materials and Method -- Electrical".

2.1.4 Wire and Cable

> Wire and cable conductor sizes are designated by American Wire Gauge
> (AWG). Conductor and conduit sizes indicated are for copper
> conductors. Insulated conductors shall bear the date of manufacture
> imprinted on the wire insulation with other identification. Wire and
> cable manufactured more than 24 months before delivery to the job site
> shall not be used. Power and wiring for future components (see Project
> Plans) shall be installed as part of this contract.
>
> Conductors rated 600 volts and less, including service entrances,
> shall conform to UL 854, Type THW, THHW, THHN. Conductor size and
> number of conductors in each cable shall be as indicated. Cable shall
> be color coded. Conductor identification shall be provided within each
> enclosure where a tap, splice, or termination is made. Conductor
> identification shall be by color‑coded insulated conductors,
> plastic‑coated self‑sticking printed markers, colored nylon cable
> tiles and plates, or heat shrink type sleeves. Control circuit
> terminations shall be properly identified. Conductors shall be solid
> copper.

2.1.5 Enclosures

> Fabricate panels and enclosures of 16‑gage furniture‑grade steel or
> 6063‑T5 extruded aluminum alloy, totally enclosed on all sides, with
> hinged door and keyed lock with manufacturer's standard shop‑painted
> finish.
>
> Provide UL listed panels for use with line voltage devices.
>
> Provide nylon based double screw type terminal blocks with spare
> terminal for extra wiring.

2.1.6 Sensor/Instrumentation Power Supply

> All sensors and instrumentation shall be supplied with an internal or
> external power supply to convert from AC to the required DC voltage
> (or as otherwise required), as necessary to power the sensors.

2.2 PRESSURE INSTRUMENTATION

2.2.1 General

> See Section 15060, "Valves and Piping Appurtenances", for additional
> products related to pressure instrumentation in piping.

2.2.2 Pressure Sensor/Transmitters

. The pressure transmitter for measuring the pressure of the Recharge
Bed Header (PX-RB1), shall be a pressure transducer with stainless steel
and Viton wetted parts. The unit shall generate a 4-20 mA output signal
with an accuracy of 0.25% and be loop powered. The operating temperature
shall be -10°C to 70°F. Provide all appurtenances (such as vent tubes
and moisture traps) recommended by the manufacturer and/or supplier.

> The pressure sensor/transmitter shall be KPSI Model 720 or approved
> equal. The supplier shall coordinate the model number with the
> manufacturer as necessary to meet the functional requirements of this
> Specification. The monitored pressure range shall be 0 -- 25 psig with
> a 200 psig burst pressure rating. The unit shall be supplied with a ¼"
> male NPT pressure port end cap to allow installation on the header
> piping as shown on the Project Plans.

2.3 WATER FLOW INSTRUMENTATION

2.3.1. Turbine Flow Meter

> The flow transmitter indicators (FXI-RB2) shall be an in-line mounted
> device wherein the liquid pressure drives the turbine rotor rate of
> rotation proportional to the volumetric flow rate. The Rotor's
> rotation is magnetically coupled to a hermetically sealed
> indicator/transmitter.
>
> The device shall be capable of measuring flow in wastewater. The
> pressure rating of the unit shall be 150 psi or greater. The case
> shall be constructed of epoxy coated cast iron. The measuring chamber
> shall be polyethersulfone and the rotor shall be polyamid. The flanges
> shall be cast iron with EPDM o-rings. The register housing shall be
> bronze. The pressure drop shall be \<1.1 psi at 150 gpm. The accuracy
> of the unit shall be ± 1.0% of the rate with a repeatability of ±
> 0.25% of the rate. The power supply to the unit shall be 30 VDC,
> 15-20mA. The unit shall include a local flow rate display.
>
> The unit shall include a converter to convert the pulsed signal from
> the flow meter to a 4-20mA output signal that is proportional to the
> flow rate.
>
> The unit shall be a Niagara WPX Series, Model 221.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS DEVICES

2.4.1 Valve Position Indicators

Each electrically actuated valve shall include position indication.
Modulated flow control valves shall include a 4--20 mA position
transmitter to indicate the actual position (percent open) of the valve.
The position transmitters shall be as manufactured by ASAHI/America or
approved equal compatible with the approved valve actuator. The valve
shall modulate as necessary to maintain the percent open as set by the
operator in the HMI.

2.5 CONTROL AND COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM INTEGRATION

> All flow, pressure, automated valve operation, and valve position
> indicator control and monitoring shall be integrated into the existing
> water treatment Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition/Human Machine
> Interface (SCADA/HMI) system to address the required system control
> and communications. All monitoring and controls shall be through the
> existing or similar display screens within the existing system. Alarm
> functions shall perform as described in this specification section and
> on the Contract Drawings. The existing display screens in the existing
> SCADA/HMI system may be modified to accommodate the new monitoring and
> controls, or an additional screen may be added for the Recharge Bed
> components.

2.8.1 Enclosures

> Provide NEMA 4 or better enclosures for outdoor use. The panel
> dimensions shall be selected by the control system supplier to be of
> sufficient size to enclose all required splices and or components.
>
> The control panels shall be accessed by a main door which shall be
> equipped with a lockable handle.

**PART 3 EXECUTION**

3.1 INSTALLATION

> Examine areas and conditions under which electric control systems are
> to be installed. All necessary programming documentation will be made
> available to the Contractor. All control work was previously completed
> by Kruse Controls of Baltimore, MD.
>
> Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been
> corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer. Protect and
> carefully store all equipment and materials to prevent damage before
> and during installation. Replace damaged or defective items.
>
> Install instrumentation principally as shown on the drawings. Provide
> all mounting hardware and cables required to install instruments and
> controls and for the system to operate as described in the plans and
> specifications. Install the instrumentation, controls, panels and all
> appurtenances and accessories in accordance with the installation
> instructions furnished by the manufacturer. The equipment shall be
> installed by workmen thoroughly experienced in installation of such
> equipment in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.
>
> Certain products specified in this section are for installation in
> process and other piping; installation of such products shall be in
> accordance with Section 15060, "Valves and Piping Appurtenances."
> Electrical work shall be as specified in Division 16 Sections.

3.2 WIRING

> Wiring shall conform to process control panel wiring codes with wire
> numbers on each terminating point of a wire and wire colors conforming
> to standard process control codes. Wire colors shall be as follows:
> black ‑ power, white ‑ neutral, red ‑ control, yellow ‑ remote
> powered, blue ‑ dc power. All interconnecting wires shall be brought
> to terminal boards.
>
> The control devices and instruments shall be grouped by function on
> the panel and placed in a neat, orderly, and aesthetically pleasing
> arrangement to facilitate an understanding of the control and its
> operation. All components shall be marked with engraved plastic plates
> (black on white background) on or near them.
>
> The term "control wiring" is defined to include providing wire,
> conduit, and miscellaneous materials as required for mounting and
> connecting electric control devices.
>
> Install complete control wiring system for electric control systems.
> Provide multi‑conductor instrument harness (bundle) in place of single
> conductors where number of conductors can be run along common path.
> Fasten flexible conductors bridging cabinets and doors, neatly along
> hinge side, and protect against abrasion. Tie and support conductors
> neatly.
>
> Number‑code or color‑code conductors, appropriately for future
> identification and servicing of control system.
>
> Furnish labels appropriate for the use. Install labels onto equipment
> and/or onto panel door to properly identify the function of the
> device.
>
> All wiring shall be kept trained into wireways or gutters, unless
> specifically approved by the RE.
>
> All terminals shall be clearly and permanently labeled.
>
> Contractor shall make all wiring terminations and ensure that modified
> control (and other) panels are fully operational and functional prior
> to the completion of the project.

3.3 GENERAL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS

3.3.1 Process Control System

> The process control system (which includes but is not limited to the
> PLCs, servers, HMIs, Remote Interface Software, and related
> instrumentation and loads) shall be modified, by the Control System
> Supplier to perform the operations described in this Section. The
> process system shall function as described on the Contract Drawings.

3.4 SYSTEM TESTING AND CALIBRATION

> After the instrumentation has been installed and the programming has
> been modified, the system shall be calibrated, tuned and tested to
> demonstrate the capability of the system to perform as described
> herein and on the drawings. The system and all related software shall
> be operated and exercised for a duration of thirty (30) days to show
> that it has been properly installed and calibrated and that
> performance is entirely acceptable to the RE and meets requirements of
> these specifications.
>
> If any component or the system in its entirety fails to conform to any
> and all of the specifications and the performance test of the system
> shows deficiencies in any aspect of the requirements of this
> specification, the Control System Supplier and/or manufacturer shall
> make such system corrections, alterations or adjustments as are
> necessary to meet the requirements. The operating tests shall then be
> repeated and the results reevaluated.
>
> The testing shall be completed to the satisfaction of the RE.

3.5 PID LOOP TUNING

> The control system supplier shall provide the necessary equipment,
> personnel, and services necessary to tune the PID loops implemented by
> the control system. Tuning shall not be considered complete until the
> RE is satisfied that the system will operate in a stable manner under
> various modes and conditions of operation.
>
> The control system supplier shall, at a minimum, tune the system PID
> loops at the following times:
>
> a As necessary prior to and During Initial System Testing (Must attain
> sufficient stability)
>
> b Once after completion and acceptance of System Testing (Adequate
> performance must be obtained at this time)

c\. Once at the request of the Owner during the first year of operation.

. The control system supplier shall tune the PID loops so that the
performance meets the intent of the specifications and satisfaction of
the RE.

3.6 OWNER TRAINING IN OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF SYSTEM

> The Contractor shall provide the copies of the Operation and
> Maintenance Manuals specified under Part 1.4.6. of this Section prior
> to conducting the training sessions described below. The O&M manuals
> shall be submitted to the RE for review a minimum of one week prior to
> conducting the training session.
>
> The Contractor, Control System Supplier and manufacturer
> representatives shall provide a minimum of one 4 hour day of training
> for RE and his designated representatives. The training shall review
> the operation of each piece of equipment and provide the RE with a
> thorough understanding of the operation of the System, the operation
> and maintenance of its components, and the fine tuning and adjustment
> of the system components.

3.7 POST BREAK-IN ADJUSTMENTS

> After the system has been accepted by the RE and has successfully
> operated for one month without a mechanical or electrical failure or
> breakdown due to normal operation, the Control System Supplier shall
> return to modify and adjust logic implemented by the programmable
> controller in accordance with the directions of the RE. The Control
> System Supplier shall provide two days of service at the site to
> implement and trouble shoot these adjustments.

END OF SECTION